LIBRARY  OF  PRINCETON 


w  17  m 


THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 


PA  817  , D35  1923 
Davis,  William  Hersey,  1887- 
1958. 

Beginner's  grammar  of  the 

fl κωλ V  War»?  Tc of-  amant* 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/beginnersgrarnmar00davi_0 


BEGINNER’S  GRAMMAR  OF 
THE  GREEK  NEW  TESTAMENT 

WILLIAM  HERSEY  DAVIS,  M.A.,  Th.D. 


I 


!  .■ 

•  4.  · 


. 


\ 


) 


. 


, 

• 

' 

,  '  · 

' 


BEGINNER’S  GRAMMAR 


OF  THE 

GREEK  NEW  TESTAMENT 


BY 

WILLIAM  HERSEY  DAVIS,  M.A.,  Th.D. 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR  OF  NEW  TESTAMENT  INTERPRETATION 
IN  THE  SOUTHERN  BAPTIST  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 
LOUISVILLE,  KENTUCKY 


HARPER  &  BROTHERS  PUBLISHERS 


NEW  YORK  AND  LONDON 


This  book  is  complete  and  unabridged 
in  contents,  and  is  manufactured  in  strict 
conformity  with  Government  regulations 
for  saving  paper. 


COPYRIGHT,  1923, 

BY  THE  SUNDAY  SCHOOL  BOARD 
OF  THE  SOUTHERN  BAPTIST  CONVENTION 


BEGINNER'S  GRAMMAR  OF  THE  GREEK  NEW  TESTAMENT 
PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA 

A-U 


To 

A.  T.  ROBERTSON,  D.D.,  LL.D., 

INCOMPARABLE  MASTER  AND  TEACHER 
OF  THE  GREEK  NEW  TESTAMENT 


This  Volume 
is  affectionately  Dedicated 


I 


.  · 

'· 


'· 

. 


m 


. 


' 


I 


.  . 


. 


.  . 


INTRODUCTION 


It  gives  me  the  greatest  pleasure  to  write  some 
words  of  an  introductory  nature  to  the  Beginner's 
Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  by  my  beloved 
colleague,  Dr.  W.  H.  Davis.  The  need  of  this  book 
is  urgent.  Hardly  a  week  goes  by  that  I  am  not 
asked  to  recommend  such  a  book  to  young  minis¬ 
ters,  to  pastors,  to  laymen,  to  women,  many  of  whom 
wish  to  learn  how  to  read  the  Greek  New  Testament 
without  the  advantage  of  a  teacher.  There  are  a 
number  of  grammars  that  undertake  to  do  this 
thing,  but  they  all  start  in  the  wrong  way,  except 
Moulton’s  Introduction ,  which  is  not  well  suited  to 
American  schools. 

It  is  a  curious  thing  how  traditionalism  in  lin¬ 
guistic  teaching  has  held  in  slavery  so  many  men 
who  teach  Greek  today  precisely  as  it  was  done  a 
hundred  years  ago.  The  revolutionary  progress  made 
by  Brugmann  and  Delbruck  in  comparative  philol¬ 
ogy  is  left  to  one  side  for  technical  scholars.  Pro¬ 
fessor  Davis  starts  the  student  right.  The  stand¬ 
point  of  Thumb’s  revision  of  Brugmann’s  Griechische 
Grammatik  is  presented  with  clearness  and  precision. 
The  student  who  starts  with  Davis’s  Beginner's  Gram¬ 
mar  can  go  right  on  to  my  Short  Grammar  of  the 
Greek  New  Testament  without  a  break  or  jolt.  Then 
he  will  be  ready  for  my  Grammar  of  the  Greek  New 


vu 


Vlll 


INTRODUCTION 


Testament  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Research.  It  is 
only  a  step  further  to  the  Brugmann-Thumb  Grie- 
chische  Grammatik  and  in  the  same  direction.  In 
my  experience  of  thirty-five  years  as  a  teacher  of 
the  Greek  New  Testament  I  have  always  had  num¬ 
bers  of  men  who  floundered  over  the  cases,  the  prepo¬ 
sitions,  the  tenses,  the  voices,  the  modes,  because 
they  had  learned  these  basal  things  in  the  old  un¬ 
scientific  way.  It  is  like  pulling  eye-teeth  for  such 
a  one  to  learn  that  the  genitive  is  not  the  whence- 
case,  but  only  the  case  of  kind  or  genus,  and  that 
the  ablative  is  the  whence-case.  If  one  gets  it  into 
his  head  that  the  root  idea  of  tense  is  time,  he  may 
never  get  it  out  and  he  will  therefore  never  under¬ 
stand  the  beauty  of  the  Greek  tense,  the  most  won¬ 
derful  development  in  the  history  of  language. 
Professor  Davis  is  absolutely  at  home  in  the  new 
science  of  language  and,  I  may  add,  is  the  most 
brilliant  student  of  Greek  that  I  have  ever  had.  One 
should,  if  possible,  take  the  college  course  in  ancient 
Greek.  He  needs  this  background  and  this  contact 
with  the  glorious  period  of  the  Greek  language.  But 
the  New  Testament  is  the  chief  glory  of  the  Greek 
tongue,  and  one  can  begin  it  in  the  right  way  under 
Professor  Davis’s  tutelage. 

Professor  Davis  is  a  master  of  the  papyri  and  so 
of  the  Κοΐηέ  in  which  the  New  Testament  books 
are  written.  He  is  not  giving  the  grammar  of  the 
literary  Attic,  but  the  grammar  of  the  Koine  of  the 
first  century  A.D.  This  fact  is  the  second  linguistic 
discovery  that  has  revolutionized  the  study  of  the 
Greek  New  Testament.  Comparative  philology  and 


INTRODUCTION 


iX 


the  papyri  discoveries  have  put  the  old  grammars 
out  of  date  and  all  the  new  ones  that  ignore  the  tre¬ 
mendous  progress  thus  made.  It  is  now  known  that 
the  Greek  of  the  New  Testament  is  not  literary 
Attic  nor  is  it  a  peculiar  Hebrew  jargon  or  sacred 
Greek  dialect.  At  bottom  it  is  simply  straight  Koine 
of  the  first  century  A.D.  like  that  found  in  the  in¬ 
scriptions  of  Asia  Minor  and  in  the  papyri  of  Egypt. 
The  papyri  give  us  many  thousands  of  examples  of 
the  language  of  the  life  of  the  first  century  a.d.  in 
Egypt.  There  are  business  contracts,  bills,  deeds, 
marriage  contracts,  wills,  decrees,  love  letters,  busi¬ 
ness  correspondence,  anything  and  everything  that 
made  up  the  life  of  the  people  of  the  time.  These 
velics  preserve  the  language  of  people  of  all  degrees 
of  culture.  The  Koine  means  the  language  common 
to  people  everywhere,  not  merely  the  language  of 
the  common  people.  It  was  the  means  of  commu¬ 
nication  all  over  the  Roman  Empire.  The  most  of 
the  papyri  examples  give  the  vernacular  form  of  the 
Koine,  but  there  are  specimens  of  the  literary  Koine 
also.  The  New  Testament  is  mainly  in  the  ver¬ 
nacular  Koine,  but  it  is  the  vernacular  of  men  of 
great  ability  and  some  of  them  have  a  decided  liter¬ 
ary  flavor,  as  we  see  in  the  writings  of  Luke,  the 
Epistles  of  Paul,  the  Epistle  to  the  Plebrews. 

Language  changes  with  the  years  if  it  is  alive. 
Changes  occur  in  the  meaning  of  words,  and  here 
the  papyri  give  very  great  help  in  showing  what  the 
words  of  the  New  Testament  meant  in  everyday 
life.  Dr.  Davis  himself  has  found  over  two  thou¬ 
sand  words  in  the  papyri  not  given  in  any  of  the 


INTRODUCTION 


Greek  lexicons.  But  the  forms  of  the  Koine  show 
numerous  changes  from  those  in  the  Attic.  Dr. 
Davis’s  Grammar  gives  the  forms  of  the  Koine,  not 
of  the  Attic  Greek.  Syntax  shows  some  changes  also, 
and  these  are  given  rightly. 

There  are  Hebraisms  and  Aramaisms  in  the  Greek 
New  Testament,  but  the  number  is  nothing  like  so 
great  as  was  once  thought  to  be  the  case.  It  is 
natural  that  Jews  who  spoke  and  wrrote  the  Koine 
should  reveal  here  and  there  familiarity  with  He¬ 
brew  and  Aramaic.  Even  Luke,  probably  a  Greek, 
has  the  ear-marks  of  Aramaic  sources  and  of  knowl¬ 
edge  of  the  Septuagint.  But,  in  the  main,  the  New 
Testament  is  written  in  the  current  Koine,  as  one 
would  expect. 

It  should  be  added  that  Dr.  Davis  confines  him¬ 
self  to  a  Beginner’s  Grammar.  He  does  not  try  to 
teach  the  ancient  Attic  on  the  one  hand  nor  to  go 
over  the  ground  of  my  Short  Grammar  on  the  other. 
He  definitely  undertakes  to  prepare  students  for  the 
Short  Grammar ,  and  he  does  it  with  consummate 
skill.  He  supplies  in  masterly  fashion  the  book  that 
was  needed.  He  will  smooth  the  path  for  the  be¬ 
ginner  in  the  Greek  New  Testament.  He  will  make 
it  so  easy  that  one  will  wonder  wThy  he  was  so  long 
starting  on  the  road  that  leads  one  into  the  heart 
of  the  greatest  of  all  the  books  of  earth,  the  Greek 
New  Testament. 

A.  T.  Robertson 

Louisville ,  Ky. 


NOTE  TO  FIFTH  EDITION 


In  the  present  edition  various  corrections  and  a 
few  additions  have  been  incorporated.  A  revised  and 
enlarged  edition  is  planned  to  appear  when  circum¬ 
stances  warrant  it.  I  thank  my  colleague,  Dr.  E.  A. 
McDowell,  Jr.,  for  corrections  and  valuable  sugges¬ 
tions.  He  is  at  work  on  a  Koine  reader  which  may 
be  used  in  conjunction  with  the  Grammar. 

W.  Hersey  Davis 


Louisville ,  Kentucky , 
1942 


PREFACE 


Dr.  A.  T.  Robertson  wrote  in  the  Preface  to  his 
Short  Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament:  “  Three 
types  of  New  Testament  grammars  are  needed:  a 
beginner’s  grammar  for  men  who  have  had  no  Greek 
training,  an  advanced  and  complete  grammar  for 
scholars  and  more  critical  seminary  work,  an  inter¬ 
mediate  handy  working  grammar  for  men  familiar 
with  the  elements  of  Greek  both  in  school  and  in 
the  pastorate.”  This  book  is  designed  to  meet  the 
need  for  the  first  type.  It  is  intended  for  those  who 
are  beginning  the  study  of  the  Greek  New  Testa¬ 
ment  or  have  an  imperfect  knowledge  of  the  essen¬ 
tials  of  the  Greek  of  the  New  Testament,  and  to 
serve  as  a  preparation  for  A  Short  Grammar  of  the 
G?eek  New  Testament  (A.  T.  Robertson). 

The  book  is  a  beginner’s  book.  It  is  the  result  of 
class-room  experience  of  many  years.  The  need  and 
preparation  of  a  beginner’s  class  in  Greek  has  de¬ 
termined  the  method  and  order  of  presentation. 
The  Greek  of  the  New  Testament  is  the  Koine  of 
the  first  century  a.d.  It  is  presented  as  such  in  this 
book.  The  historical  development  of  the  Greek  lan¬ 
guage  has  been  kept  in  mind. 

No  forms  or  words  are  given  which  do  not  occur 
in  the  Greek  New  Testament.  All  illustrations  and 
sentences  for  translation  have  been  taken  from  the 


Xll 


PREFACE 


New  Testament.  Those  words  which  are  of  the 
most  frequent  occurrence  are  presented  first. 

In  this  book  especial  stress  has  been  laid  upon  the 
meaning  of  the  cases,  the  prepositions,  and  the  tenses, 
wherein  most  beginner’s  books  have  been  faulty. 

The  author  wishes  to  record  his  great  indebted¬ 
ness  to  his  teacher,  Professor  A.  T.  Robertson,  D.D., 
LL.D.,  of  the  Southern  Baptist  Theological  Semi¬ 
nary,  for  instruction  and  for  invaluable  assistance. 
Without  his  encouragement  the  work  would  not 
have  been  begun  nor  would  it  have  been  brought  to 
completion.  Whatever  of  worth  this  book  may  have, 
it  owes  much  (if  not  all)  to  his  rare  scholarship  and 
experience  of  many  years  as  a  teacher  of  the  Greek 
New  Testament.  In  fact  his  monumental  work  A 
Grammar  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  in  the  Light  of 
Historical  Research  is  the  authority  from  which  this 
book  drew  at  all  points.  Of  course  he  is  not  at  all 
responsible  for  any  faults  or  errors  which  this  book 
may  contain. 

The  names  of  many  writers  whose  works  were 
consulted,  the  author  cannot  here  recount,  except 
Brugmann-Thumb  ( Griechische  Grammatik) . 

In  conclusion  the  author  wishes  here  to  express 
his  thanks  to  his  colleague,  Professor  F.  M.  Powell, 
A.M.,  Th.D.,  for  valuable  criticisms  of  a  great  part 
of  the  book  in  manuscript,  to  his  friend,  Dr.  A.  R. 
Bond,  for  expert  criticism  and  preparation  of  the 
Index,  and  to  his  father,  Rev.  Q.  C.  Davis,  Albe¬ 
marle,  N.C.,  for  his  sympathy  and  guidance. 

W.  Hersey  Davis 


Louisville ,  Ky. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Introduction  by  Rev.  Prof.  A.  T.  Robertson,  D.D.  vii 
Preface .  xi 

PART  I:  LESSONS 

LESSON 

I  The  Alphabet .  ig 

II  Vowels,  Diphthongs,  Breathing  .  21 

III  Accent . 22 

IV  Present  Indicative  Active  ...  25 

V  Second  or  o-Declension  ....  27 

VI  Declension  of  o-Stems  (Continued)  .  30 

VII  Declension  of  o-Stems  (Continued)  .  32 

VIII  Declension  of  o-Stems  (Concluded)  .  35 

IX  Present  Indicative  Middle  ...  36 

X  Present  Indicative  Passive  ...  39 

XI  Imperfect  Indicative  Active  ...  41 

XII  Prepositions . 43 

XIII  Imperfect  Indicative  Middle  and 

Passive . 46 

XIV  First  Declension  or  Declension  of 

<z-Stems . 49 

XV  First  Declension  (Continued)  .  .  51 

XVI  First  Declension  (Continued)  .  .  53 

XVII  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second 

Declensions . 56 

XVIII  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second 

Declensions  (Continued)  ....  59 


Xlil 


XIV 


CONTENTS 


LESSON  PAGE 

XIX  Personal  Pronouns  and  ε?μ£,  I  am  .  60 

XX  Third  Personal  Pronoun.  Imper¬ 
fect  of  είμί . 65 

XXI  Defective  (“Deponent”)  Verbs. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns  ουτος 
and  έκεΐνος . 6g 

XXII  Present  Subjunctive  Active  ...  73 

XXIII  Present  Subjunctive  Middle  and 

Passive . 75 

XXIV  Second  Aorist  Indicative  Active 

and  Middle . 77 

XXV  Second  Aorist  Subjunctive  Active 

and  Middle . 81 

XXVI  Third  Declension:  Neuter  Sub¬ 
stantives  IN  -ματ . 83 

XXVII  Future  Indicative  Active  and  Mid¬ 
dle  . 86 

XXVIII  Future  Indicative  Active  and  Mid¬ 
dle  (Continued) . 89 

XXIX  Third  Declension:  Lingual  Mute 

Stems . 93 


XXX  Participles:  The  Present,  Active, 

Middle  and  Passive . 06 

XXXI  Participles:  The  Second  Aorist 

Active  and  Middle . 101 

XXXII  Third  Declension  (Continued) : 

Mutes  and  Liquids . 106 

XXXIII  Third  Declension  f  Continued): 

Liquid  Stems  in  -ερ  (Syncopated). 

The  Relative  Pronoun  .  .  .  .  no 

XXXIV  Third  Declension  (Continued) : 

Stems  in  -1.  The  Interrogative 
and  Indefinite  Pronouns  .  .  .  113 

XXXV  Third  Declension  (Continued) : 

Stems  in  -ευ  (F)  and  -εσ  .  .  .  .  117 


LESSON 

XXXVI 

XXXVII 

XXXVIII 

XXXIX 

XL 

XLI 

XLII 


XLIII 

XLIV 

XLV 


XLVI 

XL  VI I 
XLVIII 
XLIX 

L 


LI 


CONTENTS  xv 

PAGE 

First  Aorist  Indicative  Active  and 
Middle . 120 

First  Aorist  Subjunctive  Active 
and  Middle . 125 


First  Aorist  Active  and  Middle  Par¬ 
ticiple.  Adjectives  of  the  Third 
Declension.  Declension  of  χάς  .  128 

Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declen¬ 
sion:  Stems  in  -ες.  Irregular 

Adjectives  πολύς  and  με'γας  .  .  133 

First  Aorist  Passive  Indicative  and 
Subjunctive.  Future  Passive  In¬ 
dicative  . 138 

Aorist  Passive  (Continued)  .  .  .  142 

Some  Irregular  Substantives  of 
the  Third  Declension.  Some 
Uses  of  the  Infinitive  ....  146 

The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Indica¬ 
tive  Active  .  149 

The  Perfect  Tense  (Continued)  .  154 

Reflexive  Pronouns.  Reciprocal 
Pronoun.  Indefinite  Relative 
Pronoun . 158 

Future  Indicative  and  Aorist  Ac¬ 
tive  and  Middle  of  Liquid  Verbs  162 

The  Imperative  Mode . 166 

Numerals,  ούδείς . ;  .  171 

Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs 
in  -έω . 174 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Ad¬ 
verbs  . 178 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Ad¬ 
verbs  (Continued).  Declension  of 
Adjectives  with  Stems  in  -ov  .  .  182 


xvi 


CONTENTS 


LESSON  PAGE 

LII  Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs 

in  -άω . 185 


LIII  Impersonal  Verbs,  χρίν  (η)  and  the 

Infinitive,  καί  έγένετο  ....  189 

LI.V  Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs 

in  -όω  . 191 

LV  Conjugation  of  μι-VERBs:  δίδωμι 

Second  Aorist  of  γινώσκω  .  .  .  195 

LVI  Conjugation  of  μι-VERBS  (Con¬ 

tinued):  Υστημι.  Present  Impera¬ 
tive  of  είμί.  Second  Aorist  of 


βαίνω,  φημί . 200 

LVII  Conjugation  of  μι-VERBS  ‘(Con¬ 
tinued):  τίθημι . 204 

LVIII  Conjugation  of  μι-VERBS  (Con¬ 
tinued):  άφίημι,  συνίημι.  Other 
Verbs:  Old  Forms . 209 


LIX  The  Optative  Mode.  Wishes  .  .  212 


PART  II:  SUPPLEMENT  TO  PART  I 


A.  Sounds  and  Writing . 217 

B.  Paradigms  of  Nouns  . 219 

C.  Pronouns . 224 

D.  Paradigms  of  the  Verb  . 225 

E.  Classes  of  Verbs . 232 

Note  on  Perfect  Middle  (Passive)  of  Mute 
Stems . 239 

ENGLISH  INDEX . 243 

VOCABULARIES . 


PART  I:  LESSONS 


·> 


< 


.  ■  ^ 


\ ' 


. 


■ 


' 


’ 


■ 


' 


BEGINNER’S  GRAMMAR  OF  THE 
GREEK  NEW  TESTAMENT 


LESSON  I 
The  Alphabet 

1.  The  Greek  alphabet  had  in  the  Koine  or  Hellen¬ 
istic  period  twenty-four  letters. 


Form  of  capital 
letters 

Name 

Form  of  small 
letters 

Sounded  as  1 

A 

alpha 

a 

a  in  father 

B 

beta 

e 

b  in  boy 

Γ 

gamma 

Y 

g  in  go 

Δ 

delta 

δ 

d  in  day 

E 

epsilon 

ε 

e  (short)  in  met 

Z 

zeta 

ζ 

1 

z  in  daze 
e  in  fete 

H 

eta 

η  1 

a  in  mate 

Θ 

theta 

θ 

th  in  thin 

I 

iota 

1  ' 

\  i  in  polfce 
(i  in  fft 

1  The  sounds  adopted  as  equivalent  to  the  vowels  in  Greek  are 
given  for  the  sake  of  a  consistent  method  of  pronunciation.  Already  — 
in  the  first  century  a.d.  some  of  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  were 
sometimes  pronounced  alike,  as  in  Modem  Greek,  and  consequently  i 
were  confused:  thus  ει,  t,  η,  j],  u,  ut,  ot  (being  pronounced  alike)  were 
sometimes  written  one  for  another;  so  with  ε  and  at,  and  o  and  ω. 

The  confusion  of  vowels  and  diphthongs  of  e  sound  is  called  itacism. 

There  is  clear  evidence  that  in  the  first  century  a.d.,  β  had  the 
twofold  pronunciation  of  b  and  v  (labiodental),  as  in  Modern  Greek, 
and  γ  had  begun  to  have  the  value  of  y  (the  j  value  of  i  before 
e  and  i  sounds) . 


19 


20 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Form  of  capital 
letters 

Name 

Form  of  small  Sounded  as 
letters 

K 

kappa 

κ 

k  in  keep 

Λ 

lambda 

λ 

1  in  Zed 

M 

mu 

μ 

m  in  man 

N 

nu 

V 

n  in  net 

Ξ 

xi 

ξ 

x  in  lax 

0 

omicron 

0 

o  (short)  in  omit 

Π 

pi 

% 

p  in  peg 

P 

rho 

Ρ 

r  in  run 

Σ 

sigma 

ς 

s  in  sit 

T 

tau 

τ 

t  in  Zen 

T 

upsilon 

υ 

u  in  Fr.  t u,  Ger. 
Ύύτ 

Φ 

phi 

φ 

ph  in  graphic 

X 

chi 

X 

ch  in  Ger.  ich, 
Scotch  loch 
chasm 

Ψ 

psi 

Ψ 

ps  in  tops 

Ω 

omega 

ω 

o  (long)  in  note 

a.  At  the  end  of  a 

word  sigma 

is  written  ς,  else- 

where  σ;  as  in  σεισμός. 

At  first  learn  the  form  of  the  small  letters  only. 
Write  each  letter  many,  many  times,  pronouncing  its 
name  each  time,  until  the  whole  alphabet  can  from 
memory  be  uttered  and  written  without  hesitation. 


2.  Every  Greek  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it 
has  separate  vowels  or  diphthongs. 

Learn  the  sound  of  each  letter. 

Pronounce  aloud  the  following  words: 
θε-λω,  the-lo  γρα-φη,  gra-phe 

νο-μος,  no-mos  λε-γω,  le-go 


no-mos 


THE  ALPHABET 


£1 


βλε-χω, 

ble-ρό 

σω-ζω, 

SO-ZO 

φι-λος, 

phi-los 

κοσ-μος. 

kos-mos 

νυξ, 

nux 

ε-λω, 

e-cho 

α-δελ-φος. 

a-del-phos 

ψυ-χη, 

psu-che 

αν-θρω-χος. 

an-thro-pos 

θε-λη-μα 

the-le-ma 

LESSON 

II 

Vowels,  Diphthongs 

,  Breathing 

3.  There 

are  seven  vowels: 

α,  ε,  η,  c,  ο, 

υ,  ω.  η  is 

the  long  form  of  ε,  and  ω  is  the  long  form  of  o; 
ε  and  o  are  always  short,  η  and  ω  always  long.  This 
list,  then,  corresponds  in  a  way  to  the  English 
a,  e,  i,  o,  u.  a,  c,  u  are  sometimes  long  and  some¬ 
times  short;  the  long  and  short  forms  are  not  dis¬ 
tinguished  by  separate  characters. 


4.  A  diphthong  is  two  vowel  sounds  fused  into  one. 
The  diphthongs  are: 


ai  in  aisle 
=  au  in  Ger.  haws 
=  ou  in  house 
ει  =  ei  in  height 


a  t 


αυ 


ou  =  ou  in  group 
ευ  =  eu  in  ieud 

η  u  =  approximately  the 
same  sound  as  ευ. 


οι  =  oi  in  oil 


ut  =  we 


Also  there  are  α,  η,  φ;  but  the  t  (iota  written  under¬ 
neath  a  vowel  is  called  ‘iota-subscript’)  does  not 
affect  the  sound  of  the  vowel. 

5.  Many  Greek  words  begin  with  a  sound  equivalent 
to  the  English  h.  This  sound  is  indicated  by  writing 
a  sign  (')  called  the  rough  breathing  over  a  vowel  or 


22 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


diphthong  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  (over  the 
second  vowel  of  a  diphthong).  Thus  6Boq  =  hodos; 
eupcay.(i)  =  heurisko.  If  an  initial  vowel  or  diphthong 
is  not  pronounced  with  an  h ,  the  sign  (’),  called  the 
smooth  breathing,  is  written  over  it.  Thus  ακούω  = 
akouo;  oupavoq  =  ouranos.  ·  Initial  u  always  has  the 
rough  breathing. 

6.  Write  the  following  in  English  (Roman)  letters  in 
accordance  with  the  equivalents  given  in  I  and  4. 

βάλετε  είς  τα  δεξιά  μέρη  του  χλοιου  το  δικτυον  και 
ευρησετε.  τις  άρα  ουτος  έστιν;  ή  ψυχή  αυτού  έφοβηθη.  ο\ 
άνθρωποι  έξηλθον  έκ  του  οίκου. 

Write  the  following  words  in  Greek  characters: 
kai  palin  erxato  didaskein  para  ten  thalassan.  kai 
sunagetai  pros  auton  ochlos  pleistos,  hoste  auton  eis 
ploion  embanta  kathesthai.  periblepsamenos  autous 
legei  ide  he  meter  mou  kai  hoi  adelphoi  mou. 

LESSON  III 
Accent 

7.  Most  Greek  words  are  written  with  accents. 
The  accents  are  the  acute  ('),  the  grave  ('),  and  the 
circumflex  (').  Thus,  λαμβάνει  τδν  δοΰλον;  άκούω  τής 
φωνής.  On  inspection  it  will  be  noticed  that  the 
accent  stands  over  the  vowel  of  the  accented  syllable, 
and  in  a  diphthong  over  the  second  vowel. 

8.  To  us  in  English  accent  means  a  stress  of  the 
voice.  Also  to  the  native  Greeks  of  today  it  means 
simply  stress  of  voice.  Originally,  however,  accents 
indicated  the  tone  or  pitch  of  the  voice  in  pro¬ 
nouncing  syllables. 


ACCENT  AND  PRONUNCIATION 


23 


In  pronunciation  we  make  no  distinction  between 
the  accents. 


9.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ultima; 
the  next  to  the  last,  the  penult;  and  the  one  before 
the  penult,  the  antepenult. 


10.  Learn  the  following  verbs: 


άγω,  I  lead ,  bring ,  go 

άκούω,  I  hear 
βλέχω,  I  see ,  look  at 
γινώσκω,  I  know 
γράφω,  I  write 
ευρίσκω,  I  find 


θέλω,  I  wish ,  will 
λαμβάνω,  I  take ,  receive 
λέγω,  I  say 

χέμχω,  I  send 

χιστεύω,  I  believe 

έχω,  I  have ,  hold 


Write  and  pronounce  aloud  each  of  these  words 
(with  the  proper  breathing  and  accent)  fifteen  to 
twenty  times,  associating  with  each  word  its  mean¬ 
ing,  as 

άγω,  a-go,  I  lead.  Notice  how  the  breathing  and 
accent  are  written  together  when  they  occur  on 
the  same  syllable. 

άκούω,  a-kofi-ό,  I  hear.  Observe  that  the  accent  is 
written  over  the  second  vowel  of  the  diphthong 
ου.  See  7·1 


11.  Observe  that:  I.  Every  initial  vowel  or  diph¬ 
thong  has  a  breathing.  2.  The  acute  accent  stands 
on  the  penult.  The  accent  of  verbs  is  generally 
thrown  as  far  back  as  possible  from  the  last  syllable. 
This  is  known  as  recessive  accent.  Here  the  position 
of  the  accent  is  determined  by  the  last  syllable*. 


1  Sections  in  the  Lesson  Part  are  referred  to  by  the  simple  number 
(as  7).  Sections  in  the  Part  dealing  with  Etymology  are  referred 
to  by  a  section  sign  (§)  before  the  number  (as  §  6). 


24 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


(i)  If  the  last  syllable  is  long,  the  accent  falls  on 
the  penult.  (2)  If  the  last  syllable  is  short,  the  ac¬ 
cent  falls  on  the  antepenult.  (3)  A  syllable  is  long 
if  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong;  other¬ 
wise  it  is  short.  3.  The  ending  -g)  in  each  of  these 
words  has  the  force  of  the  personal  pronoun  I  in 
English. 

12.  1.  In  Greek  the  endings  of  verbs  generally 
express  the  different  persons,  as  I,  thou  (you),  he , 
we,  ye  (you),  they.  What  is  the  ending  of  each 
verb  in  10?  The  endings  of  verbs  denoting  person 
are  called  personal  endmgs;  they  are  fragments 
of  old  pronouns  and  are  inseparable  from  the  verb. 
But  in  English  the  personal  pronouns  are  sepa¬ 
rate  from  the  verb  and  are  generally  written  before 
it. 

In  the  case  of  most  verbs  the  original  personal 
endings  in  the  singular  of  the  present  indicative 
are  no  longer  apparent  in  the  forms  of  the  -ω- 
verbs. 

2.  The  verb  affirms  action  (including  “ state”). 
A  Greek  verb  has  tense,  mode,  and  voice.  Tense 
expresses  the  state  of  the  action  of  the  verb;  mode 
gives  the  manner  of  affirmation  of  the  verb,  how  it  is 
made;  voice  tells  how  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
related  to  the  subject.  Verbs  indicate  affirmation 
by  the  personal  endings. 

The  student  should  now  begin  to  make  a  Greek- 
English  and  an  English- Greek  vocabulary  arranged 
according  to  the  alphabet.  A  good  note  book  of 
convenient  size  should  be  used. 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE 


25 


LESSON  IV 


13. 


Present  Indicative  Active 


1.  λέγ-ω,  I  am  saying , 

I  say 

2.  λέγ-εις,  you  are  say¬ 

ing,  say 

3.  λέγ-ει,  he,  she,  or  it 

is  saying,  says 


λέγ-ο-μεν,  we  are  saying, 
say 

λέγ-ε-τε,  ye  are  saying, 
say 

λέγ-ουσι,  they  are  say¬ 
ing,  say 


Infinitive,  λέγ-ειν,  to  be  saying,  to  say 


14.  Only  in  the  indicative  mode  in  Greek  do  the 
tenses  show  time  absolutely.  The  main  idea  of 
tense  is  the  “kind  of  action ,”  the  state  of  action. 
Even  in  the  indicative  time  is  a  secondary  idea. 
Continued  action,  or  a  state  of  incompletion,  is 
denoted  by  the  present  tense, — this  kind  of  action 
is  called  durative  or  linear.  The  action  of  the  verb 
is  shown  in  progress,  as  going  on.  Observe  that  the 
indicative  mode  in  Greek  has  practically  the  same 
declarative  force  as  it  has  in  English.  In  13  the 
subject  is  represented  as  acting. 

15.  To  conjugate  a  verb  is  to  give  all  the  variations 
in  its  terminations  in  the  proper  order.  As  given  in 
13,  λέγω  is  said  to  be  conjugated  in  the  present  in  ¬ 
dicative  active  and  present  infinitive  active. 

16.  Observe  in  the  conjugation  of  λέγω:  I.  The 
stem  λεγ-  remains  unchanged  throughout.  2.  A 
vowel  follows  this  stem.  3.  The  vowel  is  0  before 
endings  that  begin  with  μ  or  v,  and  ε  before  other 
letters.  This  vowel  (sometimes  designated  %)  is 
called  the  thematic  vowel.  4.  The  thematic  vowel 


26 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


is  followed  by  an  ending  (the  personal  ending,  see  12) 
clearly  seen  in  -μεν  and  -τε  of  the  first  and  second 
persons  plural. 

Thus,  λέγ-ε-τε  is  composed  of  the  stem  λεγ-,  the 
thematic  vowel  -ε-,  and  the  personal  ending  -τε. 

17.  The  personal  endings  of  the  active  voice,  pri¬ 
mary  tenses,1  in  their  primitive  form  were  these: 


Singular 

Plural 

I.  -μι,  I 

-μεν. 

we 

2.  -ς  (for  -σι),  thou 

-τε, 

ye 

3.  -σι  (for  -τι),  he ,  she ,  it 

-νσι  (for  -ντι),  they 

The  personal  endings  are  remnants  of  personal  pro¬ 
nouns. 

18.  The  thematic  vowel  with  the  personal  ending 
may  be  exhibited  thus: 

1.  ο-μι  ο-μεν 

2.  ε-ς  (for  ε-σι)  ε-τε 

3·  ε-σι  (for  ετι)  ο-νσι  (for  ο-ντι) 

a.  The  first  person  singular  -ω  is  probably  the 
result  of  dropping  the  personal  ending  -μι  and  the 
consequent  lengthening  of  the  thematic  vowel  0  to  oj. 
b.  -εσι  and  -ετι  of  the  second  and  third  persons  singular 
result  in  -εις  and  -ει  respectively,  c.  In  -ονσι  of  the 
third  person  plural  v  is  expelled  and  0  is  lengthened 
to  ου  (such  vowel  change  is  called  compensatory 
lengthening) . 

19.  The  resultant  endings  from  combination  of  the 
thematic  vowel  and  the  personal  ending  are 

1  The  primary  tenses  are  the  present,  the  future,  and  the  perfect; 
the  secondary  tenses  are  the  imperfect,  the  aorist,  and  the  pluperfect. 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


27 


1.  -ω,  I 

2.  -εις,  thou 

3.  -ει,  he,  she,  it 


-ομεν,  we 
-ετε,  ye 
-ου σι,  they 


These  forms  must  he  mastered.  Nothing  short  of 
absolute  mastery  of  forms  will  answer  the  purpose. 

20.  The  infinitive  does  not  have  personal  endings. 
It  is  a  verbal  substantive  in  a  fixed  case  form,  -ειν 
is  the  result  of  contraction  of  the  thematic  vowel  ε 
and  the  old  locative  ending  -εν  (-ενι). 

21.  Exercises  for  pronunciation  and  translation. 

I.  Translate  into  English: 

I.  βλέπει,  άκουομεν,  γινώσκετε.  2.  λαμβάνουσι,  γράφεις, 
εχει,  πιστευομεν.  3·  πέμπειν,  ευρίσκει,  άγετε,  γινώσκουσι. 
4·  θέλομεν  βλέπειν,  έχομεν,  γινώσκετε.  5·  «γουσι,  λαμ¬ 
βάνει,  έχουσι. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek: 

ι.  We  know,  I  see,  he  finds.  2.  You  send,  they 
know,  ye  lead.  3.  We  wish  to  know,  he  hears. 
4.  They  write,  he  has,  you  believe. 


LESSON  V 

The  Second  Declension  or  Declension  of  0 -Stems 


22. 


Vocabulary 


άρτος,  bread 
θρόνος,  throne 
κόσμος,  world 
λίθος,  stone 
λόγος,  word 


όχλος,  crowd 
τόπος,  place 
χρόνος,  time 
φίλος,  fnend 


νόμος,  law 


$8 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


The  student  should  take  up  the  words  of  the 
vocabulary,  one  at  a  time,  writing  and  pronouncing 
(aloud)  each  word  with  its  proper  accent  and  breath¬ 
ing  until  it  can  be  spoken  or  written  without  hesita¬ 
tion.  Learn  thoroughly  the  meaning  of  each  word. 
Do  not  take  up  a  new  word  until  the  preceding  word 
has  been  thoroughly  mastered. 

23.  Observe:  I.  All  the  words  in  the  vocabulary 
end  in  -ος.  2.  All  these  substantives  belong  to  the  o- 
declension.  3.  They  all  have  an  acute  accent  on  the 
penult. 

24.  In  Greek  all  nouns  (substantive  and  adjectives) 
are  declined  in  one  of  three  declensions.  Substantives 
of  the  second  declension  have  stems  in  -0-.  The 
stem  of  a  word  is  that  part  of  it  which  remains  vir¬ 
tually  unchanged  in  all  its  forms. 

25.  The  declension  of  λόγος,  of  the  second  declen¬ 
sion,  is: 


Stem  λογο- 


Plural 

λόγοι,  words 
λόγων,  of  words 
λόγων,  from  words 
λόγους,  in  or  at  words 


Singular 

Nom.  λόγος,  a  word 
Gen.  λόγου,  of  a  word 

Abl.  λόγου,  from  a  word 

Loc.  λόγω,  in,  οτ  at,  a  word 

Ins.  λόγ  cp,  iviih  or  by  a  word  λόγοις,  with  or  by  words 

Dat.  λόγω,  to  or  for  a  word  λόγους,  to  or  for  words 

Acc.  λόγον,  a  word  λόγους,  words 

Voc.  λόγε,  O  word  λόγοι,  0  words 

a .  In  the  dat.  sing,  the  ending  -ω  is  for  -0  +  at 
(dat.  case-ending)  =  ωι  =  ω.  In  the  loc.  sing,  the 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


29 


ending  -ω  is  for  -ο  +  i  (loc.  case-ending)  =ot  =  tot=  ω. 
In  the  ins.  sing,  the  ending  -ω  is  for  -ο  +  a  (ins.  case¬ 
ending)  =  ω.  Because  the  forms  of  these  cases 
were  pronounced  alike,  they  early  came  to  be 
written  alike,  b.  The  genitive  and  ablative  cases 
early  came  to  have  their  forms  alike,  c.  The  loc., 
ins.,  and  dat.  plural  have  the  ending  of  the  instru¬ 
mental  case  -οις.  d.  So  far  as  the  form  goes  the 
vocative  is  strictly  not  a  case.  The  endings  of  λόγος 
must  be  absolutely  mastered. 

26.  I.  Note  that  the  accent  on  λόγος  remains  ori 
the  same  syllable  throughout  the  declension.  In 
the  declension  of  a  substantive  the  accent  is  kept ,  if 
possible ,  on  the  same  syllable  on  which  it  rests  in  the 
nominative  case. 

2.  The  accent  of  the  nominative  case  must  be 
learned  by  observation  of  each  word. 

27.  It  is  to  be  observed,  from  25,  that  in  Greek 
there  are  eight  cases  (appearing  under  five  case- 
forms) :  Nominative,  Genitive,  Ablative,  Locative, 
Instrumental,  Dative,  Accusative,  and  Vocative. 
The  nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject,  corre¬ 
sponding  roughly  to  the  English  nominative.  The 
genitive  is  the  specifying  case,  expressed  in  English 
by  the  possessive  or  the  objective  with  of.  The 
ablative  is  the  whence  case  (origin  or  separation), 
expressed  in  English  by  off ,  out,  from,  away,  etc. 
The  locative  is  the  in  case,  corresponding  to  the 
English  in,  on,  among,  at,  by.  The  instrumental  is 
the  case  of  means  or  association,  expressed  in  English 
by  with,  by,  etc.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  personal 


30 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


interest  (denoting  advantage  or  disadvantage),  cor¬ 
responding  to  the  English  to  or  for,  or  indirect 
object.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  extension 
(whether  of  thought  or  verbal  action),  correspond¬ 
ing  roughly  to  the  English  direct  object.  The  voca¬ 
tive  is  the  case  of  address. 

28.  In  Greek  the  case-endings  of  nouns  express  the 
relation  of  words  to  each  other,  and  to  other  parts 
of  the  sentence.  In  English  this  relation  is  generally 
expressed  by  prepositions  (such  as  of,  for ,  at,  on, 
in,  by,  etc.)  and  position  of  words. 

29.  Exercises 

I.  I.  λίθω,  κόσμου,  Θρόνων.  2.  λόγοι  νόμου.  3·  λέγει 
όχλω.  4·  λαμβάνομεν  άρτον.  5*  οχλος  ακούει  λόγον 
νόμου. 

II.  ι.  In  a  place,  of  a  world.  2.  For  a  friend,  laws 
of  thrones.  3.  He  takes  a  stone.  4.  We  have 
bread  for  a  world.  5.  Ye  speak  words  to  crowds. 

LESSON  VI 

Declension  of  o-Stems  (Continued) 

30.  Vocabulary 

άγγελος,  angel,  messenger  διδάσκαλος,  teacher 

άνθρο^χος,  man  θάνατος,  death 

άχόστολος,  apostle  κύριος,  Lord 

In  άγγελος  the  first  γ  is  pronounced  like  ng . 
γ  is  always  pronounced  ng  when  it  comes  before  κ,  γ, 
χ,  or  ξ.  Some  words  of  the  vocabularies  so  far 
given  occur  1000  times  in  the  New  Testament. 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


31 


31.  Nouns  of  the  ο-declension  whose  nominatives 
end  in  -ος  are  generally  masculine  in  gender  (rarely 
feminine) . 

32.  Declension  of  the  masculine  article  6  the,  and 
άνθρωπος : 


STEM  άνθρωπο- 

Singular  Plural 

Nom.  δ  άνθρωπος,  the  man  οί  άνθρωποι,  the  men 

Gen.  το  0  ανθρώπου,  of  the  man  των  ανθρώπων,  ofthemen 

Abl.  του  ανθρώπου,  from  the  των  ανθρώπων,  from  the 

man  men 

Loc.  τώ  άνθρώπω,  in  or  at  τοΐς  άνθρώποις,  in  or  at 

the  man  the  men 

Ins.  τώ  άνθρώπω,  with  or  by  τοΐς  άνθρώποις,  withorby 

the  man  the  men 

Dat.  τώ  άνθρώπω,  to  or  for  τοΐς  άνθρώποις,  to  or  for 

the  man  the  men 

Acc.  τδν  άνθρωπον,  the  man  τους  άνθρώπους,  the  men 

Voc.  άνθρωπε,  0  man  άνθρωποι,  0  men 

I 

33.  Observe:  In  the  declension  of  άνθρωπος:  I.  The 
acute  accent  stands  on  the  antepenult  in  the 
nominative  case,  and  the  ending  -ος  is  short. 
2.  When  the  ultima  becomes  long,  as  in  the  endings 
-ου,  -φ,  -ων,  -οις,  -ους  (3,  4>  and  11  >  (3))  the  accent 
moves  to  the  penult.  Cf.  23,  2.  3.  Final  -01, 

although  a  diphthong,  is  considered  short  in  de¬ 
termining  the  place  of  accent  in  the  0-  declension. 

.  34.  The  acute  accent  may  stand  on  the  ultima, 
penult,  or  antepenult. 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


1.  The  acute  accent  cannot  stand  on  the  ante¬ 
penult  when  the  ultima  is  long,  but  may  stand  on 
the  penult. 

2.  The  acute  accent  (')  on  a  final  syllable  is 
changed  to  the  grave  (")  when  another  word  immedi¬ 
ately  follows  without  any  intervening  mark  of 
punctuation. 

35.  Note:  I.  The  article  in  the  nominative  case 
has  no  accent, — it  is  to  be  pronounced  with  the  fol¬ 
lowing  word.  2.  The  circumflex  accent  is  written 
over  the  gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  inst.,  dat.  cases  of  the  arti¬ 
cle;  and  the  syllable  on  which  it  stands  is  long. 

3.  The  grave  accent  in  the  acc.  case  of  the  article. 

4.  The  rough  breathing  over  the  nom.  case  of  the 
article. 

36.  The  definite  article  δ,  the ,  is  an  adjective,  and, 
like  all  adjectives  in  Greek,  it  is  declined  and 
agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  the  word  it 
modifies. 


37.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τώ  διδασκάλω,  άνθρώχων,  τοΐς  άχοστόλοις. 
2.  άγγελοί  τού  κυρίου,  τώ  θρόνω  του  κόσμου.  3·  δ  φίλος 
γράφει.  4·  δ  κύριος  λέγει.  5·  δ  διδάσκαλος  γινώσκει  τους 
νόμους.  6.  οι  φίλοι  χέμχουσι  άρτον  τοΐς  άχοστόλοις. 

II.  ι.  With  a  stone,  at  the  place,  of  the  world. 
2.  He  sees  the  crowd.  3.  The  man  wishes  to  find 
bread  for  the  apostles.  4.  We  see  the  friends  of  the 
Lord. 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


33 


LESSON  VII 


38. 


Declension  of  o -Stems  (Continued) 

Vocabulary 


άδελφός,  brother 
θεός,  God 


εργον,  work 
Ιερόν,  temple 
ίμάτιον,  garment 
χαιδίον,  little  child 
τέκνον,  child 


λαός,  people 
ουρανός,  heaven 
υιός,  son 


The  diphthong  in  ui  with  the  rough  breathing,  as 
in  υιός,  is  pronounced  like  hwee. 

39.  Declension  of  ουρανός. 


Stem  ούρανο- 


Plural 

ούρανοί 

ουρανών 

ουρανών 

ουρανοΐς 

ουρανοΐς 

ουρανοΐς 

ουρανούς 

ουρανοί 


Singular 


Νοπι.οόρανός 
Gen.  ουρανού 
Abl.  ουρανού 
Loc.  ουρανφ 
Ins.  ουρανφ 
Dat.  ουρανφ 
Acc.  ουρανόν 
Voc.  ουρανέ 


40.  Note  that:  ι.  In  every  gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  ins.,  and 
dat.  the  acute  (')  is  changed  to  the  circumflex  ("). 
2.  In  the  diphthongs  -οΰ  and  -οΐς  the  circumflex  is 
written  over  the  second  vowel.  See  7. 

41.  A  long  ultima  in  the  gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  ins.,  and 
dat.  cases,  if  accented,  receives  the  circumflex  accent. 

42.  Learn  the  declension  of  the  neuter  substantive 
έργον  with  the  neuter  article  τό  the.  Neuter  sub¬ 
stantives  of  the  0-  declension  have  their  nominatives 
sing,  in  -ov. 


34 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Stem  έργο- 


Singular 


Plural 


Nom.  το  εργον 
Gen.  του  έργου 
Abl.  τοΰ  έργου 
Loc.  τφ  εργω 
Ins.  τφ  εργω 
Dat.  τώ  εργω 
Acc.  τό  εργον 
Voc.  εργον 


τα  έργα 


τών  έργων 
τών  έργων 
τοΐς  εργοις 
τοΐς  εργοις 
τοΐς  εργοις 
τά  έργα 


έργα 


43.  It  is  to  be  observed  in  the  declension  of  εργον: 

1.  The  nom.,  acc.,  and  voc.  cases  in  the  singular 

have  the  same  ending,  -ov;  and  the  same  cases  in 
the  plural  have  the  ending  -a.  2.  The  inflection  of 

the  other  cases  is  the  same  as  that  of  masculine 
substantives. 

44.  The  neuter  article,  τό  the ,  differs  in  its  inflection 
from  the  masculine  article  only  in  the  nom.  and 
acc.  cases. 

45.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τφ  υίφ  του  Θεού.  2.  ευρίσκουσι  τον  υιόν  ένι  τφ 
ίερφ.  3·  δ  διδάσκαλος  θέλει  λέγειν  τοΐς  τέκνοις.  φ  & 
θεός  ουρανού  πέμπει  τους  αγγέλους  τοΐς  άνθρώποις.  5· 
αδελφοί  έχουσι  άρτον  καί2  ίμάτια  τοΐς  παιδίοις. 

II.  ι.  For  the  brothers  and  of  the  brothers. 

2.  The  friend  finds  the  garments  of  the  children. 

3.  We  see  the  son  in  the  temple.  4.  The  teacher 
wishes  to  speak  to  the  little  child. 

1  έν,  in ,  is  used  with  the  locative  case. 

2  καί,  and ,  used  more  times  than  any  other  conjunction  in  the 
New  Testament. 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


35 


LESSON  VIII 

Declension  of  o-Stems  (Concluded) 

46.  Vocabulary 


δούλος,  δ, 

servant 

δώρον,  τό, 

gift 

μισθός,  ό, 

pay ,  wages ,  χλοίον,  τό, 

boat 

reward 

οίκος,  ό, 

house 

χοτήριον,  τό,  CUp 

οίνος,  ό, 

wine 

χρόσωχον,  τό. 

,  face 

όφθαλμός,  ό, 

eye 

σάββατον,  τό, 

Sabbath 

άπδ,  prep.,  from,  off. 

used  only  with  the 

ablative 

case  in  the  New  Testament. 

Notice  that  ' 

when  the  breathing  and 

circumflex 

accent  belong  to  the  same 

vowel,  the  circumflex  is 

written  directly 

over  the  breathing,  as  in  οίκος,  etc. 

47.  The  following  are  the  declensions  of  δούλος  and 

δώρον: 

Stem  δούλο- 

Stem 

δωρο- 

Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom.  δούλος 

δούλοι 

Nom.  δώρον 

δώρα 

Gen.  δούλου 

δούλων 

Gen.  δώρου 

δώρων 

Abl.  δούλου 

δούλων 

Abl.  δώρου 

δώρων 

Loc.  δούλω 

δούλοις 

Loc.  δώρφ 

δώροις 

Ins.  δούλω 

δούλοις 

Ins.  δώρω 

δώροις 

Dat.  δούλω 

δούλοις 

Dat.  δώρα) 

δώροις 

Acc.  δούλον 

δούλους 

Acc.  δώρον 

δώρα 

Voc.  δούλε 

δούλοι 

Voc.  δώρον 

δώρα 

48.  Observe  that:  i.  The  circumflex  accent (')  oc¬ 
curs  on  a  long  syllable  only.  2.  When  the  circum¬ 
flex  accent  is  written  on  the  penult,  the  last  syllable 


36 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


is  short.  3.  When  the  last  syllable  becomes  long, 
the  circumflex  accent  is  changed  to  the  acute. 
Cf.  26,  1. 

49.  The  circumflex  accent  may  stand  on  the  ultima 
or  the  penult.  It  cannot  stand  on  the  antepenult. 
The  circumflex  accent  cannot  stand  on  the  penult 
when  the  ultima  is  long.  When  the  ultima  is  short 
and  the  penult  is  long,  the  penult  takes  the  circum¬ 
flex  accent,  if  it  is  to  be  accented. 

50.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έν  τοΐς  έργοις  τού  νόμου.  2.  ό  κύριος  τού  ούρα- 
νοΰ  έχει  τα  δώρα  τοΐς  δούλοις.  3·  <*πό  τού  νόμου  καί  από 
τών  αποστόλων.  τοΐς  όφθαλμοΐς  βλέπομεν  τον  οίνον  έν 
τφ  ποτηρίω.  5·  παιδίον  γινώσκει  τον  αδελφόν. 

II.  ι.  In  the  world  and  in  the  temple.  2.  From 
the  temple  and  from  heaven.  3.  The  apostles 
receive  bread  for  the  servants.  4.  We  know  the  law 
and  believe.  5.  The  son  wishes  to  speak  to  the 
children. 


LESSON  IX 

Present  Indicative  Middle 

51.  The  Greek  verb  has  three  voices:  active,  mid¬ 
dle,  and  passive.  The  active  and  passive  voices  are 
used  as  in  English;  the  active  voice  represents  the 
subject  as  acting;  the  passive  voice  represents  the 
subject  as  acted  upon. 

52.  The  middle  voice  represents  the  subject  as 
acting  with  reference  to  himself.  Thus:  1.  As 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE  MIDDLE 


37 


acting  directly  on  himself  (direct  middle):  λούω,  I 
wash;  λούομαι,  I  wash  myself.  2.  As  acting  for 
himself  or  for  his  own  interest  in  some  way:  αγοράζω, 
I  huy;  αγοράζομαι,  I  buy  for  myself. 

o>.  Precisely  how  the  subject  acts  with  reference 
to  himself,  the  middle  voice  per  se  does  not  tell. 
This  precise  relation  is  determined  by  the  meaning 
of  the  verb  itself  and  the  context,  b.  Often  it  is 
impossible  to  translate  the  shade  of  meaning  given 
by  the  middle.  Yet  in  some  verbs  there  is  a  bold 
change  in  meaning. 

63.  The  conjugation  of  the  present  indicative  mid¬ 
dle  of  λούω,  I  wash ,  is 


Singular  Plural 

1.  λού-ο-μαι,  I  wash  myself  λου-6-μεθα,  we  wash  our¬ 

selves 

2.  λού-η,  you  wash  your-  λού-ε-σθε,  ye  wash  your¬ 

self  selves 

3.  λού-ε-ται,  he  washes  him-  λού-ο-νται,  they  wash 

self  themselves 

Present  infinitive  middle  λού-ε-σθαι,  to  wash  oneself. 

Observe  that  the  appended  translation  is  the 
direct  middle.  If  άγοράζομαι  I  buy  for  myself ,  etc., 
were  given,  the  indirect  middle  would  be  seen. 

64.  The  primary  middle  personal  endings  are: 


Singular 

1.  -μαι,  I 

2.  -σαι,  thou  (you) 

3.  -ται,  he,  she,  it 


Plural 
-μέθα,  we 
-σθε,  ye 
-νται,  they 


38 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


The  thematic  vowel  (%)  and  personal  endings: 

1.  -ομαι  -ομεθα 

2.  -εσαι  -εσθε 

3·  -εται  -ονται 

Observe  in  the  conjugation  of  λούω  that: 

1.  The  second  person  sing,  λούη  is  for  λούεσαι, 
-η  arose  from  the  dropping  of  σ  and  the  contraction 
of  ε  and  αι  =  ηι  =  γ).  Rarely  is  ει  found  instead  of 

T)· 

2.  at  in  these  personal  endings  is  considered 
short,  hence  the  accent  on  the  antepenult.  The 
same  principle  of  accent  is  to  be  observed  as  in  II 
and  13. 

3.  The  thematic  vowel  (%)  is  found  as  in  the 
active  voice. 

4.  The  present  middle  infinitive  ending  is  -σθαι. 
The  αι  is  considered  short. 

55.  Vocabulary 


αγοράζω,  I  buy 

άγοράζομαι, 

I  buy  for  myself 

άττω. 

I  fasten  to 

άπτομαι, 

I  fasten  myself  to , 
touch 

λούω. 

I  wash 

λούομαι, 

I  wash  myself 

νίπτω, 

I  wash 

νίπτομαι, 

I  wash  myself 

παύω, 

I  stop 

παύομαι. 

I  stop  myself ,  cease 

φυλάσσω  I  guard ,  keep  φυλάσσομαι,  I  guard  myself ,  keep 

myself 

This  vocabulary  is  given  as  a  simple  illustration 
of  the  middle.  Any  verb  may  be  used  in  the  middle 
voice. 


PRESENT  INDICATIVE  PASSIVE 


39 


56.  Exercises 

I.  I.  αγοράζεται,  φυλάσση,  παύομαι.  2.  νίπτομαι  τό 
πρόσωπον.  3·  φυλάσσεται  άπό  τού  κόσμου.  4·  °  δούλος 
άγοράζεται  τό  πλοΐον.  5·  άπτόμεθα  καί  λουόμεθα.  6. 
παύεσθε  καί  λέγουσι. 

II.  ι.  He  ceases,  they  wash  themselves.  2.  You 
buy  bread  for  yourself.  3.  The  apostle  washes  his 
(the)  face.  4.  The  child  guards  himself  from  the 
man. 


LESSON  X 

Present  Indicative  Passive 

57.  Vocabulary 

βάλλω,  I  throw  κρίνω,  I  judge 

διδάσκω,  I  teach  στέλλω,  I  send 

έγείρω,  I  raise  up  σώζω,  I  save 

κηρύσσω,/  announce ,  proclaim 

είς,  prep.,  into ,  used  with  the  accusative  only, 

υπό,  prep.,  used  with  the  ablative  (see  86),  by; 

with  the  accusative,  under. 

58.  The  passive  voice  is  later  than  the  active  and 
middle  and  did  not  develop  distinctive  personal 
endings.  The  middle  and  passive  are  the  same  in 
form,  except  in  the  future  and  aorist.  For  the  mean¬ 
ing  of  passive  see  51. 

59.  The  following  is  the  present  indicative  passive 
of  λύω  I  loose. 


40 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Singular 

1.  λύ-ο-μαι,  I  am  (being) 

loosed 

2.  λυ-fl,  you  are  (be¬ 

ing)  loosed 

3.  λύ-ε-ται,  he  is  (being) 

loosed 


Plural 

λυ-ό-μεθα,  we  are  (being) 
loosed 

λύ-ε-σθε,  ye  are  (being) 
loosed 

λύ-ο-νται  they  are  (being) 
loosed 


Present  passive  infinitive  λύ-ε-σθαι,  to  be  loosed. 

60.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  present  passive 
voice  uses  the  present  middle  endings.  The  present 
middle  and  passive  voices  have  the  same  form. 


61.  Generally  the  context  will  make  clear  whether 
the  middle  or  passive  voice  is  meant. 


62.  Exercises 

I.  I.  βλέπονται,  πέμπεται,  ακούεις,  άκούη.  2.  σώζει, 
σωζόμεθα,  κρίνομαι,  άγεται.  3·  διδάσκω,  διδάσκονται,  βάλ¬ 
λει,  βάλλεται,  φ  έγειρεσθε  από  τών  νεκρών.1  5·  δ 
λόγος  διδάσκεται  έν  τώ  ίερφ.  6.  οι  δούλοι  στέλλονται  είς 
τον  οίκον.  7·  γράφεται  έν  τω  νόμω.  8.  πιστεύουσι  είς  τδν 
κύριον  καί  σώζονται.  9·  κρινόμεθα  υπό  τού  κυρίου. 

II.  ι.  He  sends  and  is  sent.  2.  He  believes  and 
is  saved.  3.  The  word  is  proclaimed  in  the  temple. 
4.  The  son  of  man  is  judged.  5.  The  stone  is 
thrown  into  the  house.  6.  The  bread  is  taken  from 
the  apostle.  7.  You  are  judged  by  the  son  of  man. 

1  νεκρός,  dead. 


IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE 


41 


LESSON  XI 


Imperfect  Indicative  Active 

63.  Vocabulary 


αίρω,  I  take  up ,  bear 
βαχτίζω,  I  baptize 
έσθίω,  I  eat 
κράζω,  I  cry  out 


μέλλω,  I  am  about  (or  go¬ 
ing)  to  do  some¬ 
thing 

μένω,  I  remain 


64.  The  imperfect  tense  is  made  on  the  present 
stem.  Thus  pres,  λέγ-ω;  imp.  έ-λεγ-ον. 


65.  The  imperfect  indicative  represents  an  action 
as  going  on  in  past  time  ( durative  or  linear  action 
in  past  time), — this  action  may  be  simultaneous, 
prolonged,  descriptive,  repeated,  customary,  inter¬ 
rupted,  attempted,  or  begun,  according  to  the  con¬ 
text  and  the  meaning  of  the  verb  itself. 

66.  The  personal  endings  of  the  secondary  1  active 
tenses  are : 

Singular  Plural 

1.  -v  -μεν 

2.  -ς  -τε 


3.  none 


-v  or  -σαν. 


67.  The  imperfect  indicative  active  of  λούω,  I  wash: 


Singular 

1.  ε-λου-ο-ν,  I  was  wash¬ 

ing 

2.  ε-λου-ε-ς,  you  were 

washing 

3.  έ-λο  υ-ε,  he  was  wash¬ 

ing 


Plural 

έ-λού-ο-μεν,  we  were  wash¬ 
ing 

έ-λού-ε-τε,  ye  were  wash¬ 
ing 

ε-λο  u-o-v,  they  were 
washing 


1  See  1 7,  footnote  1. 


42 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


a.  In  the  third  pers.  plu.  the  form  έ-λου-ο-σαν  is 
sometimes  found.  b.  In  the  plural  forms  like 
έλουαμεν,  έλούατε,  έλουαν  sporadically  appear. 

68.  Observe  that:  I.  The  thematic  vowel  is  °/€  as 
in  the  present  indicative.  2.  The  third  person  sing, 
has  no  personal  ending.  3.  Before  the  stem  λου- 
is  ε.  This  ε  is  called  the  augment. 

69.  The  augment  is  probably  an  old  adverb  for 
“then.”  The  augment  in  the  imperfect  places  linear 
action  in  past  time.  At  times  it  is  difficult  to  trans¬ 
late  this  Greek  tense  into  English,  because  of  the 
absence  of  a  true  imperfect  in  English. 

70.  The  indicative  of  the  secondary  (or  historical) 
tenses,  besides  having  different  personal  endings,  has 
also  an  augment.  This  augment  is  of  two  forms: 

1.  If  the  stem  begins  with  a  consonant,  the  vowel  ε 
is  commonly  prefixed — called  syllabic  augment. 

2.  But  if  the  stem  begins  with  a  vowel,  that  vowel 
is  lengthened — called  temporal  augment.  Thus: 

a  becomes  η  (a  becomes  η) 

ε  becomes  η  (at  becomes  η)  [except  in  2  Ti.  1:16, 
0  becomes  ω  (au  becomes  ηυ)  where  it  remains  at] 
t  becomes  i 
u  becomes  ϋ 

ει  may  become  η,  but  remains  et  in  New  Testament, 
ευ  may  become  ηυ,  but  usually  remains  ευ  in  New 
Testament. 

ot  generally  becomes  ω,  but  sometimes  remains  ot  in 
New  Testament. 

E.g.,  αγω,  lead ;  ήγον,  I  was  leading;  ακούω,  hear ; 


PREPOSITIONS 


43 


ι^κουον,  I  was  hearing ;  έγείρω,  raise  up;  ήγειρον,  I 
was  raising  up;  at  ρω,  take  up;  fj  pov,  I  was  taking  up. 

θέλω  has  η  in  the  imperfect,  ηθελον.  Sometimes 
μέλλω  has  η,  thus  η  μέλλον. 

71.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έμένετε,  έκραζε,  έβαλλες.  2.  ηυρίσκομεν, 
έχίστευον,  ηκουε.  3·  εμενον  έν  τφ  ο’ίκιρ.  τδ  τέκνον 
έβαλλε  λίθους.  5·  δ  κύριος  έσωζε  τους  άνθρώχους.  6.  οί 
ά^όστολοι  έκήρυσσον  τον  λόγον. 

II.  I.  You  were  saying.  2.  They  were  eating 
the  bread.  3.  The  teacher  was  sending  garments  for 
the  children.  4.  He  was  taking  up  the  child  from 
the  boat.  5.  The  men  were  leading  the  servants 
into  the  house. 

LESSON  XII 
Prepositions 

♦ 

72.  Vocabulary 

αχό,  prep.,  from,  off,  away  from,  used  with  the 
ablative  only. 

είς,  prep.,  into,  used  with  the  accusative  only, 
έκ  (έξ),  prep.,  out,  out  of,  from  within,  used  with  the 
ablative  only,  έξ  before  words  beginning  with 
a  vowel. 

έν,  prep.,  in,  used  with  the  locative  only.  The  re¬ 
sultant  meaning  of  έν  and  the  locative  is  some¬ 
times  instrumental. 

χαρά,  prep.,  beside,  used  with  the  locative,  ablative, 
and  accusative. 


44 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


συν,  prep.,  with ,  used  with  the  instrumental  only. 

άχοστέλλω,  send  forth 

εισάγω,  bring  in 

έκβάλλω,  throw  out ,  cast  out 

χαραλαμβάνω,  take ,  receive 

συνάγω,  gather  together 

Some  prepositions  do  not  have  an  accent.  Words 
which  do  not  have  an  accent  are  called  proclitics 
and  are  to  be  pronounced  with  the  following 
words. 

73.  Prepositions  are  adverbs  specialized  to  define 
more  clearly  the  meanings  of  cases,  many  of  which 
come  to  be  used  in  composition  with  verbs. 

Prepositions  were  originally  free  adverbs.  These 
adverbs  were  brought  gradually  into  closer  relation 

with  nouns,  and  many  of  them  into  a  closer  connec- 

» 

tion  with  verbs. 

74.  Prepositions  are  used  to  bring  out  more  clearly 
the  idea  of  case.  They  help  the  cases;  the  case  calls 
in  the  preposition  to  aid  in  expressing  more  sharply 
the  meaning  of  the  case.  “It  is  the  case  which 
indicates  the  meaning  of  the  preposition,  and  not  the 
preposition  which  gives  the  meaning  to  the  case.” 
Then,  strictly  speaking,  prepositions  (in  Greek)  do 
not  “govern”  cases.  Take  χαρά,  meaning  beside ,  for 
example:  with  locative,  χαρά  τώ  δούλφ,  by  or  at  the 
side  of  the  servant;  with  the  ablative,  χαρά  τοϋ  δούλου, 
from  the  side  of  the  servant;  with  the  accusative, 
χαρά  τδν  δοΰλον,  along  side  of  the  servant. 

a.  The  cases  used  with  prepositions  are  the  abla¬ 
tive,  genitive,  locative,  instrumental,  and  accusative. 


PREPOSITIONS 


45 


b.  The  dative  is  not  used  with  any  of  the  preposi¬ 
tions  in  the  New  Testament,  except  probably  έγγυς 
(Acts  1x138)  and  έχ£. 

75.  In  composition  with  verbs  the  preposition  has 
commonly  two  uses. 

1.  The  preposition  is  merely  local:  e.g.,  έκ-βάλλω, 
I  throw  out,  cast  out;  καταβαίνω,  I  am  going  down. 

2.  The  preposition  intensifies  or  completes  the 
idea  of  the  verb:  e.g.,  έσθίω,  I  eat;  κατεσθίω,  I  eat  up 
{down).  This  is  called  the  “ perfective ’ ’  force  of  the 
preposition. 

a.  Sometimes  prepositions  change  the  meaning 
of  the  verb  and  blend  with  it. 

76.  When  a  preposition  ends  in  a  vowel,  as  αχό,  χαρά, 
the  final  vowel  is  dropped  before  a  verb  that  begins 
with  a  vowel:  e.g.,  χαρέχω  is  for  xapa  +  εχω,  I  pro¬ 
vide,  supply.  When  compound  verbs  receive  the 
augment,  the  final  vowel  of  the  preposition  is 
dropped:  e.g.,  χαραλαμβάνω,  I  receive;  χαρελάμβανον, 
I  was  receiving;  άχοστέλλω,  I  send  forth,  άχέστελλον, 
I  was  sending  forth;  κατάγω,  κατήγον. 

a.  The  prepositions  χερί  and  χρό  do  not  drop 
their  final  vowel;  e.g.,  χροάγο^,  I  go  before;  χεριάγω, 
I  go  about. 

77.  Exercises 

I,  I.  οι  άχόστολοι  εμενον  έν  τφ  ο’ίκω.  2.  δ  κύριος 
άχέστελλε  τους  υιούς  είς  τον  κόσμον.  3·  δ  θεός  έγείρει  τούς 
νεκρούς  έκ  θανάτου.  χαρελαμβάνο μεν  τον  λόγον  τοΰ 

Θεοΰ  άχό  τοΟ  κυρίου.  5·  δ  άνθρωχος  χέμχεται  χαρά  τηύ 
θεού.  6.  οι  δούλοι  εμενον  σύν  τοϊς  άνθρώχοις. 


46 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


II.  i.  He  was  sending  the  child  out  of  the  boat. 

2.  The  child  was  throwing  stones  into  the  house. 

3.  The  servants  were  eating  up  the  bread.  4.  The 
Lord  was  sending  forth  the  apostles.  5.  The  teacher 
is  about  to  receive  the  bread  from  the  child. 


LESSON  XIII 


The  Imperfect  Indicative  Middle  and  Passive 


78. 


Vocabulary 


άναβλέπω,  I  look  up,  re-  δοξάζω,  I  glorify 


cover  sight 


πείθω,  I  persuade 


άπέχω,  I  keep  off ,  have  φέ  ρω,  /  hear ,  carry 


in  full  (of  re¬ 
ceipts)  ;  Midd. 
I  keep  myself 
from,  abstain, 
άτο θνήσκω,  I  die 


άνά,  prep.,  on,  upon , 
along;  used  with 
accusative  only 
in  New  Testa¬ 
ment. 


διώκω,  I  follow  after,  pursue,  persecute 


79.  The  personal  endings  in  the  secondary  1  tenses 
of  the  indicative  middle  and  passive  are: 


Singular 

1.  -μην,  I 

2.  -σο,  thou  {you) 

3.  -το,  he,  etc. 


Plural 

-μέθα,  we 
-σθε,  ye  {you) 
-ντο,  they 


1  The  terms  “primary”  and  “secondary”  apply  to  the  indicative 
mode  only. 


/ 


IMPF.  IND.  MIDD.  AND  PASS. 


47 


80.  The  conjugation  of  λύω  in  the  imperfect 
indicative  middle  is: 


Singular 


Plural 


1. 

2. 


3- 


έλυόμην, 

I  was  loosing  έλυόμεθα, 

we  were  loosing 

{for)  myself 

{for)  ourselves 

έλυου, 

you  were  loos-  έλ υεσθε. 

ye  were  loosing 

ing  {for) 

{for)  yourselves 

yourself 

έλύετο, 

he  was  loosing  έλυοντο, 

they  were  loos¬ 

{for)  himself 

ing  {for)  them- 

selves 


a.  In  the  second  pers.  sing.,  έλύου,  -ου  is  for  -εσο; 
intersonantic  σ  drops  out  and  εο  contract  to  ου. 


81.  Observe:  I.  The  thematic  vowel  °/ε.  2.  The 

augment.  3.  The  accent  in  first  pers.  sing. 


82.  As  in  the  present  tense,  so  also  in  the  imperfect, 
the  middle  and  passive  voices  are  alike  in  form. 

83.  The  conjugation  of  λυω  in  the  imperfect  indica¬ 
tive  passive  is: 


Singular 

1.  έλυόμην,  I  was  being 

loosed 

2.  έλυου,  you  were  be¬ 

ing  loosed 

3.  έλυετο,  he  was  being 

loosed 


Plural 

έλυόμεθα,  we  were  being 
loosed 

έλυεσθε,  you  were  being 
loosed 

έλυοντο,  they  were  being 
loosed 


84.  Review  the  present  indicative  active  (13),  mid¬ 
dle  (53),  and  passive  (59),  and  the  imperfect  indica¬ 
tive  active  (67). 


48 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


85.  The  personal  endings  of  the  verb  have  to  express 

1.  The  person  of  the  verb. 

2.  The  number  of  the  verb. 

3.  The  voice  of  the  verb. 

In  fact  they  express  everything  that  has  to  do  with 
the  subject. 

4.  In  the  indicative  they  tell  whether  primary  or 
secondary. 

The  personal  endings  of  the  verb  must  be  mastered. 
The  importance  of  the  forms  of  the  verb  cannot  be 
overstressed.  If  the  verb-forms  thus  far  given  are 
thoroughly  learned,  the  student  has  overcome  the 
greater  part  of  the  difficulty  in  the  regular  verb. 

86.  6x0  (prep.)  is  used  with  the  ablative  case  to 
denote  the  agent ,  by,  especially  with  the  passive 
voice;  e.g.,  έβαχτίζοντο  υχδ  Ίωάνου,  they  were  being 
baptized  by  John. 

87.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έχαυόμην,  έλούετο,  φυλάσσεται.  2.  οι  άχόστολοι 

άχείχοντο1  άχδ  τού  κόσμου.  3·  τΦ  έδοξάζετο  δ 

κύριος.  \.  τδ  τέκνον  ήγετο  υχδ  τού  άνθρώχου.  5·  έσώζου 
κα I  άνέβλεχες. 

f 

II.  1..  The  word  was  being  preached  by  the 
apostles.  2.  The  children  were  washing  themselves. 
3.  I  was  being  judged  by  men.  4.  The  angel  of  the 
Lord  was  being  heard.  5.  The  law  was  being  taught 
in  the  temple.  6.  The  servants  were  looking  up  into 
the  heavens. 

1  The  augment  in  the  imperfect  of  εχω  is  είχον,  for  έεχον  is  έσεχον. 


THE  FIRST  DECLENSION  49 

LESSON  XIV 

The  First  Declension  or  Declension  of  a-  Stems 


Vocabulary 


88. 

αρχή,  beginning 
γραφή,  writing,  scripture 
έντολή,  commandment 
ζωή,  life 
φωνή,  voice 
ψυχή,  soul 


άγάχη,  love 

διαθήκη,  covenant ,  testa¬ 

ment 

δικαιοσύνη,  righteousness 
ειρήνη,  peace 

κώμη,  village 


89.  All  substantives  of  the  first  declension  whose 
nominatives  end  in  a  or  η  are  feminine  in  gender. 

90.  The  feminine  article  (ή)  and  nominatives  in  -η 
are  declined  as  follows: 

φωνή,  voice  κώμη,  village 


Stem  < 

ρωνα- 

Stem 

κωμα- 

Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

ή  φωνή 

αι  φωναί 

κώμη 

κώμαι 

Gen. 

τής  φωνής 

των  φωνών 

κώμης 

κωμών 

Abl. 

τής  φωνής 

των  φωνών 

κώμης 

κωμών 

Loc. 

τή  φωνή 

ταΐς  φωναΐς 

κώμη 

κώμαις 

Ins. 

τή  φωνή 

ταϊς  φωναΐς 

κώμη 

κώμαις 

Dat. 

τή  φωνή 

ταΐς  φωναΐς 

κώμη 

κώμαις 

Acc. 

την  φωνήν 

τάς  φωνάς 

κώμην 

κώμας 

Voc. 

φωνή 

φωναί 

κώμη 

κώμαι 

91.  Observe:  i.  The  stem  ends  in  a,  and  is  therefore 
called  the  a-declension.  2.  Iota-subscript  is  always 
written  in  the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  singular  (see  25  a). 


50 


BEGINNER'S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


3.  When  the  nominative  sing,  ends  in  -η  the  η  is 
retained  throughout  the  singular.  4.  In  the  nomina¬ 
tive  plural  -at  is  considered  short  in  determining  place 
and  kind  of  accent. 

92.  The  ending  -αις  in  the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  plural 
is  a  new  formation  on  the  analogy  of  -οις  in  o-stems. 
See  25  c. 

93.  Nouns  that  have  an  acute  accent  on  the  last 
syllable  (ultima)  are  called  oxytones  (sharp  tones) ; 
e.g.,  φωνή,  ζωή.  Learn  that  all  oxytones  of  the  first 
and  second  declension  have  the  circumflex  accent 
over  the  ultima  in  all  the  genitives,  ablatives,  loca¬ 
tives,  instrumentals,  and  datives,  See  40. 

94.  The  gen.  and  abl.  plu.  of  substantives  of  the  first 
or  a-  declension  always  have  the  circumflex  accent 
on  the  ultima,  no  matter  where  the  accent  is  in  the 
nominative  singular,  since  -ών  is  contracted  from 
-έων  derived  from  -άων.  Thus  κώμη,  but  κωμών. 

95.  Compare  the  feminine  article  (ή)  with  the 
endings  of  φωνή.  Notice  that,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
forms  δ  and  01  of  the  masculine  article,  the  forms 
ή  and  al  do  not  have  an  accent.  These  forms  of  the 
article  are  called  proclitic :  they  are  to  be  pronounced 
as  a  part  of  the  following  word. 

96.  Exercises 

I.  I.  al  ψυχαί  των  ανθρώπων  σώζονται.  2.  έν  αρχή  6 
λόγος  ήκούετο.  3·  ή  Εντολή  τής  ζωής  Ιλέγετο  υπό  του 
κυρίου.  4·  αι  7ΡαΦ°^  έδιδάσκοντο  iv  τω  ιερώ.  5·  ^ξεβάλ- 
λοντο  έκ  των  κωμών.  6.  ή  διαθήκη  έγράφετο  τοΐς  άνθρώποις. 


THE  FIRST  DECLENSION 


51 


II.  i.  From  the  beginning,  in  the  village.  2.  He 
is  teaching  the  scriptures.  3.  We  have  peace  in 
the  soul.  4.  The  sons  were  receiving  the  testament. 
5.  The  apostles  heard  the  commandment  from  the 
Lord.  6.  The  soul  is  being  saved  and  finds  peace 
and  righteousness. 


LESSON  XV 

First  Declension  (Continued) 

97.  Vocabulary 

αμαρτία,  ή,  sin  καρδία,  ή,  heart 

βασιλεία,  ή,  kingdom  σοφία,  ή,  wisdom 

έκκλησία,  ή,  assembly ,  ( church )  αλήθεια,  ή,  truth 

έξουσία,  ή,  authority ,  power  ασθένεια,  ή,  weakness 

ήμερα,  ή,  day  μάχαιρα,  ή,  sword 

98.  ι.  As  we  have  seen,  a  substantive  in  Greek  has 
case ,  number ,  and  gender. 

2.  There  are  three  genders:  masculine ,  feminine 
and  neuter. 

99.  Nearly  all  substantives  of  the  second  declen¬ 
sion  with  nominatives  in  -ος  are  masculine;1  and  all 
substantives  of  the  second  declension  with  nomina¬ 
tives  in  -ov  are  neuter. 

100.  All  substantives  of  the  first  declension  with 
nominatives  in  -η  or  -a  are  feminine.  Those  with 

1  δδός,  way,  road ,  and  έρημος,  wilderness,  desert,  are  feminine  in 
gender. 


/ 


52 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


nominatives  in  -ης  or  -ας  are  masculine.  See  Lesson 
XVI. 

But  the  gender  of  substantives  must  often  be 
learned  by  observation.  Hereafter  in  this  book  the 
gender  will  be  indicated  in  the  vocabulary  by  the 
article  placed  after  the  substantive.  (This  method 
is  used  by  most  lexicons.)  The  masculine  article,  o, 
indicates  masculine  gender;  the  feminine  article,  ή, 
feminine  gender;  the  neuter  article,  τό,  neuter  gender. 

101.  Substantives  of  the  first  declension  with  nom¬ 
inatives  in  -a  (preceded  by  ε,  t,  or  p)  are  declined  as 
follows : 


καρδία. 

,  heart 

αλήθεια,  truth 

Stem 

καρδια- 

Stem 

άληθεια- 

Singular 

Plural 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom.  καρδία 

καρδίαι 

αλήθεια 

άλήθειαι 

Gen.  καρδίας 

καρδιών 

αλήθειας 

αληθειών 

Abl.  καρδίας 

καρδιών 

αλήθειας 

αληθειών 

Loc.  καρδία 

καρδίαις 

αληθείς 

άληθείαις 

Ins.  καρδία 

καρδίαις 

άληθεία 

άληθείαις 

Dat.  καρδίςι 

καρδίαις 

άληθείοι 

άληθείαις 

Ace.  καρδίαν 

καρδίας 

αλήθειαν 

άληθείας 

Voc.  καρδία 

καρδίαι 

αλήθεια 

άλήθειαι 

102.  Observe:  I.  When  ε,  i,  or  p  precedes  -a  in  the 
nominative  singular,  the  a  is  retained  throughout  the 
singular.1  2.  The  -a  after  ε,  t,·  or  p  may  be  long  as  in 
καρδία  or  short  as  in  αλήθεια.  3  When  the  -a  is  short 
(in  the  first  declension)  in  the  nominative  singular, 


1  Sometimes  -ης  is  found  in  the  gen.  and  abl.  sing,  after  ε,  t,  or  p. 


THE  FIRST  DECLENSION 


53 


it  is  also  short  in  the  accusative  singular.  But  in  the 
accusative  plural  the  -a  is  long  in  the  first  declension. 
4.  In  the  gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  singular  of 
αλήθεια  the  accent  is  brought  forward  to  the  penult 
because  the  ultima  is  long.  Cf.  33,  2,  and  26,  1. 

103.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ή  βασιλεία  τού  θεού.  2.  ή  έκκλησία  εχει  έξουσίαν. 

3·  ή  δικαιοσύνη  και  ή  αλήθεια  έν  τώ  κόσμφ  εμενον.  4·  ° 

διδάσκαλος  εχει  την  μάχαιραν  τής  αλήθειας.  5·  εβλεπον 
τήν  ημέραν  τού  κυρίου  καί  έδόξαζον  τον  θεόν. 

II.  ι.  In  the  hearts  of  men.  2.  Wisdom  was 
being  taught  in  the  church.  3.  It  is  being  written 
in  truth.  4.  The  sword  of  truth  pursues  sin.  5.  The 
Lord  has  power  to  save  men. 


LESSON 

XVI 

First  Declension  (Continued) 

104. 

Vocabulary 

γλώσσα,  ή, 

tongue 

κεφαλή,  ή,  head 

δόξα,  ή, 

glory 

οίκία,  ή,  house 

θάλασσα,  ή, 

sea 

παραβολή,  ή,  parable 

μαθητής,  δ, 

disciple 

συναγωγή,  ή,  synagogue 

προφήτης,  δ, 

prophet 

χαρά,  ή,  joy 

έπαγγελία,  ή, 

promise 

ώρα,  ή,  hour 

54 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


105.  Substantives  of  the  first  declension  with  nom¬ 
inatives  in  -a,  not  after  ε,  i,  or  p,  are  declined  as 
follows : 


STEM  γλωσσα- 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

γλώσσα 

γλώσσαι 

Gen. 

γλώσσης 

γλωσσών 

Abl. 

γλώσσης 

γλωσσών 

Loc. 

γλώσση 

γλώσσαις 

Ins. 

γλώσση 

γλώσσαις 

Dat. 

γλώσση 

γλώσσαις 

Ace. 

γλώσσαν 

γλώσσας 

Voc. 

γλώσσα 

γλώσσαι 

106.  Observe:  I.  When  ε,  t,  or  p  does  not  precede 
a  of  the  nom.  sing.,  the  a  is  changed  to  η  in  the 
gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing.  2.  When  the  a 
is  short  in  the  nom.  sing,  it  is  also  short  in  the  ace. 
sing. 

107.  Contract  substantives  of  the  first  declension 
as  γή,  ή,  earth ,  and  μνά,  ή,  mina  (a  weight  and  sum 
of  money)  are  declined  like  φωνή  and  καρδία  respec¬ 
tively,  except  that  they  have  the  circumflex  accent 
on  the  ultima  throughout. 

108.  Substantives  of  the  first  declension  with  nom. 
sing,  in  -ης  or  -ας  are  masculine  in  gender.  See  ioo. 

109.  The  declension  of  προφήτης,  δ,  prophet ,  is 


\ 


THE  FIRST  DECLENSION  55 


STEM  χροφητα- 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

χροφήτης 

χροφήται 

Gen. 

χροφήτου 

χροφητών 

Abl. 

χροφήτου 

χροφητών 

Loc. 

χροφήτη 

χροφήταις 

Ins. 

χροφήτη 

χροφήταις 

Dat. 

χροφήτη 

χροφήταις 

Ace. 

χροφήτην 

χροφήτας 

Voc. 

χροφήτα 

χροφήται 

110.  Observe:  1.  The  gen. 

and  abl.  sing,  -ου 

same  as  in  the  o-  declension.  2.  The  voc.  sing,  is  -a. 
Masculine  substantives  of  the  first  declension  in  -της 
have  -a  in  the  vocative  sing.  3.  The  plurals  of  all 
substantives  of  the  a-  declension  are  alike. 

111.  The  singular  of  νεανίας,  δ,  youth,  is 

Nom.  νεανίας,  Gen.  νεανίου,  Abl.  νεανίου, 

Loc.  νεανία,  Ins.  νεανία,  Dat.  νεανίςι, 

Ace.  νεανίαν,  Voc.  νεανία. 


112.  Exercises 

I.  I.  εχετε  χαράν  καί  είρήνην  έν  ταΐς  καρδίαις.  2.  οί 
μαθηταί  ε'λεγον  χαραβολάς  έν  τη  συναγωγή.  3·  εν  τή  γή 
καί  έν  τή  θαλάσση  έδοξάζετο  δ  κύριος.  άχδ  τής  αρχής 
ήκούομεν  τούς  χροφήτας.  5·  λαμβάνετε  τάς  έχαγγελίας 
άχδ  τοΰ  κυρίου»  6.  ήγον  τον  νεανίαν  έκ  τής  οικίας. 

II.  ι.  They  were  remaining  in  the  house. 

2.  Righteousness  and  love  remain  in  the  world. 

3.  The  hour  of  the  Lord  is  announced.  4.  The 
prophets  are  teaching  the  disciples  in  parables. 
5.  The  promises  were  spoken  from  the  beginnings 


56 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XVII 

Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declension 

113.  Vocabulary 

αγαθός,  good  καλός,  good ,  beautiful 

αγαπητός,  beloved  πιστός,  faithful 

έσχατος,  last  πρώτος,  first 

κακός,,  evil ,  bad 

114.  Most  adjectives  of  the  vowel  (first  and  second) 
declension  have  three  endings,  -ος  (masc.),  -η  or  -a 
(fem.),  -ov  (neut.).  Adjectives  are  declined  in  gender , 
number  and  case. 

115.  The  adjective  αγαθός  is  declined  as  follows: 

Singidar  Plural 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut.  Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

Nom.  αγαθός  αγαθή  αγαθόν  αγαθοί  άγαθαί  αγαθά 

Gen.  αγαθού  αγαθής  αγαθού  αγαθών  αγαθών  αγαθών, 

Abl.  αγαθού  αγαθής  αγαθού  αγαθών  αγαθών  αγαθών 

Loc.  άγαθώ  αγαθή  άγαθώ  άγαθοΐς  άγαθαΐς  άγαθοΐς 

Ins.  άγαθώ  άγαθή  άγαθζο  άγαθοΐς  άγαθαΐς  άγαθοΐς 

Dat.  άγαθώ  άγαθή  άγαθώ  άγαθοΐς  άγαθαΐς  άγαθοΐς 

Acc.  άγαθόν  άγαθήν  άγαθόν  άγαθούς  άγαθάς  άγαθά 

Voc.  άγαθέ  άγαθή  άγαθόν  άγαθοί  άγαθαί  άγαθά. 

116.  Observe:  ι.  In  form  the  masc.  is  declined 
exactly  like  a  masculine  substantive  of  the  second 
declension  (see  ουρανός,  39);  the  neuter  like  a  neuter 
substantive  of  the  second  declension  (see  εργον,  42); 
and  the  feminine  like  a  feminine  substantive  in  -η 
(see  φωνή,  9θ). 


ADJECTIVE  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSIONS  57 


a.  The  accent  of  the  feminine  genitive  and  abla¬ 
tive  plural  does  not  follow  the  accent  of  the  feminine 
substantive  of  the  a-  declension  (given  in  94),  but 
the  regular  accent  of  the  masculine:  thus  the  geni¬ 
tive  and  ablative  plural  feminine  form  of  έσχατος 
is  εσχάτων. 

117.  Adjectives  agree  with  the  substantives  which 
they  modify,  in  gender,  number,  and  case;  e.g., 
τού  χιστού  δούλου;  τη  τυ ρώτγ)  ήμερα;  καλή  δδώ.  Cf.  36· 

ν  118.  Adjectives  are  used  to  refer  to  substantives 
in  two  ways,  either  (1)  as  an  attribute  or  (2)  as  a 
predicate. 

1.  In  the  phrase  δ  χιστδς  δούλος,  the  faithful  servant , 
τιστός,  faithful,  is  an  attribute  adjective;  it  qualifies 
the  substantive,  δούλος,  servant ,  to  describe,  without 
any  assertion  about  it. 

2.  In  the  phrase  δ  δούλος  χιστός,  the  servant  (is) 
faithful ,  the  predicate  adjective  χιστός,  faithful, 
makes  an  assertion  about  the  substantive  δούλος, 
servant. 

It  is  important  to  understand  this  distinction 
between  the  attribute  and  the  predicate  adjective 
in  Greek.  The  distinction  lies  in  just  this,  that  the 
predicate  presents  an  additional  statement,  while 
the  attribute  is  an  adherent  description. 


119.  Examples  of  the  positions  of  the  adjective: 

1.  Attributive  position  of  the  adjective  — 

δ’χοστδς  δούλος  Ί 

.  ,  r  =  the  taithtul  servant. 

ο  δούλος  ο  χιστος] 

Note  that  the  adjective  comes  immediately  after 
the  article. 


58 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


There  is  another  order  of  the  attributive  position, 
δούλος  δ  πιστός.  It  is  not  frequent  in  the  New 
Testament. 

2.  Predicate  position  of  the  adjective — 


ό  δούλος  πιστός 
πιστός  ό  δούλος 


=  the  servant  (is)  faithful 


Note  that  the  adjective  does  not  come  immediately 
after  the  article  but  either  precedes  the  article  or 
follows  the  substantive. 

120.  When  the  article  is  not  present,  the  context 
must  decide  whether  an  adjective  is  attributive  or 
predicate;  e.g.,  the  phrase  πιστός  δούλος  (or  δούλος 
πιστός)  may  be  either  attributive,  a  faithful  servant , 
or  predicate,  a  servant  (is)  faithful. 


121.  In  the  New  Testament  όλος,  whole ,  never  has 
the  attributive  position. 


122.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ή  πρώτη  ώρα.  2.  οι  μαθηταί  οι  αγαπητό?  έδίδασκον 
τόν  καλόν  λόγον.  3·  τέκνον  τό  αγαπητόν  ευρίσκει  την  κακήν 
όδόν.  4·  τα^  εσχάταις  ήμέραις  προφήται  ήκοόοντο. 
5·  ό  αγαθός  λόγος  έκηρύσσετο  έν  όλω  τώ  κόσμω. 

II.  ι.  The  evil  prophet  was  not 1  proclaiming  the 
good  promises.  2.  On  the  last  day  the  disciple  was 
speaking  in  the  synagogue.  3.  The  whole  house 
was  receiving  the  word  of  God.  4.  In  the  first  hour 
of  the  day  they  were  glorifying  the  Lord. 

1  See  130. 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSIONS  59 


LESSON  XVIII 


Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declension  (Continued) 


Vocabulary 


123. 


αιώνιος,  eternal 
δίκαιος,  righteous 
έτερος,  another 


μόνος,  only ,  alone 
μικρός,  small ,  little 
πονηρός,  evil 


’ίδιος,  one  s  own 

124.  Learn  the  declension  of  ’ίδιος,  one's  own ,  and 
μικρός,  small ,  in  §  B  13. 

Observe:  1.  When  e,  t,  or  p  precedes  the  final 
vowel  of  the  stem,  the  feminine  has  -a  in  the  nomi¬ 
native  sing. 

2.  In  the  nom.  and  gen.  plur.  fern,  the  accent 
follows  the  masc. 

125.  Some  adjectives  (especially  compounds)  have 
only  two  endings,  the  masc.  and  fern,  having  the 
same  form:  e.g.,  άδικος,  -ον,  unjust ,  unrighteous . 

126.  Prepositional  phrases  or  adverbs  are  often 
used  like  adjectives  in  the  attributive  position: 
e.g.,  οι  έν  τω  ο’ίκω  άνθρωποι,  the  men  in  the  house.  The 
substantive  may  be  absent:  e.g.,  τά  Iv  τοΐς  ούρανοΤς, 
the  things  in  the  heavens. 

127.  The  adjective  in  any  gender  without  a  sub¬ 
stantive  is  often  used  as  a  practical  substantive, 
usually  with  the  article,  but  not  always:  e.g.,  οί  καλοί, 
the  good  (men  or  people) ;  τό  αγαθόν,  the  good  thing; 
τη  τρίτη,  on  the  third  (day), — the  feminines  are 
usually  examples  of  ellipsis  of  ήμερα,  οδός,  etc. 


60 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


128.  As  a  complement,  the  infinitive  (mostly  in  the 
active  voice)  is  used  with  adjectives,  substantives, 
and  verbs  that  imply  power  or  ability,  fitness, 
capacity,  etc.  (and  their  opposites):  e.g.,  δυνατός 
κωλύειν,  able  to  hinder;  έξουσία  έκβάλλειν,  power  to  cast 
out;  δύναμαι  άκούειν,  I  am  able  to  hear. 

129.  Exercises 

I.  I.  οί  καλοί  μόνοι  σώζονται.  2.  οι  έν  τφ  ο’ίκφ  ησθιον 

τόν  άρτον.  3·  τ7}  πρώτη  εκρινε  τούς  κακούς,  φ  ®  υιός 

του  ανθρώπου  εχει  εξουσίαν  σώζειν.  5·  °'1  δούλοι  ελεγον  κακά. 

II.  I.  On  the  first  day  he  was  preaching  in  the 
synagogue.  2.  The  first,  last ;  the  last,  first.  3.  The 
faithful  are  saved.  4.  He  has  power  to  cast  out  the 
evil.  5.  The  men  in  the  boat  know  the  sea. 

LESSON  XIX 

Personal  Pronouns  and  είμί,  I  am 

130.  Vocabulary 

άλλα,  adversative  conj.,  but  έγώ,  I 

γάρ,  co-ordinating  conj.,  for  είμί,  I  am 

γέ,  enclitic  postpositive  particle  σύ,  thou  (you) 
giving  special  prominence  to 
a  word,  indeed,  at  least 

δέ,  copulative  and  adversative  (milder  than  άλλά) 
conj.,  in  the  next  place ,  and;  but ,  on  the  other 
hand. 

ou 
ούκ 
ούχ  , 


not 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 


61 


a.  Words  that  cannot  come  first  in  a  sentence  are 
called  postpositives,  γάρ,  γέ,  and  δέ  are  postposi¬ 
tives.  b.  o  u  is  written  before  consonants ;  oux,  before 
vowels;  ούχ  before  the  rough  breathing. 

131.  Generally  speaking,  the  pronoun  is  a  word 
that  stands  in  place  of  a  substantive.  The  idea  that 
is  set  forth  by  a  pronoun  is  the  relation  of  a  subject 
or  object  to  the  speaker.  The  reason  for  the  use  of 
the  pronoun,  then,  is  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the 
substantive. 


132.  The  declension  of  the  first  personal  pronoun 

έγώ,  J,  is 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom.  έγώ,  I 

ημείς,  we 

Gen.  έμοΰ,  μου,  of  me 

ημών,  of  US 

Abl.  έμοΰ,  μου  etc. 

ήμών,  etc. 

Loc.  έμοί,  μοι 

ήμΐν 

Ins.  έμοί,  μοι 

ήμΐν 

Dat.  έμοί,  μοι 

ήμΐν 

Acc.  έμέ,  με 

ημάς 

133.  The  declension  of  the  second  personal  pronoun, 

σύ,  thou ,  is 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom.  συ,  thou 

υμείς,  ye  (you) 

Gen.  σου,  σου,  of  thee 

υμών,  of  you 

Abl.  σου,  σου  etc. 

υμών  etc. 

Loc.  σοί,  σοι, 

υμίν 

Ins.  σοί,  σοί 

υμΤν 

Dat.  σοί,  σοι 

υμϊν 

Acc.  σέ,  σε. 

υμάς 

62 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


134.  Observe:  In  the  singular  of  the  first  and  second 
personal  pronouns  there  are,  except  in  the  nomina¬ 
tive,  two  forms  for  each  case,  an  accented  form  and 
an  unaccented  form  (which  in  the  first  person  is  also 
shorter  than  the  accented  form).  These  forms  are 
called  enclitics  (see  138). 

135.  1.  Commonly  the  accented  or  emphatic  forms 
are  used  when  emphasis  or  contrast  is  desired.  Yet 
it  is  not  certain  that  all  emphasis  is  absent  when  the 
unaccented  or  enclitic  forms  are  used. 

2.  With  prepositions  the  emphatic  or  accented 
forms  are  used  generally,  except  with  χρός,  which 
ordinarily  has  χρός  με. 

3.  In  general  the  personal  pronouns  were  not  used 
in  the  nominative  case  unless  emphasis  or  contrast 
was  desired:  e.g.,  τον  άγγελον  εβλεχον  έγώ,  I  was 
looking  at  the  angel  (It  was  I  who  was  looking  at  the 
angel).  This  follows  from  the  fact  that  the  verb 
uses  the  personal  pronouns  as  personal  endings  (as 
explained  in  17),  and  no  need  was  felt  for  the  separate 
expression  of  the  personal  pronoun  in  the  nominative. 

136.  The  conjugation  of  the  present  indicative  of 
είμί,  I  am ,  is  as  follows: 


Plural 


Singular 


1.  ε(μ(,  I  am 

2.  εΐ,  thou  art 

3.  έστί,  he,  she,  or  it  is 


έσμέν,  we  are 
έστέ,  ye  (you)  are 
εΐσί,  they  are 


Present  infinitive  είναι,  to  he 

a.  είμί  is  for  έσ-μι;  εΐ  is  for  έσσι;  είσι  is  for  (σ)εντι 
for  (h)  εντι;  είναι  is  probably  for  έσ-ναι.  h.  All 


VERB  TO  BE.  ENCLITICS 


63 


the  forms  of  the  present  indicative  of  ε(μ(,  except  εΐ, 
are  enclitic  (see  138).  c.  It  was  noted  in  18  that 
the  primary  act.  end.  -μι  was  dropped,  and  the  pre¬ 
ceding  0  lengthened  to  ω.  Some  verbs  retain  this 
-μι  and  do  not  have  the  thematic  %.  The  former 
make  up  what  is  called  the  ω-  conjugation,  the  latter 
the  μι-  conjugation.  To  the  latter  belongs  ε£μ£. 

137.  When  the  verb  είμί  is  used  merely  as  a  con¬ 
nective  or  copula,  it  has  the  predicate  nominative: 
e.g.,  6  μαθητής  έστιν  άνθρωπος,  the  disciple  is  a  man ; 
see  examples  below  under  138,  1-5.  Note  that  the 
subject  may  be  known  from  the  predicate  whenever 
the  subject  has  the  article  and  the  predicate  does 
not:  e.g.,  αγάπη  έστιν  δ  θεός,  God  is  love.  Here  άγάπη 
is  the  predicate  because  it  does  not  have  the  article, 
while  θεός  does  have  the  article. 

138.  Enclitics  are  words  attaching  themselves  so 
closely  to  the  preceding  word  as  to  be  pronounced 
with  it.  Usually  they  have  no  accents  of  their 
own. 

The  word  before  an  enclitic  is  treated  as  follows : 

1.  If  the  preceding  word  has  an  acute  accent  on 
the  antepenult,  it  receives  an  additional  accent 
(acute)  on  its  ultima  from  any  enclitic,  whether  of 
one  syllable  (monosyllabic)  or  of  two  syllables  (dis¬ 
syllabic)  : 

6  διδάσκαλός  μου,  my  teacher 

δ  διδάσκαλός  έστιν  άγαθός,  the  teacher  is  good 

2.  If  the  preceding  word  has  an  acute  accent  on 
the  penult,  its  accent  is  not  affected  in  any  way: 


61 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


then  a  monosyllabic  enclitic  loses  its  accent;  but 
a  dissyllabic  enclitic  retains  its  accent: 

b  λόγος  μου,  my  word ;  ή  καρδία  -σου,  thy  heart 
ό  λόγος  έστίν  αΙώνιος,  the  word  is  eternal 

3.  If  the  preceding  word  naturally  has  an  acute 
accent  on  the  ultima,  it  keeps  its  own  accent,  and 
any  enclitic  loses  its  accent. 

I 

ό  αδελφός  σου,  thy  brother 

ο!  αδελφοί  είσι  πιστοί,  the  brothers  are  faithful 

4.  If  the  preceding  word  has  a  circumflex  accent 
on  the  penult,  it  receives  an  additional  accent  (acute) 
on  its  ultima  from  any  enclitic : 

ό  δούλος  μου,  my  servant 

ό  δούλος  έστι  δίκαιος,  the  servant  is  just 

5.  If  the  preceding  word  has  a  circumflex  accent 
on  the  ultima,  its  accent  is  not  affected  in  any  way, 
and  any  enclitic  loses  its  accent: 

ό  υιός  τού  αδελφού  μου,  the  son  of  my  brother 
οι  δούλοι  τού  θεού  έσμεν,  we  are  the  servants  of  God 

139.  Observe:  1.  A  monosyllabic  enclitic  regularly 
loses  its  accent.  2.  A  dissyllabic  enclitic  retains  its 
accent  only  under  the  condition  named  in  2  above. 

140.  An  enclitic  sometimes  retains  its  accent: 

1 .  When  there  is  emphasis  on  the  enclitic  or  when 
the  enclitic  begins  a  sentence. 

2.  έστί  is  written  εστι  at  the  beginning  of  a  sen¬ 
tence,  when  it  means  exist  or  is  possible ,  and  when  it 
immediately  follows  άλλ’  (αλλά),  εί,  καί,  μή,  ούκ,  8τι, 
τούτ’  (τούτο),  ώς. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 


65 


141.  A  proclitic  (see  note  to  72  and  95)  or  an 
enclitic  followed  by  an  enclitic  receives  an  acute 
accent:  e.g.  δ  γε  δούλάς  μου  έστι.  ΟΝ  υ  κτ  β  rA  η  . 

(But  under  138-140  modern  critics  and  editors 
differ.) 

142.  Exercises 

I.  I.  υμείς  έστε  τα  τέκνα  τού  θεού.  2.  ήμείς  γάρ 

γινώσκομεν  τον  κύριον.  3·  ή  δέ  αλήθεια  ούκ  εστιν1  έν 
ήμΐν.  4·  ή  καί  ή  αλήθεια  καί  ή  ζωή. 

5·  τούτο2  έστι  τό  εργον  τού  θεού.  6.  άλλα  ού  λόγοις  υμείς 
σώζεσθε. 

II.  ι.  My  house  is  in  the  village.  2.  We  are  the 
servants  of  the  Lord.  3.  The  way  is  bad,  but  you 
know  me.  4.  You  are  a  prophet,  for  from  you  are 
sent  forth  words  of  wisdom.  5.  We  have  bread  for 
you  (sing.).  6.  You  are  my  disciples. 


LESSON  XX 

Third  Personal  Pronoun.  Imperfect  Ind.  of  ε(μ( 

143.  Vocabulary 

άλλος, -η, -0,  other  εί,  conj.,  if 

αυτός, -ή, -0,  self,  very ,  same;  όλος,-η,-ον,  whole 

he ,  she ,  it  ότι,  conj.,  because ,  that 

σκοτία,  ή,  darkness 

1  Certain  words,  i.e.  words  ending  in  -σι,  the  third  personal  sing, 
of  past  tenses  (in-ε),  and  έστί,  may  add  v.  This  is  called  movable 
v.  Movable  v  in  the  older  Greek  was  written  when  it  would  be 
followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel ;  but  later  it  was  written 
before  consonants  and  vowels.  2  τούτο,  this  (neuter). 


66 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


144.  The  declension  of  αυτός  is  as  follows: 

Singular 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

αυτός 

αυτή 

αυτό 

Gen. 

αυτού 

αυτής 

αυτού 

Abl. 

αυτού 

αυτής 

αυτού 

Loc. 

αύτώ 

αυτή 

αυτω 

Ins. 

αύτώ 

αυτή 

αύτώ 

Dat. 

αΰτώ 

ι 

αυτή 

αυτω 

Ace. 

αυτόν 

αυτήν 

αυτό 

Plural 

Nom. 

αυτοί 

αύταί 

αυτά 

Gen. 

αυτών 

αυτών 

αυτών 

Abl. 

αυτών 

αυτών 

αυτών 

Loc. 

αύτοίς 

αύταίς 

αύτοίς 

Ins. 

αύτοίς 

αύταίς 

αυτοίς 

Dat. 

αύτοίς 

αύταΐς 

αύτοίς 

Acc. 

αυτούς 

αύτάς 

αύτά 

erve  that  αυτός 

is  declined  like  αγαθός 

(U5) 

;  that 

αυτός  has 

no  vocative 

and  the  neuter 

nom.  and  ace.  sing,  have  no  -v. 


145.  Meaning  and  uses  of  αυτός.  It  is  properly  a 
demonstrative. 

I.  As  an  intensive  pronoun  αυτός  means  self; 
himself ,  herself ,  itself ,  etc. ;  and  is  in  the  predicate 
position  (i  19,  2) : 


αυτός  δ  ανθρωχος 
ό  ανθρωχος  αυτός 


•  =  the  man  himself 


2.  As  an  identical  pronoun  αυτός  means  same ,  and 
is  in  the  attributive  position  (118,  1) : 

ό  αυτός  ανθρωχος,  the  same  man 


THIRD  PERSONAL  PRONOUN 


67 


When  the  article  precedes  αυτός,  the  meaning  is 
always  the  same. 

3.  When  used  alone  in  the  genitive,  ablative, 
locative,  instrumental,  dative,  and  accusative  cases 
(the  “oblique”  cases),  this  word  is  the  simple  per¬ 
sonal  pronoun  of  the  third  person : 

βλέχω  αυτόν,  I  see  him 
χέμχομεν  αυτούς,  we  send  them 

έν  τφ  οϊχφ  αυτού,  in  his  house  (in  the  house  of  him) 
λαμβάνει  τόν  άρτον  αχό  αυτής,  he  takes  the  bread  from 

her 

(With  αυτός  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  it  is 
not  clear  whether  we  have  simply  an  emphatic  “he,” 
etc.,  or  an  intensive  “self.”) 

146.  1.  The  substantive  to  which  a  pronoun  refers 
is  called  its  antecedent: 

γινώσκομεν  τόν  διδάσκαλον  και  λέγομεν  αυτώ,  we  know 

the  teacher  and  speak  to  him. 
τόν  διδάσκαλον  is  the  antecedent  of  αυτώ 

2.  A  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  number.  Cf.  διδάσκαλον  (masc.  gender,  sing, 
number)  and  αυτώ  (masc.  gender,  sing,  number). 

147.  1.  άλλος  is  declined  (except  the  accent)  like 
αυτός.  Note  -0  in  the  nom.  and  acc.  neuter  singular, 
άλλος  is  used  alone  and  with  the  article  (but  in 
New  Testament  never  in  the  senses  of  “the  rest 
of”). 

2.  όλος  always  has  the  predicate  position  in  the 
New  Testament,  όλος  ό  κόσμος,  the  whole  world. 


68 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


148.  The  imperfect  indicative  of  ειμί,  I  am ,  is 

Singular  Plural 

1.  (ήν)  and  ή  μην,  I  was  ή  μεν  and  η  μέθα,  we  were 

2.  ής  and  ήσθα,  thou  wast  ήτε,  ye  were 

3·  ήν,  he  was  ή  σαν,  they  were 

a.  The  middle  form  η  μην  has  practically  thrust 
out  the  active  form  ήν.  b.  ήσθα  is  an  old  perf. 
form,  found  twice  in  New  Testament,  c.  ήμεθα  is 
found  nearly  as  often  as  ή  μεν  in  New  Testament. 

For  the  meaning  of  the  imperfect  indicative  see  65. 

149.  Conditional  Sentences. 

There  are  four  separate  forms  for  Greek  condi¬ 
tions.  The  first  is: 

The  condition  determined  as  fulfilled. 

Here  any  tense  of  the  indicative  is  used,  generally 
after  εί,  iff  in  the  protasis  (the  if-clause).  The 
apodosis  (conclusion)  generally  has  the  indicative 
(any  tense),  but  any  mode  may  be  used  according 
to  what  is  wanted,  e.g. : 

εί  σώζει  τους  ανθρώπους,  τόν  θεόν  δοξάζει,  if  he  is  saving 
men ,  he  is  glorifying  God. 

εί  εσωζε  τους  ανθρώπους,  τον  θεόν  έδόξαζε,  if  he  was  saving 
men ,  he  was  glorifying  God. 

“The  indicative  states  the  condition  as  a  fact.  It 
may  or  may  not  be  true  in  fact.  The  condition  has 
nothing  to  do  with  that,  but  only  with  the  state¬ 
ment.” 

The  negative  of  the  protasis  is  generally  ού,  not.2 

1  Infrequently  εάν,  if ,  is  used. 

2  A  few  times  μή,  not,  is  found. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS 


69 


160.  Exercises 

I.  I.  βλέπετε  αυτόν.  2.  αυτοί  ημείς  ούκ  έκρινόμεθα, 
αλλά  αυτόν  έκρίνομεν.  3·  δ  αυτός  μαθητής  έλάμβανε  τά 
τέκνα  καί  έδίδασκεν  αυτά.  4·  μενομεν  έν  αυτφ,  ζωήν 
αιώνιον  έχομεν.  5·  λέγει  6  ’Ιησούς1  ότι  οι  δούλοι 
αυτού  δοξάζουσι  αυτόν. 

II  ι.  I  glorify  him.  2.  Darkness  is  not  in  him. 
3.  He  himself  is  the  life.  4.  On  (έν)  the  same  day  he 
was  teaching  them.  5.  If  we  receive  him,  he  saves 
us.  6.  We  know  the  truth  and  proclaim  it.  7.  He 
has  other  servants  in  the  world.  8.  He  was  in  the 
house.  9.  They  were  faithful  men. 


LESSON  XXI 

Defective  (“Deponent”)  Verbs 


The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  ουτος  and  έκεινος 
161.  Vocabulary 


απέρχομαι, 

αποκρίνομαι, 

βούλομαι, 

γίνομαι, 

διέρχομαι, 

δύναμαι, 

εισέρχομαι, 


I  go  away 
I  answer 
I  wish 
I  become ,  be 
I  go  through 

I  am  able ,  can 

I  enter 


έξέρχομαι, 
έρχομαι, 
πορεύομαι, 
προσέρχομαι 
έκεινος, -η, -ο, 


ουτος,  αύτη, 
τούτο, 


I  go  out 
I  go ,  come 
I  go ,  proceed 
I  go  to,  come  to 
demons,  pron., 
that  (one) 
demons,  pron. 
this  (one) 


1  Jesus. 


70 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


διά,  prep,  (orginally  “interval  between”)  with 
gen.  through ,  by;  with  ace.,  because  of ,  for  the 
sake  of,  on  account  of. 

«τυρός,  prep,  (originally  near,  facing)  with  loc.,  near , 
by;  with  ace.,  towards,  to;  with  abl.  (once), 
“ from  the  point  of  view  of.  ” 

a.  Note  the  many  compound 1  verbs  in  the  vocabu¬ 
lary,  especially  a  preposition  +  έρχομαι.  Many  of 
these  verbs  occur  hundreds  of  times  in  the  New 
Testament,  b.  δύναμαι  does  not  have  a  thematic 
vowel;  a  appears  in  all  persons.  In  the  second 
pers.  sing,  two  forms  are  found:  δύνασαι  and  δύνη. 
c.  γίνομαι  is  used  also  as  a  copula  (see  137). 

152.  Defective  verbs.  Some  verbs  were  used  in  all 
the  voices  in  all  the  tenses,  as  λύω;  some  verbs  in 
some  tenses  were  used  only  in  one  voice  and  in  other 
tenses,  in  another  voice,  as  βαίνω,  I  go  (future 
βήσομαι) ;  some  verbs  were  used  in  one  voice  only, 
as  κείμαι,  I  lie  {am  laid). 

The  term  defective  is  applied  to  those  verbs  which 
are  used  either  in  the  middle  voice  or  in  the  passive 
voice  and  not  in  the  active  voice  but  seemingly  have 
a  simple  active  meaning;  as  αισθάνομαι,  I  perceive,  in 
middle  voice;  βούλομαι,  I  wish,  in  passive  voice. 

The  verbs  in  the  vocabulary  (151)  are  defective 
verbs.  But  some  of  these  verbs  have  active  forms 
in  some  tenses,  as  γίνομαι;  second  perfect  active  γέγονα. 

These  verbs  have  been  called  “deponents”  (mid¬ 
dle  or  passive)  because  it  was  difficult  to  see  the  dis¬ 
tinctive  force  of  the  voice.  Yet  it  is  not  hard  to 


1  See  73-76. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS 


71 


recognize  the  personal  interest  of  the  subject  in  the 
verbs  in  the  middle  voice. 

153.  The  declension  of  ουτος  is: 

Singular 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ουτος 

αυτή 

τούτο 

Gen. 

τούτου 

ταύτης 

τούτου 

Abl. 

τούτου 

ταύτης 

τούτου 

Loc. 

τούτφ 

ταύτη 

τούτφ 

Ins. 

τούτφ 

ταύτη 

τούτφ 

Dat. 

τούτφ 

ταύτη 

τούτφ 

Acc. 

τούτον 

ταύτην 

τούτο 

Plural 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ουτοι 

αυται 

ταύτα 

Gen. 

τούτων 

τούτων 

τούτων 

Abl. 

τούτων 

τούτων 

τούτων 

Loc. 

τούτοις 

ταύταις 

τούτοις 

Ins. 

τούτους 

ταύταις 

τούτοις 

Dat. 

τούτοις 

ταύταις 

τούτοις 

Acc. 

τούτους 

ταύτας 

ταύτα 

154.  Observe:  I.  The  rough  breathing  occurs  in 
the  nom.  masc.  and  fern.,  sing,  and  plural,  but  all 
other  forms  begin  with  τ.  2.  The  diphthong  of  the 
penult,  ou  or  au,  varies  as  the  vowel  of  the  ultima, 
ο(ω)  or  α (η).  3.  The  accent  remains  on  the  penult. 

155.  The  declension  of  εκείνος  is  like  that  of  αυτός 
(except  the  accent).  Note  in  the  neuter  sing.  nom. 
and  acc.  έκεΐνο. 


72 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


166.  οδτος  and  έκείνος  are  demonstrative  pronouns. 
In  contrast,  οδτος  refers,  as  a  rule,  to  what  is  near  or 
last  mentioned,  and  έκείνος  to  what  is  remote,  or 
absent. 

157.  Use  of  οδτος  and  έκείνος.  I.  When  they  are 
used  with  a  substantive,  they  commonly  have  the 
predicate  position:  e.g.,  δ  λόγος  οδτος  or  οδτος  δ  λόγος, 
this  word ;  έκείνη  ή  ημέρα  or  ή  ήμερα  έκείνη,  that  day. 

2.  When  the  article  does  not  occur  with  the  sub¬ 
stantive,  the  substantive  is  in  the  predicate:  e.g., 
τρίτην  ταύτην  ημέραν,  this  a  third  day  (not  this  third 
day). 

3.  They  are  often  used  alone,  without  substan¬ 
tives:  e.g.,  οδτος,  this  one  (man  or  person);  έκείνη, 
that  woman;  τούτο,  this  thing;  ταϋτα,  these  things;  etc. 

158.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έκείνος  δέ  δ  δούλος  άχέρχεται.  2.  τούτο  τδ  τέκνον 
είσήρχετο  εις  τον  οίκον  έκείνον.  3·  Εκείνος  δίκαιός  έστιν. 
4·  αυτή  έστίν  ή  χρώτη  εντολή.  5·  Εκείνα ις  ταίς  ήμέραις 
κακοί  χροφήται  διήρχοντο  τάς  κώμας.  6.  δ  κύριος  ελεγεν 
τοδτφ  τους  λόγους  ζωής  αιωνίου. 

II.  ι.  This  world;  that  gift.  2.  This  disciple 
knows  the  law  and  the  prophets.  3.  This  is  the  work 
of  God.  4.  Those  children  were  going  to  him. 

5.  This  commandment  I  write  to  the  brethren. 

6.  On  that  day  he  was  preaching  in  the  temple. 


PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE  ACTIVE 


73 


LESSON  XXII 
Present  Subjunctive  Active 

169.  Vocabulary 

αμαρτάνω,  I  sin 

άναβαίνω,  I  go  up ,  come  up ,  ascend 
άνά,  prep,  (original  meaning  on ,  w/wn,  along) 
usually  with  the  accusative  in  the  distribu¬ 
tive  sense: 

άνά  δύο,  two  by  two 
άνά  εκατόν,  by  hundreds 

ΐνα,  conj.  generally  with  subjunctive,  in  order  that , 
that 

κατά,  prep,  (original  meaning  down)  with  gen.,  down 
(upon),  against;  with  abl.,  down  (from) ;  with 
acc.,  down  (along),  through,  according  to. 
μετά,  prep,  (original  meaning  “ midst”)  with  the 
gen.,  with;  with  the  acc.,  after;  μετά  ταΰτα, 
after  these  things,  after  this. 
μή,  not  χα^ρω,  rejoice 

vuv,  adv.,  now  χώς,  adv.,  how 

160.  From  the  previous  lessons  it  has  been  learned 
that  the  Greek  verb  has  tense,  voice,  and  mode,  like 
verbs  in  other  languages. 

161.  It  has  been  seen  (14)  that  tense  has  to  do  with 
the  action  of  the  verb  as  regards  the  state  of  action. 
Voice  (51  and  52)  has  to  do  with  the  action  of  the 
verb  as  regards  the  subject  of  the  action.  Mode  has 
to  do  with  the  manner  of  affirmation,  how  it  is  made, 
and  not  with  action  as  do  voice  and  tense. 


74 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


162.  It  has  been  observed  that  the  indicative  is  the 
mode  of  definite  assertion.  It  is  used  to  affirm 
positively,  definitely,  absolutely,  undoubtingly.  The 
mode  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  actual  facts 
(whether  true  or  untrue),  but  only  with  the  state¬ 
ment  of  them.  The  indicative  states  a  thing  as  true. 

163.  The  subjunctive  mode  is  a  mode  of  doubtful 
statement,  of  hesitating  affirmation,  of  contingency. 

a.  The  subjunctive  is  usually  found  in  two  tenses, 
the  present  and  the  aorist.  The  perfect  subjunctive 
is  very  rare. 


164. 


The  present  subjunctive  active  of  λύω  is: 
Singular  Plural 


1.  λύω 

2.  λύης 
3·  λύ η 


λύωμεν 

λύητε 

λύ(οσι(ν1) 


165.  Observe  that:  ι.  The  subjunctive  has  the 
primary  active  personal  endings  (see  17-19).  2.  The 
long  thematic  vowel  ω/η  is  the  subjunctive  mode 
sign.  3.  In  the  second  and  third  persons  sing,  η 
has  iota-subscript  (η) 

166.  The  present  subj.  of  είμί  is: 


Singular 

Plural 

T  T 

I.  ω 

ώμεν 

2-  ί)ς 

ήτε 

3·  η 

ώσί(ν1) 

Note  the  circumflex  accent. 

167.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  of  purpose 
after  Yva. 


1  See  footnote  to  142. 


PRESENT  SUBJ.  MIDD.  AND  PASS. 


75 


Examine  closely  the  following  sentences: 
έρχεται  ινα  βλέπη  αυτόν,  he  comes  that  he  may  see  him . 
ταΰτα  λέγομεν  ινα  μή  άμαρτάνωσι,  we  say  this  in  order 
that  they  may  not  sin. 

168.  Note  that  the  negative  with  the  subjunctive  is  μή. 

169.  There  is  no  time  (absolute)  element  in  the  sub¬ 
junctive  mode  in  any  tense.  The  present  subjunc¬ 
tive  expresses  linear  or  durative  action  without 
reference  to  time.  See  14. 

170.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έγώ  δέ  έρχομαι  Υνα  τον  κόσμον  σώζω.  2. 
κηρύσσομεν  ινα  οι  άνθρωποι  εχωσι  ζωήν  αιώνιον.  3·  πώς  γε 
δύναται  σώζειν;1  4·  μετά  ταΰτα  απέρχεται  εις  τήν 
έρημον.  5·  °  θεός  λέγει  ήμΐν  ινα  μή  μένωμεν  έν  τή  άμαρτίςι. 
6.  δ  ’Ιησούς  αυτός  οΰκ  έβάπτιζεν,  άλλ’  οι  μαθηταί  αυτού. 

II.  I.  Now  we  become  the  children  of  God. 

2.  They  baptize  in  order  that  they  may  glorify  God. 

3.  You  are  not  able  to  hear  my  word.  4.  After 
these  things  he  goes  away  in  order  that  they  may  not 
see  him.  5.  How  can  (is  able)  he  take  away  our  sins? 


LESSON  XXIII 

Present  Subjunctive  Middle  and  Passive 

171.  Vocabulary 

άσπάζομαι,  I  salute  καινός, -ή, -όν,  new 

ευαγγέλιον,  τό,  gospel  μαρτυρία,  ή,  witnessing , 

δέχομαι,  I  receive  witness , 

καθώς,  adv.,  just  as,  even  as  testimony 

1  The  question  mark  (;)  is  the  same  in  form  as  our  semicolon. 


76 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


ouv,  postpositive  adv.,  there -  ούτως,  adv.  thus ,  in  this 

fore,  then,  now.  manner,  so 

172.  The  present  middle  and  passive  subjunctive  of 
λύω.  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  λύωμαι  λυώμεθα 

2.  λύη  λόησθε 

3·  λύηται  λύωνται 

/ 

173.  Observe:  ι.  The  middle  and  passive  forms  are 
alike  (this  was  seen  in  the  indicative  also,  6o). 

2.  The  mode  sign  ω/ v  is  the  same  as  in  the  active 
(see  165,  2). 

3.  The  personal  endings  are  the  primary  middle 
(and  passive)  endings  (see  54  and  60). 

a.  In  the  second  pers.  sing,  -η  is  for  -ησαι;  σ 
dropped  out,  then  η  and  at  contracted  to  η.  Note 
iota-subscript  under  η 

174.  The  subjunctive  (first  person  plural)  is  used 
in  exhortations:  as 

χαίρωμεν  έν  τη  άληθεία,  let  us  rejoice  in  the  truth. 
μή  λέγωμεν  κακά,  let  us  not  speak  evil  things. 

175.  Many  verbs  in  Greek  are  followed  by  the 
genitive  case,  and  many  by  the  dative  case,  where 
the  corresponding  verbs  in  English  would  be  fol¬ 
lowed  by  the  objective  case.  In  each  instance  the 
idea  of  the  case  is  accented. 

ακούει  τής  φωνής,  he  hears  the  voice. 

(This  just  tells  “kind”  of  sound.)  The  accusative 


SECOND  AORIST  INDICATIVE 


77 


may  be  used  after  ακούω;  then  the  meaning  of  the 
sound  is  comprehended. 

χιστεύομεν  αύτφ,  we  believe  Jlim. 

άχοκρίνεται  τφ  τέκνφ,  he  answers  the  child. 
δουλεύω  αύτφ,  I  serve  him. 

Note  that  the  dative  accents  the  personal  interest. 

176.  Exercises 

I.  I.  χιστεύωμεν  τφ  κυρίψ.  2.  άγώμεθα  υχδ  των 
άχοστόλων.  3·  θώς  έκεϊνος  δίκαιός  έστιν,  ώμεν  δίκαιοι 
ήμεΐς.  4·  «ΡΧΪ5  δ  λόγος  ήκούετο.  5·  δεχώμεθα  την 
μαρτυρίαν  αυτού.  6.  ηκουον  των  φωνών  των  δούλων. 

II.  ι.  Let  us  not  answer  him.  2.  Let  us  salute 
the  apostles.  3.  Let  us  receive  the  truth  in  order 
that  we  may  know  it.  4.  He  was  preaching  the 
gospel  of  the  new  covenant.  5.  He  is  able  to  take 
away  our  sins.  6.  Let  us  be  led  by  the  Lord  into 
truth. 


LESSON  XXIV 

Second  Aorist  Indicative  Active  and  Middle 

177.  Vocabulary 


άχέθανον, 

εβαλον, 

έγενόμην, 

ειδον, 

(είχον), 

είχα, 

ελαβον. 


I  died ;  second  aor.  of  άχοθνήσκω. 

I  threw ,  cast;  second  aor.  of  βάλλω. 

I  became;  second  aor.  of  γίνομαι. 

I  saw;  second  aor. — no  present  stem  in  use.. 

but  όράω  is  used  in  present  tense. 

I  said;  second  aor. — no  present  stem  in 
use,  but  λέγω  is  used  in  the  present  tense. 
I  took;  second  aor.  of  λαμβάνω. 


78 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


έλιχον,  I  left;  second  aor.  of  λείχω, 
εδρον,  I  found;  second  aor.  of  ευρίσκω, 
εσχον,  I  got ;  second  aor.  of  εχω. 
εφαγον,  I  ate;  second  aor. — no  present  stem  in  use, 
but  έσθίω  is  used  in  the  present  tense, 
ήλθον,  I  went ,  came;  second  aor. — no  present 
stem  in  use,  but  έρχομαι  is  used  in  the 
present  tense. 

χαρέλαβον,  I  received;  second  aor.  of  χαραλαμβάνω. 

178.  The  second  aorist  is  so  called  in  distinction 
from  the  first  aorist ,  which  is  to  be  studied  in  Lesson 
XXXVI.  They  are  not  two  different  tenses,  but 
second  aorist  and  first  aorist  are  two  forms  of  the 
same  tense. 

179.  As  has  already  been  learned  (14),  the  funda¬ 
mental  idea  in  tense  is  the  “kind  of  action.”  The 
present  tense  (and  imperfect,  65,  69)  expresses  dura- 
tive  or  linear  action.  The  aorist  tense  expresses - 
action  in  its  simplest  form — undefined;  it  does  not 
divStinguish  between  complete  or  incomplete  action. 
The  aorist  tense  treats  the  action  as  a  point; — this 
kind  of  action  is  called  punctiliar:  εχω,  I  have ,  am 
holding;  εσχον,  I  got ,  obtained. 

180.  This  kind  of  action  (punctiliar)  is  timeless. 
But  time  is  expressed  in  the  indicative  mode  by  the 
augment, — punctiliar  action  in  past  time,  generally. 

In  narrative  the  difference  between  the  aorist  in¬ 
dicative  and  the  imperfect  indicative  is  just  this: 
the  aorist  indicative  expresses  punctiliar  action  in 
past  time,  while  the  imperfect  indicative  expresses 
durative  action  in  past  time. 


SECOND  AORIST  INDICATIVE 


79 


181.  The  second  aorist 1  indicative  active  and  mid¬ 
dle  of  λείπω  is: 


Active 

Singular 

1.  ελιπον 

2.  ελιχες 
3·  ελιχε 


Plural 

έλίχομεν 

έλίχετε 

ελιχον 


Second  aorist  active  infinitive,  λιχεϊν. 


Middle 


1.  έλιχόμην  έλιχόμεθα 

2.  έλίχου  έλίχεσθε 


έλίχετο  έλίχοντο 

Second  aorist  middle  infinitive,  λιχέσθαι. 

182.  Observe:  i.  The  difference  in  form  between 
the  second  aorist  indicative  and  the  imperfect  in¬ 
dicative  of  the  same  verb  is  a  difference  in  stem: 
aorist  stem  λιχ-;  imperfect  (having  the  present 
stem)  λειχ-.  2.  The  secondary  personal  endings  (66, 
79)  are  used.  3.  The  augment  in  the  aorist  follows 
the  same  principles  as  it  did  in  the  imperfect.  (70). 
4.  The  accent  of  the  second  aorist  infinitive  is  not 
recessive  (11),  but  in  the  active  is  placed  on  the 
ultima,  and  in  the  midde  on  the  penult. 

The  endings,  -α,  -ας,  -ε,  -αμεν,  -ατε,  -αν,  are  found 
frequently  with  second  aorist  stems  and  almost 
exclusively  with  είχον. 


183.  Note  that  the  infinitive  has  no  augment.  The 
aorist  act.  inf.  λιχεΐν  means  simply  to  leave ,  the  action 


1  The  second  aorist  of  the  thematic  vowel  °/e  type  is  introduced 
here  on  account  of  its  simplicity  and  its  similarity  in  inflection  to 
the  imperfect,  as  well  as  on  account  of  its  frequent  use. 


80 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


is  punctiliar  and  timeless;  while  the  present  act. 
infinitive  λείχειν  means  to  be  leaving  (or  to  keep  leav¬ 
ing),  the  action  is  durative  and  timeless.  So  also 
in  the  middle. 

184.  The  second  aorist  usually  exhibits  the  simple 
stem  of  the  verb.  The  second  aorist  given  here  is 
the  thematic  type,  i.e.,  uses  the  thematic  vowel  %. 


Present 

Present 

Aorist 

Aorist 

stem 

theme 

stem 

theme 

βάλλω 

βαλλ- 

βαλλ°/  € 

βαλ- 

βαλ0/ € 

γίνομαι 

γιν- 

γιν% 

γεν- 

γεν% 

λείχω 

λειχ- 

λειχ°/€ 

λιχ- 

λΐΧ0/ί 

Note  that  the  second  aorist  is  known  by  its  stem. 

185.  From  the  forms  of  the  present,  imperfect,  per¬ 
fect,  etc.,  it  cannot  be  determined  beforehand  whether 
a  verb  has  a  first  aorist  or  a  second  aorist,  nor,  if  it 
has  a  second  aorist,  what  the  form  of  the  second 
aorist  is.  To  determine  this,  the  verb  must  be 
examined  in  a  lexicon. 

186.  The  second  aorist  act.  and  middle  are  formed 
on  the  second  aorist  stem.  The  aorist  passive  of  all 
verbs  is  different  from  the  aorist  middle.  Review 
the  meaning  of  the  middle  (52). 

έλεχόμην  is  second  aorist  indicative  middle,  I  left 
for  myself ,  etc. 

187.  The  Greek  aorist  indicative  is  not  the  exact 
equivalent  of  any  tense  in  English  or  in  any  other 
language.  The  Greek  aorist  and  the  English  preterit 
do  not  exactly  correspond.  The  translation  given 
in  the  vocabulary  is  just  to  get  the  verb  idea  asso- 


SECOND  AORIST  SUBJUNCTIVE 


81 


dated  with  the  verb  form.  To  translate  the  Greek 
aorist  ind.,  sometimes  the  English  preterit  is  used, 
sometimes  the  perfect,  sometimes  the  past.  The 
Greek  aorist  ind.  refers  the  action  to  the  past  without 
any  exact  specification  as  to  antecedence  of  action 
or  as  to  present  results  of  action. 

188.  Exercises 

■*1 

I.  I.  ήλθε  είς  τδν  οίκον.  2.  έφάγομεν  τον  άρτον.  3· 
τφ  κόσμφ  ήν  καί  δ  κόσμος  δι’  αυτού  έγένετο.  φ  ε?ς  τά 
ϊδια  ήλθεν  καί  οί  (ίδιοι  αυτόν  ου  χαρέλαβον.  5·  ταύτα  είχον 
δμΐν  έν  τώ  ίε ρω.  6.  μετά  ταΰτα  άχέθανεν  τδ  τέκνον. 

II.  ι.  He  died  on  the  third  day.  2.  He  took  the 

bread  and  ate  (it).  3.  The  disciples  obtained  good 

promises.  4.  They  came  and  saw  where  (χοΰ)  he  was 
abiding.  5.  The  servant  cast  a  stone  into  the  boat. 


LESSON  XXV 


Second  Aorist  Subjunctive  Active  and  Middle 

Vocabulary 

άληθινός,  -ή,  -όν,  true  διάβολος,  δ,  devil 

βίος,  δ,  life  έκεΐ,  adv.,  there 


189. 


Learn  the  capital  letters  in  1  of  Lesson  I. 

190.  The  second  aorist  subjunctive  active  and  mid¬ 
dle  of  λείχω  is: 


Active 


Singular 

1.  λίχω 

2.  λίχης 
3·  Hxfl 


Plural 


82  BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Middle 


1.  λίχωμαΕ 

2.  λίχη 

3·  λίχηται 


λιχώμεθα 

λίχησθε 

λίχωνται 


191.  Observe:  ι.  There  is  no  augment  in  the  aorist 
subjunctive.  2.  The  personal  endings  are  the  pri¬ 
mary  active  and  middle.  3.  The  subjunctive  mode 
sign  is  the  long  thematic  vowel  ω/η.  4.  The  only 
difference  in  form  between  the  second  aorist  subj. 
(act.  and  middle)  and  the  present  subj.  (act.  and 
middle)  is  in  the  stem, — present  stem  λειχ-;  aorist 
stem  λιχ-. 

192.  Let  it  be  remembered  that  the  aorist  subjunc¬ 
tive  does  not  denote  past  time.  But  the  real  time  of 
the  subj.  is  future  in  relation  to  the  speaker  or 
writer ;  and  this  time  element  is  not  due  to  the  tense 
at  all. 

193.  The  distinction  in  meaning  between  the  pres¬ 
ent  subjunctive  and  the  aorist  subjunctive  is  only 
in  the  kind  of  action.  The  present  subj.  expresses 
durative  action.  The  aorist  subj.  expresses  punctiliar 
action. 

Example:  μή  άχοθνήσκωμεν  έν  τη  αμαρτία,  let  US  not 
be  dying  m  sin ,  let  us  not  continue  to  die  (or  keep  on 
dying)  in  sin.  μή  άχοθάνωμεν  έν  τή  αμαρτία,  let  US  not 
die  in  sin. 

In  the  first  example  the  present  (subjunctive) 
represents  the  action  in  progress.  In  the  second 
example  the  aorist  (subjunctive)  just  treats  the 
action  as  a  single  whole  without  any  reference  to 


THIRD  DECLENSION 


83 


progress  or  completion.  It  is  generally  difficult  to 
bring  out  the  difference  in  an  English  translation. 

194.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  questions  of  doubt, 
where  the  speaker  asks  what  he  is  to  do  or  say: 

χώς  εύρωμεν  αύτόν;  How  are  we  to  find  him? 
τί  εΥχω;  What  am  I  to  say?  What  shall  I  say? 
έχιμένωμεν  τή  αμαρτία;  Shall  we  remain  in  sin? 

195.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έγώ  ουκ  ήλθον  βαλειν  είρήνην  έχί  τήν  γην.  2. 
αγωμεν  καί  ήμεΐς  Υνα  άχοθάνωμεν  μετ’  αυτού.  3·  οδτος 
ήλθεν  είς  μαρτυρίαν  Υνα  ημείς  χαραλάβωμεν  αύτόν.  φ 
fjpov  ούν  λίθους  Υνα  βάλωσιν  έχ’  αύτόν.  5·  ταΰτα  είχεν 
Ιησούς  αύτοΐς  έν  τω  ίερώ. 

II.  ι.  How  shall  we  receive  them?  2.  Let  us  not 
become  evil  prophets.  3.  What  shall  we  eat? 
4.  The  servants  came  in  order  that  they  might  find 
the  children.  5.  He  died  that  men  might  have  life. 


LESSON  XXVI 

Third  Declension:  Neuter  Substantives  in  -ματ-. 

196.  Vocabulary 

αίμα,  τό,  blood  ρήμα»  τό,  word 

γράμμα,  τό,  letter  (of  alpha-  σχέρμα,  τό,  seed 

bet),  writing  στόμα,  τό,  mouth 

θέλημα,  τό,  will  σώμα,  τό,  body 

δνομα,  τό,  name  χάρισμα,  τό,  gift,  free  gift 

χνεΰμα,  τό,  spirit  άγιος, -α, -ον,  holy 


84 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


197.  The  third  declension  is  commonly  called  the 
consonant  declension  because  most  of  the  nouns  have 
stems  ending  in  a  consonant.  A  few  nouns,  included 
in  this  declension,  ended  in  the  vowels  t  and  u, 
which  were  sometimes  semivowels. 

198.  The  case  endings  of  the  consonant  declension 


Singular  Plural 


Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

-ς  or  none 

None 

-ες 

-a 

Gen. 

-ος 

-ος 

-ων 

-ων 

Abl. 

-ος 

-ος 

-ων 

-ων 

Loc. 

-t 

-t 

-σι 

-σι 

Ins. 

-1 

-1 

-σι 

-σι 

Dat. 

-t 

-1 

-σι 

-σι 

Acc. 

-v  or  -a 

none 

(-νς),  -ας 

-α 

Voc.  none  or  like 

none 

-ες 

-α 

nom.  or  stem 


In  the  case  endings  final  a  is  short. 

These  forms  must  he  thoroughly  mastered. 

Note  that  the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing,  use  the 
locative  ending  -t;  and  in  the  plural  these  cases  use 
the  locative  ending  -σι  (see  p.  65  n.). 

The  gen.  and  abl.  plural  ending  -ων  is  the  same  for 
all  the  declensions. 

The  neuter  plural  nom.,  acc.,  and  voc.  are  always 
alike. 

The  vocative  plural  is  always  the  same  as  the 
nominative. 


THIRD  DECLENSION 


85 


199.  The  declension  of  όνομα,1  name ,  is: 

STEM  όνοματ- 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

δνομα 

όνόματα 

Gen. 

όνόματος 

όνομάτων 

Abl. 

όνόματος 

όνομάτων 

Loc. 

όνόματι 

όνόμασι 

Ins. 

όνόματι 

όνόμασι 

Dat. 

όνόματι 

όνόμασι 

Acc. 

δνομα 

όνόματα 

Observe : 

ι.  As  in 

the  neuters  of  the  second 

declension,  the  nom.  acc.  and  voc.  sing,  are  alike,  and 
the  same  cases  in  the  plural  are  alike.  2.  The  nom. 
sing,  is  the  mere  stem,  final  τ  being  dropped. 

Note:  The  consonants  that  can  stand  at  the  close 
of  a  word  in  Greek  are  v,  p,  and  ς  (including  ξ  and  ψ). 
All  other  consonants  which  would  occur  there  are 
dropped.  3.  In  the  loc.,  ins.,  dat.,  plural,  όνόμασι,  the 
τ  of  the  stem  drops  out  before  σ. 

201.  In  declining  a  substantive  of  the  consonant 
declension  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  stem.  The 
stem  is  usually  found  by  dropping  the  genitive  sing, 
ending  -ος.  Thus:  Nom.  στόμα;  gen.  στόματος;  stem 
στο  ματ-.  The  genitive  singular,  then,  must  be  known 
before  nouns  of  the  consonant  declension  can  be 
declined. 

202.  The  gender  of  the  third  declension  substantives, 
except  in  the  case  of  special  classes  like  the  sub- 

1  Neuter  substantives  with  nom.  in  -μα  (stem  -ματ-)  are  intro¬ 
duced  first  on  account  of  their  simplicity  and  importance. 


86 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


stantives  in  -ματ-,  must  be  learned  with  each  word 
separately. 

203.  A  neuter  plural  subject  often  has  its  verb  in  the 
singular : 

των  δώδεκα  άχοστόλων  τα  όνόματά  έστιν  ταΰτα,  the  names 
of  the  twelve  apostles  are  these. 

204.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τοΰτό  έστι  τδ  σώμα  μου.  2.  τα  ρήματα  ζωής 
αιωνίου  εχεις.  3·  γινώσκομεν  τδ  θέλημα  του  θεού,  φ 
δνομα  ήν  αύτω  Ιωάννης.  5*  σπέρμα  ’Αβραάμ  έσμεν.  6. 
θέλετε  άγειν  έφ’  (against)  ημάς  τδ  αίμα  το  ΰ  άνθ  ρώχο  υ  το  υτο  υ ; 

II.  ι.  This  is  the  will  of  God.  2.  These  are  the 
good  seed.  3.  The  words  of  the  prophet  are  written 
in  the  scriptures.  4.  Let  us  believe  on  (είς)  the 
name  of  the  Lord.  5.  That  one  was  baptizing  them 
in  the  holy  spirit.  6.  The  will  of  God  came  through 
the  mouths  of  the  prophets. 

LESSON  XXVn 

Future  Indicative  Active  and  Middle 

205.  Vocabulary 
δαιμόνιον,  τό,  demon 

καί,  besides  the  usual  connective  use,  and ,  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  also ,  and  even. 
χερί,  prep,  (original  meaning  around  (on  all  sides)) 
with  gen.,  about ,  concerning;  with  abl.,  from 
around;  with  acc.,  round  about ,  about ,  concerning. 
ύχέρ,  prep,  (original  meaning  over ,  upper)  with  abl., 
in  behalf  of,  in  interest  of;  instead  of;  in  place  of: 


FUTURE  INDICATIVE 


87 


for  the  sake  of;  about ,  concerning;  with  acc.,  over , 
above ,  beyond. 

ώς,  relative,  comparative,  and  temporal  adv.,  as, 
when. 

206.  The  future  tense  is  made  on  aoristic  (punctiliar) 
roots  in  some  verbs  and  on  durative  roots  in  other 
verbs.  The  kind  of  action  of  the  future  may  be 
either  punctiliar  or  durative.  But  in  use  the  future 
is  generally  punctiliar. 

207.  The  future  indicative,  as  in  English,  generally 
denotes  what  is  going  to  take  place.  It  is  just  the 
present  vividly  projected  into  the  future.  In  Eng¬ 
lish  it  is  done  by  “shall”  in  the  first  person  and  by 
“will”  in  the  second  and  third  persons.  Yet  the 
future  ind.  has  modal  aspects  which  will  be  pre¬ 
sented  later. 

208 .  The  future  indicative  active  and  middle  of  λ  ύω  is : 


Active 


Singular 

1.  λύσω,  I  shall  loose 

2.  λύσεις  etc. 


Plural 

λύσομεν 

λύσετε 


3·  λύσει  λύσουσι 

Future  active  infinitive,  λύσειν1 


Middle 

Singular  Plural 

1.  λύσομαι,  I  shall  loose  myself  λυσόμεθα 

2.  λύση  or  for  myself ,  etc.  λύσεσθε 

3·  λύσεται  λύσονται 

Future  middle  infinitive,  λύσεσθαι 


1  The  future  infinitive  is  found  only  six  times  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  εσεσθαί  occurs  four  of  the  six  times. 


88 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


a .  The  future  passive  is  quite  different  from  the 
future  middle,  b.  Except  in  the  future  and  aorist, 
the  middle  and  passive  are  alike  in  form. 

209.  Observe:  I.  The  primary  active  and  middle 
personal  endings  are  used.  2.  The  tense-suffix  is  σ, 
added  to  the  root  λυ-.  3.  The  future  stem  is  λυσ-. 
4.  The  thematic  vowel  is  %·  Note  that,  while  the 
present  theme  is  λυ%,  the  future  theme  is  λυσ°/€. 

210.  Most  verbs  whose  verb  stem  ends  in  a  single 
vowel  (except  the  vowels  α,  ε,  and  0)  or  a  diphthong 
are  conjugated  in  the  future  like  λύσω,  λύσομαι. 

EXAMPLES:  πιστεύω;  fut.  χιστεύσω.  ακούω;  fut. 

άκούσομαι.  κωλύω;  fut.  κωλύσω. 

211.  Future  indicative  of  ε?μί  is: 


Singular 

Plural 

I.  εσομαι. 

I  shall  be, 

Ισόμεθα 

2.  εσγ) 

etc.  · 

εσεσθε 

3·  εσται 

εσονται 

Future  infinitive,  εσεσθαι 


212.  Conditional  sentences  (see  149).  The  third 
class  conditional  sentence  is  the  condition  unde¬ 
termined ,  but  with  prospect  of  determination.  Here 
the  subjunctive  after  έάν  (if)  is  used  in  the  condition 
(if)  clause.  The  conclusion  naturally  has  the  future 
indicative,  but  may  have  any  tense  of  the  indica¬ 
tive,  subjunctive,  or  imperative. 

Examples  : 

έάν  χαραλάβητε  έμέ,  υμείς  εσεσθε  ol  μαθηταί  μου,  if  you 
will  receive  me ,  you  shall  be  my  disciples. 


FUTURE  INDICATIVE 


89 


έάν  εΐχωμεν  ότι  αμαρτίαν  ου κ  έχομεν,  ή  αλήθεια  ούκ  έστιν 
έν  ήμΐν,  if  we  say  that  we  have  not  sin ,  the  truth  is 
not  in  us. 

213.  Exercises 

I.  I.  Χριστός  υχέρ  ήμών  άχέθανεν.  2.  έάν  χιστεύωμεν 
τω  όνόματι  ’Ιησού  Χριστού,  χιστοί  έσμεν.  3·  ^ν  χαραλά- 
βωσι  τά  βήματα  αυτού,  χιστεύσουσιν  αυτώ.  4·  ούτως  έσται 
καί  έν  ταΐς  ήμέραις  τού  υιού  τού  άνθρώχου.  5·  περί  τούτων 
μή  εΤχωμεν.  6.  ούτως  δέ  έσονται  οί  χρώτοι  έσχατοι. 

II.  ι.  The  sons  of  men  shall  believe  on  (εις)  the 
word  of  God.  2.  There  shall  be  joy  in  heaven  be¬ 
cause  (οτι)  he  is  saved.  3.  Ye  shall  be  with  (μετά) 
me  this  day.  4.  If  he  believe  me,  I  shall  hear  him. 
5.  Let  us  go  to  him. 


LESSON  XXVIII 

Future  Indicative  Active  and  Middle  (Continued) 

214.  Vocabulary 


άγαχάω, 

I  love 

αίτέω, 

I  ask  for  (something) 

άκολουθέω, 

I  follow 

γεννάω, 

I  beget 

έ ρωτάω, 

I  ask  (question) 

ζάω, 

I  live 

ζητέω, 

I  seek 

λαλέω, 

I  speak 

μαρτυρέω, 

I  bear  witness ,  testify 

χαρακαλέω, 

I  beseech ,  exhort ,  encourage 

χοιέω, 

I  do ,  make 

90 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


πληρόω,  I  fill,  make  full 

τη  ρέω,  I  keep 

φανερόω,  make  manifest 

Notice  that  the  present  stem  of  these  verbs  ends  in 
one  of  three  vowels,  α,  ε,  or  o.  These  are  called  con¬ 
tract  verbs  because  in  the  conjugation  of  the  present 
system  these  vowels  contract  with  the  thematic 
vowel  (and  personal  ending) .  These  verbs  in  -άω,  -έω, 
and  -όω  are  contracted  only  in  the  present  and  im¬ 
perfect,  and  will  be  studied  in  Lessons  XLIX,  etc. 
In  all  other  systems  these  verbs,  if  regular,  are  con¬ 
jugated  like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  λύω. 

215.  The  future  of 

αγαπάω  is  αγαπήσω; 
λαλέω  is  λαλήσω; 
φανερόω  is  φανερώσω. 

From  these  forms  it  is  evident  that  verbs  whose  stems 
end  in  a  short  vowel  (α,  ε,  o)  generally  lengthen  that 
vowel  before  -σ% 1  of  the  future,  and  then  are  con¬ 
jugated  like  λύσω  (see  208). 

a  is  lengthened  to  η  (but  a  after  ε,  c,  or  p  is  length- 
ε  is  lengthened  to  η  ened  to  a  not  η) 
o  is  lengthened  to  ω 
Thus:  -a  4-  σ°/€  =  -ησ°/* 

-ε  +  σ%  =  -ησ% 

-ο  +  σ%  =  -ωσ0/ € 

216.  ι.  The  future  of 

βλέπω  (stem  βλεπ-)  is  βλέψω; 
νίπτω  (stem  νιβ-)  is  νίψω; 
γράφω  (stem  γραφ-)  is  γράψω. 

1  This  is  also  true  of  other  tense-suffixes. 


FUTURE  INDICATIVE 


91 


From  this  it  is  seen  that  stems  in  π,  β,  or  φ  unite 
with  σ,  forming  ψ ;  that  is  χ  +  σ  =  ψ ;  β  +  σ=  ψ; 
φ  +  σ  =  ψ. 

2.  The  future  of 

διώκω  (stem  διωκ-)  is  διώξω; 

ά'γω  (stem  άγ-)  is  αξω; 

εχω  (stem  σεχ-)  is  εξω. 

Thus  it  is  seen  that  stems  in  κ,  γ,  or  χ  unite  with 

σ  forming  ξ ;  that  is,  κ  +  σ=  ξ;  γ  +  σ  =  ξ ;  χ  4-  σ  =  ξ. 

3.  The  future  of 

σώζω  (stem  σωδ-)  is  σώσω; 
πείθω  (stem  πειθ-)  is  πείσω. 

From  this  it  is  seen  that  stems  in  τ,  δ,  or  Θ  drop 
τ,  δ,  or  Θ  before  σ,  leaving  simple  σ;  that  is,  τσ  =  σ; 
δσ  =  σ;  θσ  =  σ. 

217.  Certain  consonants  are  called  mutes  or  stops 
because  in  forming  them  the  passage  of  the  breath 
is  for  a  moment  closed. 

1 .  The  consonants  π,  β,  φ  are  called  labial  mutes 
or  stops,  because  they  are  made  with  the  lips. 

2.  κ,  γ,  χ  are  called  palatal  mutes  or  stops,  because 
they  are  made  with  the  soft  palate. 

3.  τ,  δ,  Θ  are  called  lingual  (or  dental),  because  they 
are  made  with  the  tongue  (or  teeth) . 

218.  As  an  aid  to  memory  the  changes  in  mute- 
stems  in  forming  the  future  may  be  exhibited  thus: 

Labials,  π,  β,  φ  4-  σ  =  ψ. 

Palatals,  κ,  γ,  χ  Η-  σ  =  ξ. 

Linguals,  τ,  δ,  θ  +  σ  =  σ. 


92 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Keep  in  memory  this  order  of  the  mutes.  They 
occasion  many  important  changes  in  formation  of 
words. 

219.  The  verb-stem  in  many  verbs  is  not  the  same 
as  the  present  stem:  in  the  case  of  νίχτω  it  was 
observed  that  the  verb-stem  is  νΦ-;  the  present  stem 

νιχτ-;  and  the  verb-stem  of  σώζω  is  σωδ.1  The 
verb-stem  of  φυλάσσω  is  φυλακ-;  the  future  is  φυλάξω. 

The  future  of  βαχτίζω  (βαχτιδ-)  is  βαχτίσω. 

220.  The  future  of  any  word  cannot  be  certainly 
determined  beforehand.  A  verb  may  make  its 
future  on  a  durative  root,  a  punctiliar  (aoristic) 
root,  or  on  a  different  verb-root,  έχω  has  two 
futures,  έξω2  (durative)  and  σχήσω  (punctiliar). 
The  future  of  έρχομαι  is  έλεύσομαι.  The  future  of  some 
verbs  occurs  only  in  the  middle  voice:  e.g.,  γινώσκω, 
future  γνώσομαι.  In  general  a  lexicon  must  be  con¬ 
sulted  for  each  verb. 

The  future  of  verbs  with  liquid  stems  (λ,  μ,  v,  p) 
will  be  given  in  Lesson  XLVI. 

221.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τηρήσομεν  τάς  έντολάς  αυτού.  2.  ακολουθήσω 
σοι,3  Κύριε.  3·  γνωσόμεθα  αυτόν,  ότι  όψόμεθα4  αυτόν 
καθώς  έστιν.  φ  εκείνη  τή  ήμέρςε  αίτήσεσθε  έν  τφ 
δνόματί  μου  καί  έρωτήσω  αυτόν  χερί  υμών.  5·  άγαχήσεις 
κύριον  τον  θεόν  σου  έν  όλη  τη  καρδία  σου  καί  έν  όλη  τη  ψυχή 
σου  καί  έν  όλη  τη  διανοία  (mind)  σου.  αυτή  έστίν  ή  χρώτη 
έντολή.  6.  τό  χνεύμα  άξει  ημάς  εις  την  άλήθειαν. 

1  ζ  is  treated  as  a  combination  of  δ  +  z  (or  ζδ). 

2  Note  the  rough  breathing  on  εξω. 

3άκολουθέω  is  followed  by  the  associative-instrumental  case. 

4  From  οχτομαι,  I  see;  stem  ox-. 


THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  93 


II.  I.  We  shall  know  the  truth  and  do  it.  2.  We 
shall  glorify  God.  3.  They  will  bear  witness  con¬ 
cerning  him.  4.  We  shall  persuade  our  hearts. 
5.  He  will  baptize  you.  6.  The  faithful  will  pro¬ 
claim  the  word  of  God.  7.  I  shall  do  the  will  of  God. 

I 

LESSON  XXIX 

Third  Declension:  Lingual  Mute  Stems 

222.  Vocabulary 

αρχών,  -οντος,  δ,  ruler ,  prince 
έλχίς,  -ίδος,  ή,  hope 
νύξ,  νυκτός,  ή,  night 
χούς,  χοδός,  δ,  foot 
φως,  φωτός,  τό,  light 
χάρις,  -ιτος,  ή,  grace 
έργασία,  ή,  work ,  business 

223.  Note  that  the  stem  of 

έλχίς  is  έλχιδ-; 
χάρις  is  χαριτ-; 
νύξ  is  νυκτ-. 

Observe  that  the  stem  in  all  these  substantives  end 
in  a  lingual  mute,  and  that  the  nominative  is  formed 
by  adding  ς  to  the  stem.  Thus, 

έλχιδς  becomes  έλχίς; 
χαριτς  becomes  χάρις; 
νυκτς  becomes  νυκς  =  νύξ. 

For  the  changes  that  occur  when  a  mute  and  ς 
come  together  see  216  and  218. 


94 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


224.  The  declension  of  έλχίς,  hope;  χάρις,  grace; 
and  νύξ,  night: 


Stem 

έλχιδ- 

STEM  χαριτ- 
Singular 

Stem  νυκτ 

Nom. 

έλχίς 

χάρις 

νύξ 

Gen. 

έλχίδος 

χάριτος 

νυκτός 

Abl. 

έλχίδος 

χάριτος 

νυκτός 

Loc. 

έλχίδι 

χάριτι 

νυκτ£ 

Ins. 

έλχίδι 

χάριτι 

νυκτί 

Dat. 

έλχίδι 

χάριτι 

νυκτί 

Acc. 

έλχίδα 

χάριν 

Plural 

νύκτα 

Nom. 

έλχίδες 

χάριτες 

νύκτες 

Gen. 

έλχίδων 

χαρίτων 

νυκτών 

Abl. 

έλχίδο)ν 

χαρίτων 

νυκτών 

Loc. 

έλχίσι 

χάρισι 

νυξί 

Ins. 

έλχίσι 

χάρισι 

νυξί 

Dat. 

έλχίσι 

χάρισι 

νυξί 

Acc. 

έλχίδας 

χάριτας 

νύκτας 

a.  In  the  accusative  singular  forms  like  έλχίδαν, 
νύκταν,  are  found,  b.  In  the  ace.  singular,  the 
form  χάριτα  often  occurs,  c.  Vocatives  in  this  de¬ 
clension  are  rare  and  will  be  specially  mentioned 
whenever  separate  forms  occur. 

225.  Observe  that:  I.  In  the  loc.  ins.  and  dat.  plu. 
a  lingual  mute  drops  out  before  -σι  (see  216,  3,  218). 

2.  In  the  case  of  νυξί,  κσ  changes  to  ξ  after  τ 
dropped  out. 

226.  Monosyllables  of  the  third  declension  gener¬ 
ally  have  the  accent  on  the  ultima  in  the  gen.,  abl., 


THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  95 


ioc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  of  both  numbers.  In  the  gen. 
plu.  ών  has  the  circumflex.  But  φώς  and  χαϊς  are 
accented  in  gen.  plu.  thus,  φώτων,  χαίδων. 

227.  When  substantives  with  stems  in  -ιτ,  -ιδ,  or  -ιθ 
are  not  accented  on  the  ultima,  the  acc.  sing,  gen¬ 
erally  has  v  in  place  of  the  mute  (τ,  δ,  Θ),  e.g., 
χάρις  (χαριτ-),  acc.  χάριν  (but  see  224  b );  but  when 
the  accent  is  on  the  ultima,  the  acc.  is  generally 
formed  like  the  acc.  of  έλχίς,  έλχίδα. 

228.  Declension  of  άρχων,  ruler ,  is: 


Stem  άρχοντ 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

άρχων 

άρχοντες 

Gen. 

άρχοντος 

άρχόντων 

Abl. 

άρχοντος 

αρχόντων 

Loc. 

άρχοντι 

ά'ρχουσι 

Ins. 

άρχοντι 

άρχουσι 

Dat. 

άρχοντι 

άρχουσι 

Acc. 

άρχοντα 

άρχοντας 

229.  Observe 

that:  1.  The  nom. 

sing,  of  ά| 

formed  from  the  mere  stem  without  adding  any¬ 
thing;  final  τ  of  the  stem  is  dropped,  for  a  Greek 
word  cannot  end  in  τ  (see  200,  2  note) ;  then  0  of 
the  stem  is  lengthened  (formative  lengthening)  to  ω. 
2.  When  -ντ-  of  the  stem  comes  before  -σι  of  the 
loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  plur.,  both  v  and  τ  are  dropped 
and  the  0  of  the  stem  is  lengthened  to  ou  (compen¬ 
satory  lengthening) .  (-ντ-  always  drops  out  before 

-σι  and  the  preceding  vowel  lengthened.) 


96 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


230.  In  expressions  of  time  the  locative  denotes  a 
point  in  which;  the  accusative  duration  of ,  and  the 
genitive  time  within  which  (kind  of  time):  e.g.,  νυκτί 
(or  έν  νυκτί),  in  the  night ,  νύκτα,  during  the  night; 
νυκτός,  at  night  (not  day). 

231.  Exercises 

I.  I.  δ  ’Ιησούς  ήλθεν  είς  τήν  οικίαν  τού  αρχοντος.  2. 
τδ  φώς  έν  τή  σκοτίςι  φαίνει.1  3·  έξήλθεν  ή  έλχίς  τής  έργασίας 
αυτών.  4·  νύξ  ούκ  εσται  ετι.2  5·  Εκείνη  τή  νυκτί 
ελαβον  αυτόν.  6.  υμείς  έστε  τδ  φώς  τού  κόσμου.  7·  τ7) 
χάριτι  δέ  θεού  σωζόμεθα  ημείς.  8.  ένιπτε  τούς  χόδας  των 
μαθητών.  9·  °δ  Υ<*ρ  ^στε  δχδ  νόμον  άλλ’  ύχδ  χάριν. 

II.  ι.  They  shall  bear  witness  concerning  him 
that  (ότι)  he  is  the  light.  2.  We  are  saved  by  grace. 
3.  We  are  not  under  law  but  under  grace.  4.  We 
have  hope  in  God.  5.  The  ruler  came  to  him  at 
night. 


LESSON  XXX 

Participles:  The  Present,  Active,  Middle,  and  Passive 


232.  Vocabulary 


άλλότριος,-α,-ον, 

άρτι,  adv., 
δουλεύω, 
ή,  conj., 
καρπός,  δ, 
τυφλός,  -ή,  -όν, 
φανερός,  -ά,  -όν, 


belonging  to  another  (another’s), 
strange 

now ,  just  now ,  this  moment 
I  am  a  servant ,  I  serve 
or 

fruit 

blind 

manifest 


2  ετι,  still,  yet:  ούκ,  Ιτι,  no  longer. 


1  φαίνω,  I  shine. 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE 


97 


233.  The  present  active  participle  of  λύω: 


Stem  λυοντ-,  loosing 
Singular 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

λύων 

λύουσα 

λΰ  ον 

Gen. 

λύοντος 

λυούσης 

λύοντος 

Abl. 

λύοντος 

λυούσης 

λύοντος 

Loc. 

λύοντι 

λυούση 

λύοντι 

Ins. 

λύοντι 

λυούσγ) 

λύοντι 

Dat. 

λύοντι 

λυούσγ) 

λύοντι 

Acc. 

λύοντα 

λύουσαν 

λΰον 

ψ 

Plural 

Nom. 

λύοντες 

λύουσαι 

λυοντα 

Gen. 

λυόντων 

λυουσών 

λυόντων 

Abl. 

λυόντων 

λυουσών 

λυόντων 

Loc. 

λύουσι 

λυουσαις 

λύουσι 

Ins. 

λύουσι 

λυούσαις 

λύουσι 

Dat. 

λύουσι 

λυούσαις 

λύουσι 

Acc. 

λύοντας 

λυούσας 

λύοντα 

234.  Observe:  1.  The  participle  is  declined  in  th 

genders. 


2.  The  stem  λυοντ-  becomes  λ 6ων  in  the  nom.  masc. 
sing.,  like  αρχών,  and  is  declined  like  αρχών. 

3.  The  fern.  nom.  sing,  λύουσα  is  for  λυονσα  for 
λυοντια.1  The  fern,  is  declined  like  γλώσσα  (105)  of 
the  first  declension. 

4.  The  neuter  nom.  and  acc.  sing,  λ  Gov  is  the 
simple  stem,  final  τ  being  dropped.  (229,  200,  2.) 


1  toe  is  the  feminine  suffix  added  to  the  stem.  Apparently  τι  (t  is 
a  semivowel)  became  σ,  then  v  was  dropped  before  σ  and  0  length¬ 
ened  (compensatory)  to  ou. 


98 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


The  neuter  nom.  and  ace.  plur.  ends  in  -a.  Other¬ 
wise  the  neuter  forms  are  like  the  masculine. 

5.  The  masculine  and  neut.  are  declined  in  the 
third  declension ;  the  fern,  in  the  first. 

6.  Note  that  participles  are  accented  like  adjec¬ 
tives;  but  the  gen.  and  abl.  fern,  plural  have  the  cir¬ 
cumflex  accent  over  the  ultima  like  substantives  of 
the  first  declension  The  accent  is  not  recessive. 
The  accent  of  the  present  active  participle  of  ακούω 
is  άκούων,  άκούουσα,  άκοΰον.  Observe  the  position  of 
the  accent  in  the  neuter — not  recessive. 

235.  Learn  the  pres,  participle  of  είμί  (§  ιό). 

236.  The  future  active  participle  of  λύω,  viz.,  λύσων, 
λύσουσα,  λ  Οσον,  going  to  loose ,  is  declined  like  the 
present  participle  of  λύω.  It  is  rare  in  the  New 
Testament. 

237.  The  present  middle  and  passive  participle  of 


λύω  is: 

Middle 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter 

λυόμενος 

λυόμενη 

λυόμενον, 

loosing  {for)  oneself. 

Passive 

λυόμενος 

λυομένη 

λυόμενον, 

being  loosed 

Observe  that  the  present  middle  and  passive  par¬ 
ticiples  are  alike  in  form. 

λυόμενος  is  declined  like  αγαθός,  λυόμενη  like  άγαθή, 
and  λυόμενον  like  άγαθόν,  except  in  accent.  Thus  it 
is  seen  that  the  present,  middle,  and  passive  parti¬ 
ciples  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declensions. 


PRESENT  AND  FUTURE  PARTICIPLES  99 


238.  The  future  middle  participle  of  λύω  is  λυσόμενος, 
-η,  -ον,  going  to  loose  (for)  oneself;  and  is  declined  like 
λυόμενος,  -η,  -ον.  This  is  also  rare  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment. 

239.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  present  participles 
are  made  on  the  present  stem,  and  the  future  act. 
and  middle  participles  are  made  on  the  future  stem. 

In  a  mechanical  way,  the  present  active,  middle, 
and  passive  participles  of  any  regular  verb  may  be 
formed  by  adding  -ων,  -ουσα,  -ον  and  -μένος,  -μένη,  -μενον 
to  the  present  stem  of  the  verb.  Also  the  future 
act.  and  middle  participles  may  be  made  by  adding 
the  same  endings  to  the  future  stem  of  a  verb. 
(See  209,  215,  216,  218.) 

240.  The  participle  is  a  verbal  adjective.  It  is 
both  verb  and  adjective  at  the  same  time. 

1.  Being  an  adjective,  the  participle  is  declined 
in  gender,  number,  and  case;  it  agrees  in  gender, 
number  and  case  with  the  substantive  that  it  modi- 
fies;  like  other  adjectives  it  is  either  attributive  or 
predicate;  and  with  the  article  it  is  used  as  a  sub¬ 
stantive. 

2.  Being  a  verb  also,  the  participle  has  voice  and 
tense;  governs  the  cases  that  the  verb  takes;  and 
like  other  verbs  it  has  adverbial  modifiers  (adjuncts). 

241.  The  participle  has  not  time  in  itself.  Time 
with  the  participle  is  purely  relative;  it  gets  its 
time  from  the  verb  with  which  it  is  used. 

242.  Tense  in  the  participle  expresses  “kind  of 
action”:  the  present  part.,  durative  action;  the 
aorist  participle,  punctiliar  action. 


100 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


243.  The  participle  has  no  personal  endings  and  is 
therefore  not  limited  by  a  subject.  The  participle 
has  no  subject.  It  makes  no  affirmation  and  is  not 
a  mode. 

244.  Note  the  simple  attributive  use  of  the  par¬ 
ticiple  with  a  substantive: 

1.  ή  μένουσα  έλχίς,  the  abiding  hope 

2.  δ  άνθρωπος  δ  λέγων  ταϋτα,  the  man  saying  these 

things ,  (the  man  who  says  these  things). 

245.  Examine  carefully  the  following: 

1.  6  χιστεόων,  the  one  believing ,  he  who  believes 

2.  δ  γινώσκων,  the  one  knowing ,  he  who  knows 

3.  δ  άχουόμενος,  the  one  being.heard ,  he  who  is  heard 

4.  δ  χρινόμενος,  the  one  being  judged ,  he  who  is 

judged 

5.  δ  δεχόμενος,  the  one  receiving ,  he  who  receives 

6.  τό  έξερχόμενον,  the  thing  coming  out ,  that  which 

comes  out 

7.  δ  λυόμενος,  (Mid.),  the  one  loosing  (for)  himself 

8.  τά  μή  βλεχόμενα  μένει,  the  things  not  seen  abide 

The  article  and  participle  in  this  use  are  practically 
equivalent  to  a  relative  clause,  though  not  actually 
equivalent.  The  article  and  participle  may  be  in 
any  case:  e.g., 

9.  δ  κύριος  σώζει  τδν  χιστεύοντα  έν  αύτώ,  the  Lord 

saves  the  one  believing  (him  who  believes)  on 
Him. 

ΙΟ.  χιστεύομεν  έν  τφ  χέμχοντι  αυτόν,  we  believe  in  the 
one  sending  (him  who  sends)  him. 

These  examples  practically  cover  the  attributive 
use  of  the  participle. 


SECOND  AORIST  PARTICIPLE 


101 


246.  The  negative  used  with  the  participle  is  gen¬ 
erally  μή,  not. 

247.  Exercises 

I.  I.  6  μενών  έν  αύτώ  έχει  έλπίδα.  2.  ουτός  έστιν  6 
βαπτίζων  έν  πνεύματι  άγίψ.  3·  δ  γινώσκων  τον  θεόν  ακούει 
ήμών.  4·  δ  θεός  αγάπη  έστιν,  καί  6  μενών  έν  τή  αγάπη  έν 
τφ  θεφ  μένει  καί  ό  θεός  έν  αύτώ  μένει.  5·  άκούοντες 
έπίστευον  έν  τφ  έγείροντι  τούς  νεκρούς. 

II.  ι.  He  who  receives  us  receives  Him.  2.  Let 
us  believe  on  him  who  raises  the  dead.  3.  This  is. 
he  who  takes  away  the  sins  of  the  world.  4.  He  who 
has  grace  remains  in  hope.  5.  That  day  we  shall 
see  him  who  comes  in  the  name  of  the  Lord. 


LESSON  XXXI 

Participles:  The  Second  Aorist  Active  and  Middle 

248 .  V  OCABULARY 

άχοθανών,  second  aorist  active  participle  of  αποθνήσκω, 
βαλών,  second  aorist  active  participle  of  βάλλω, 
γενόμενος,  second  aorist  middle  participle  of  γίνομαι, 
είχών,  second  aorist  active  participle;  no  present 
stem;  λέγω  used  in  present, 
έλθών,  second  aorist  active  participle;  no  present 
stem;  έρχομαι  used  in  present, 
ίδών,  second  aorist  active  participle;  no  present 
stem;  όράω  used  in  present, 
λαβών,  second  aorist  active  participle  of  λαμβάνω. 

249.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  vocabulary  that  the 
second  aorist  active  and  middle  participles  of  the 


102 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


thematic  vowel  type  have  the  same  endings  as  the 
present  active  and  middle  participles,  -o^v  and  -μένος. 

250.  The  declension  of  λαβών,  -οΰσα,  -όν,  the  second 
aorist  active  participle  of  λαμβάνω,  is: 

Stem  λαβοντ- 
Singular 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

λαβών 

λαβοΰσα 

λαβόν 

Gen. 

λαβόντος 

λαβούσης 

λαβόντος 

Abl. 

λαβόντος 

λαβούσης 

λαβόντος 

Loc. 

λαβόντι 

λαβούση 

λαβόντι 

Ins. 

λαβόντι 

λαβούση 

λαβόντι 

Dat. 

λαβόντι 

λαβούση 

λαβόντι 

Acc. 

λαβόντα 

λαβοΰσαν 

Plural 

λαβόν 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

λαβόντες 

λαβοΰσαι 

λαβόντα 

Gen. 

λαβόντων 

λαβουσών 

λαβόντων 

Abl. 

λαβόντων 

λαβουσών 

λαβόντων 

Loc. 

λαβοΰσι 

λαβούσαις 

λαβοΰσι 

Ins. 

λαβοΰσι 

λαβούσαις 

λαβοΰσι 

Dat. 

λαβοΰσι 

λαβούσαις 

λαβοΰσι 

Acc. 

λαβόντας 

λαβοόσας 

λαβόντα 

251.  Observe:  I.  The  second  aorist  active  participle 
of  the  thematic  vowel  type  is  declined  like  the  present 
active  participle  in  -ων  (-οντ),  except  for  the  accent. 
2.  It  is  formed  on  the  second  aorist  stem,  and  has  no 
augment. 

252.  The  second  aorist  middle  participle  (λαβόμενος, 
-μένη,  -μενον)  is  declined  exactly  like  the  present 


USES  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE 


103 


middle  participle.  The  difference  in  form  lies  in  the 
stem:  λαβόμενος  (stem  λαβ-),  aorist  middle  participle; 
λαμβανόμενος  (stem  λαμβαν-),  present  middle  participle. 


253.  The  aorist  participle  is  used  attributively  with 
the  article,  as  is  the  present  participle  (244,  245). 
The  difference  in  meaning  is  that  the  present  ex¬ 
presses  durative  action  and  the  aorist,  punctiliar 
action. 

6  λαμβάνων,  the  one  receiving ,  he  who  receives 
δ  λαβών,  the  one  having  received ,  he  who  received 
δ  γινόμενος,  the  one  becoming ,  he  who  becomes 
δ  γενόμενος,  the  one  having  become ,  he  who  became 

254.  All  participles  may  be  used  in  the  predicate. 
Study  these  examples  carefully: 

I.  ε!πών  ταΰτα  οιχήλθεν, 


a.  Having  said  this 

b.  When  he  said  this 

c.  After  he  said  this 

d.  He  said  this  and 


he  went  away 


2.  ίδών  ταΰτα  έδόξαζε  τον  θεόν, 


a.  Seeing  this 

b.  When  he  saw  this 

c.  Because  he  saw  this 


he  was  glorifying  God 


3.  είπών  ταΰτα  απέρχεται, 

a.  Having  said  this 

b.  After  he  said  this 


he  goes  away 


4· 


παρέλαβον  αυτόν  ε(πόντα  ταΰτα, 


They  received  him  < 


when  he  said  this , 
after  he  said  this , 
because  he  said  this , 


a. 

b. 

c. 


104  ,  BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


-  now  I  see 


5-  τυφλός  ών  άρτι  βλέπω, 

a.  Being  blind 

b.  Whereas  I  was  blind 

6.  έρχομαι  ζητών  καρπόν, 

seeking  fruit ,  a. 


I  come 


to  seek  fruit ,  b. 


V 


they  were  announcing 


7.  πορευόμενοι  έκήρυσσον, 

a.  Advancing 

b.  As  they  were  advancing 

c.  While  they  were  advancing  v 

8.  ήλθον  ζητών  καρπόν, 

_  f  seeking  fruit,  a. 

I  came  λ  .  ,  ,  ·.  r 

to  seek  jrmt,  b. 

9.  όχολαβών  είχεν,  answering  (catching  up  in  speech) 

he  said. 


255.  From  the  examples  given  above  it  is  to  be 
observed  that: 

1.  The  action  of  the  present  participle  may  pre¬ 
cede  (antecedent,  Ex.  5),  coincide  with  (simul¬ 
taneous,  Ex.  7),  or  follow  (subsequent,  Ex.  8  and  6) 
the  action  of  the  principal  verb. 

2.  The  action  of  the  aorist  participle  may  be 
antecedent  to  (Ex.  1,  2  b,  c ,  3  and  4),  or  simul¬ 
taneous  with  (Ex.  2  a,  9),  that  of  the  principal  verb. 

The  aorist  participle  does  not  express  subsequent 
action,  although  it  may  be  used  proleptically. 

Whether  the  action  expressed  by  a  participle  is 
antecedent,  simultaneous,  or  subsequent  to  that  of 
the  principal  verb  must  be  determined  from  the 
context. 


USES  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE 


105 


256.  The  participles  in  the  examples  under  254  are 
varieties  of  what  is  called  the  circumstantial  par¬ 
ticiple.  The  circumstantial  participle  is  practically 
an  additional  statement  added  more  or  less  loosely 
to  the  verbal  notion  of  the  principal  verb.  It  may 
agree  with  the  subject  or  object  of  the  principal 
verb,  or  with  any  other  substantive  or  pronoun  in  the 
sentence  (see  254,  4).  The  participle  in  itself  does 
not  express  time,  manner,  cause,  purpose,  etc.,  as 
suggested  in  the  translation  of  the  examples  in  254. 
These  ideas  are  not  in  the  participle,  but  are  sug¬ 
gested  by  the  context. 

257.  Exercises 

I.  I.  βλέπει  τον  κύριον  έρχόμενον  πρδς  αυτόν  καί  λέγει 
αυτφ  Οδτός  έστιν  δ  α’ίρων  τάς  αμαρτίας  τού  κόσμου.  2.  ού 
τδ  είσερχόμενον  εις  τδ  στόμα  κοινοί  (defiles)  άνθρωπον  άλλα 
τδ  έξερχόμενον  έκ  τού  στόματος  τούτο  κοινοί  άνθρωπον.  3· 
πορευόμενοι  δέ  κηρύσσετε  λέγοντες  δτι  δ  κύριος  σώζει  τούς 
πιστεύοντας  έν  αυτω.  4·  ταΰτα  γράφω  υμΐν  περί  των  μή 
^δεχόμενων  έμέ.  5·  έλθών  ούν  δ  ’Ιησούς  εύρεν  αυτόν. 

II.  ι.  He  rejoices,  saying  that  he  saw  the  spirit 
coming  upon  (έπί)1  him.  2.  We  saw  him  while  he 
was  teaching  in  the  temple.  3.  The  Lord  said  to 
those  who  were  coming  to  him  that  God  hears 
those  believing  on  Him.  4.  When  he  saw  the  child 
he  went  away.  5.  Not  having  received  the  promises 
they  died. 

ilxl  (!<p’  before  rough  breathing),  prep.  (orig.  meaning  upon)  with 
gen.,  upon,  at,  by;  with  loc.,  upon,  on,  over;  with  acc.,  upon,  over. 


106 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XXXII 

Third  Declension  (Continued):  Mutes  and  Liquids 

268.  Vocabulary 

αιών,  -ώνος,  δ,  age  (space  of  time),  world 

άμχελών,  -ώνος,  6,  vineyard 

ήγεμών,  -όνος,  δ,  leader ,  governor 

μάστιξ,  -ιγος,  ή,  whip ,  scourge ,  plague 

χοιμήν,  -ένος,  δ,  shepherd 

σαρξ,  σαρκός,  ή,  flesh 

σάλχιγξ,  -ιγγος,  ή,  trumpet 

σωτήρ,  -ήρος,  δ,  saviour 

χείρ,  χειρός,  ή,  hand 

259.  The  declension  of  σαρξ  and  μάστιξ: 


Stem 

σαρκ- 

Stem 

μαστιγ- 

Singular 

Nom. 

σάρξ 

Nom. 

μάστιξ 

Gen. 

σαρκός 

Gen. 

μάστιγος 

Abl. 

σαρκός 

Abl. 

μάστιγος 

Loc. 

σαρκ( 

Loc. 

μάστιγι 

Ins. 

σαρκ( 

Ins. 

μάστιγι 

Dat. 

σαρκί 

Dat. 

μάστιγι 

Acc. 

σάρκα 

Acc. 

μάστιγα 

Plural 

Nom. 

σάρκες 

Nom. 

μάστιγες 

Gen. 

σαρκών 

Gen. 

μαστίγων 

Abl. 

σαρκών 

Abl. 

μαστίγων 

Loc. 

σαρξί 

Loc. 

μάστιξι 

Ins. 

σαρξί 

Ins. 

μάστιξι 

Dat. 

σαρξί 

Dat. 

μάστιξι 

Acc. 

σάρκας 

Acc. 

μάστιγας 

THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  107 


260.  Observe:  I.  The  stems  of  σαρξ  and  μάστιξ  end 

in  palatal  mutes  (217,  2).  2.  The  nominative  sing,  is 
formed  by  adding  ς  to  the  stem.  For  the  changes 
that  occur  with  ς  and  a  palatal  mute,  see  218.  3.  The 

accent  of  σαρξ  is  according  to  the  rule  stated  in  226. 

261.  A  few  substantives  with  stems  in  a  labial  mute 
(x  or  β)  occur  in  the  New  Testament.  (The  nom. 
is  formed  by  adding  ς  to  the  stem  and  then  ends  in 
-ψ,  see  218). 

Examples:  λίψ,  λιβός,  δ,  the  S.  W.  wind 

σκόλοψ,  -οχος,  δ,  a  stake ,  a  thorn 

262.  The  declension  of  αιών,  ήγεμών,  and  χοιμήν: 


Stem 

αίων- 

STEM  ήγεμον- 
Singular 

Stem  χοιμεν· 

Nom 

αιών 

ήγεμών 

χοιμήν 

Gen. 

αιώνος 

ήγεμόνος 

χοιμένος 

Abl. 

αιώνος 

ήγεμόνος 

χοιμένος 

Loc. 

αίώνι 

ήγεμόνι 

χοιμένι 

Ins. 

αίώνι 

ήγεμόνι 

χοιμένι 

Dat. 

αιώνι 

ήγεμόνι 

χοιμένι 

Ace. 

αιώνα 

ήγεμόνα 

Plural 

χοιμένα 

Nom. 

αιώνες 

ήγεμόνες 

χοιμένες 

Gen. 

αιώνων 

ήγεμόνων 

χοιμένων 

Abl. 

αιώνων 

ήγεμόνων 

χοιμένων 

Loc. 

αιώσι 

ήγεμόσι 

χοιμέσι 

Ins. 

αιώσι 

ήγεμόσι 

χοιμέσι 

Dat. 

αιώσι 

ήγεμόσι 

χοιμέσι 

Ace. 

αιώνας 

ήγεμόνας 

χοιμένας 

Stems 

in  -ν  are 

sometimes  called  nasal  stems. 

108 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


263.  Observe:  I.  The  nominative  is  formed  from 
the  mere  stem.  In  the  case  of  οκών  the  stem  vowel 
is  unchanged;  in  the  case  of  ήγεμών  and  ποιμήν  the 
short  stem  vowel  is  lengthened  (formative  lengthen¬ 
ing),  o  to  ω,  and  ε  to  η.  2.  In  the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat. 
plural  the  -v-  of  the  stem  drops  out,  without  any 
change  in  the  stem  vowel. 

264.  The  declension  of  σωτήρ: 


STEM  σωτηρ 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

σωτήρ 

σωτήρες 

Gen. 

σωτήρος 

σωτή  ρων 

Abl. 

σωτήρος 

σωτή  ρων 

Loc. 

σωτήρι 

σωτή  pat 

Ins. 

σωτήρ t 

σωτή  pat 

Dat. 

σωτήρ  ι 

σωτή  pat 

Acc. 

σωτή  ρα 

σωτήρας 

Observe :  I . 

The  nominative  is 

made  from 

stem  without  any  change.  2.  In  the  loc.,  ins.,  and 
dat.  plural  the  ending  -at  is  added  to  the  stem  with¬ 
out  any  change  of  the  stem  vowel  or  consonant. 

a.  χειρ,  gen.  χεερός,  is  declined  regularly  except  in 
the  loc.  inst.,  and  dat.  plur.,  which  have  χερσί. 

The  real  stem  of  χείρ  is  χέρα-. 

265.  A  circumstantial  participle  (generally  present 
or  aorist)  may  be  used  in  the  genitive1  case  to  agree 
with  a  substantive  or  pronoun  in  a  construction 
grammatically  independent  of  the  rest  of  the  sen- 

1  In  fact  the  case  may  be  either  genitive  or  ablative. 


THE  GENITIVE  ABSOLUTE 


109 


tence.  This  construction  is  called  the  genitive 
absolute.  Thus : 


ταύτα  είχόντων  τών  μαθητών  οί  δούλοι  ήλθον  εις  τδν  οίκον, 
the  disciples  having  said  this  1  the  servants  went 

after  (or  when)  the  disciples  said  this  J  into  the  house 

γενομένης  ημέρας  οί  ποιμένες  άχήλθον, 

day  having  come  )  ,,  ,  , 

1Ί  r  Ihe  shepherds  went  away 

when  day  came 

αύτοΰ  λέγοντος  ταΰτα  οί  δούλοι  άχήλθον,  while  he  was 
saying  this  the  servants  departed 


a.  The  genitive  absolute  is  found  also  when  the 
participle  could  have  agreed  with  some  substantive  or 
pronoun  in  the  sentence,  h.  Sometimes  the  genitive 
absolute  is  used  without  a  substantive  or  pronoun — 
the  participle  alone. 


266.  Exercises 

I.  I.  δ  λόγος  σαρξ  έγένετο.  2.  ’ιδετε  (behold)  τάς 
χεΤράς  μου  καί  χόδας  μου  ότι  έγώ  είμι  αυτός.  3·  δ  έσθίων 
έκ  τούτου  τού  άρτου  ζήσει  εις  τον  αιώνα.1  φ  τ°ΰ  όχλου 
άχελθόντος  δ  δούλος  ερχεται  εις  τδν  οίκον  τού  χοιμένος.  5· 
οί  ποιμένες  είδον  τους  αποστόλους  κηρύσσοντας  τδν  σωτήρα. 

II.  ι.  Truth  abides  forever.  2.  Behold  his  hands 
and  feet.  3.  I  write  these  (things)  with  my  hand. 

4.  The  Saviour  having  departed,  the  crowd  said  this. 

5.  While  he  was  going  away  he  saw  an  angel. 

1  βίς  τον  αιώνα,  {into  the  age),  forever . 


110 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XXXIII 

Third  Declension  (Continued) :  Liquid  Stems  in  -ερ 
(Syncopated).  The  Relative  Pronoun 

267.  Vocabulary 

άνήρ,  άνδρός,  δ,  man  μήτηρ,  -τρός,  ή,  mother 

θιιγάτηρ,  -τρός,  ή,  daughter  πατήρ,  -τρός,  δ,  father 

8ς,  ή,  δ,  relative  pronoun,  who ,  which ,  that ,  what 

268.  The  declension  of  πατήρ  and  άνήρ: 


Stem 

πατερ- 

Singular 

Stem 

άνερ- 

Nom. 

πατήρ 

Ncm. 

ο«νήρ 

Gen. 

πατρός 

Gen. 

άνδρός 

Abl. 

πατρός 

Abl. 

άνδρός 

Loc. 

πατρί 

Loc. 

άνδρί 

Ins. 

πατρί 

Ins. 

άνδρΐ 

Dat. 

πατρί 

Dat. 

άνδρΐ 

Acc. 

πατέρα 

Acc. 

ά'νδρα 

Voc. 

πάτερ 

Plural 

Voc. 

άνερ 

N.  V. 

πατέρες 

N.  V 

άνδρες 

Gen. 

πατέρων 

Gen. 

άνδρών 

Abl. 

πατέρων 

Abl. 

άνδρών 

Loc. 

πατράσι 

Loc. 

άνδράσι 

Ins. 

πατράσι 

Ins. 

άνδράσί 

Dat. 

πατράσε 

Dat. 

άνδράσι 

Acc. 

πατέρας 

Acc. 

ανδρας 

269.  Observe: 
simple  stem; 


i.  The  nom.  is  formed  from  the 
and  the  short  vowel  ε  is  lengthened 


(formative  lengthening)  to  η. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUN 


111 


2.  Owing  to  the  effect  of  the  accent  in  the  loc. ,  ins., 
and  dat.  sing,  of  πατήρ  the  vowel  ε  of  the  stem  is 
suppressed;  and  at  the  same  time  in  the  loc.,  ins., 
and  dat.  plural  a  is  developed  after  p  to  facilitate 
pronunciation  (also  in  άνδράσ^1). 

3.  In  άνήρ,  when  ε  is  suppressed,  there  is  inserted 
sympathetically  the  consonant  δ  for  the  sake  of 
euphony. 

4.  The  voc.  sing,  is  the  simple  stem,  and  has  reces¬ 
sive  accent. 

270.  μήτηρ,  mother ,  and  θυγάτηρ,  daughter ,  are  de¬ 
clined  like  πατήρ.  The  vocative  of  θυγάτηρ  is  θύγατερ. 
No  voc.  of  μήτηρ  occurs  in  the  New  Testament. 

271.  The  declension  of  the  relative  pronoun  δς,  ή,  δ 


is: 

Singular 

Plural J 

Masc. 

Fem.  Neut. 

Masc.  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

ος 

V 

η 

δ 

0  X 

αΤ 

ά 

Gen. 

ou 

ής 

ou 

ών 

ών 

ών 

Abl. 

ou 

ής 

οδ 

ών 

ών 

ών 

Loc. 

Φ 

r 

TQ 

Φ 

οίς 

αίζ 

οίς 

Ins. 

Φ 

r 

TQ 

Φ 

οίς 

αίς 

οίς 

Dat. 

Φ 

ή 

Φ 

οίς 

αίς 

οίς 

Acc. 

δν 

V 

ην 

V 

0 

ους 

V 

ας 

α 

It  will  be  noticed  that  this  pronoun  is  declined  in 
the  first  and  second  declensions.  Observe  that  every 
form  has  the  rough  breathing  (*)  and  an  accent. 

272.  The  relative  pronoun  generally  agrees  with  its 
antecedent  in  gender  and  number;  but  it  may  have 


1  -pa-  actually  represent  the  vocalic  sound  of  p. 


m 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


its  own  case  in  its  clause,  or  it  may  be  attracted  to 
the  case  of  its  antecedent. 

EXAMPLES:  έπίστευεν  δ  άνθρωπος  τω  λόγω  όν  είπεν  αύτω 
δ  ’Ιησούς,  the  man  was  believing  the  word  that 
Jesus  spoke  to  him. 

τα  ρήματα  α  εγώ  είπον  υμΐν  πνεύμα  έστιν  καί  ζωή  έστιν, 
the  words  which  I  spoke  to  you  are  spirit  and  are 
life. 

μένετε  έν  αύτω  δς  έστιν  δ  σωτήρ  τού  κόσμου,  you  are  abid¬ 
ing  in  him  who  is  the  Saviour  of  the  world. 

273.  Usually  the  attraction  of  the  relative  to  the 
case  of  the  antecedent  is  from  the  accusative  (in 
which  it  naturally  would  be  in  its  own  clause)  to 
some  other  oblique  case: 

μνημονεύετε1  τού  λόγου  ού  έγώ  είπον  υμΐν,  remember  the 
word  that  I  said  to  you. 

Here  ou  has  been  attracted  to  the  case  of  λόγου. 
In  its  own  clause  it  naturally  would  be  in  the  accusa¬ 
tive. 

274.  Often  the  relative  has  no  antecedent  expressed: 

μή  γινώσκοντες  ο  λέγει  απέρχονται,  not  knowing  what 
(, that  which)  he  says  they  go  away. 

δς  δέχεται  με  δέχεται  υμάς,  he  who  receives  me  receives 
you. 

275.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ή  έντολή  έστιν  δ  λόγος  δν  ακούετε.  2.  άνδρα  ού 
γινώσκω.  3·  ελεγον  ούν  αύτφ  Πού  έστιν  δ  πατήρ  σου;  φ 

1  μνημονεύω,  to  remember,  with  genitive.  2  χοϋ,  where . 


THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  1 13 


έκείνη  τη  ήμέρ$  εν  τώ  όνόματί  μου  αίτήσεσθε,  καί  ου  λέγω 
ύμΐν  δτι  έγώ  έρωτήσω  τον  πατέρα  περί  υμών.  5·  °  ακούετε 
απ’  αρχής  γινώσκετε.  6.  χάριτι  δέ  του  θεού  είμι  δ  είμι. 
7·  ουτός  έστιν  υπέρ  ου  ειπον. 

II.  I.  The  hope  which  we  have  is  eternal.  2.  This 
is  my  father  and  my  mother.  3.  We  believe  in  him 
who  died  for  us.  4.  He  shall  ask  the  father  con¬ 
cerning  us.  5.  This  is  the  daughter  concerning 
whom  I  spoke. 


LESSON  XXXIV 


Third  Declension  (Continued):  Stems  in  1 
The  Interrogative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns 

276.  Vocabulary 


άνάστασις,  -εως,  ή, 
άφεσις,  -εως,  ή, 
γνώσις,  -εως,  ή, 
δύναμις,  -εως,  ή, 
θλίψις,  -εως,  ή, 
κρίσις,  -εως,  ή, 
κτίσις,  -εως,  ή, 


resurrection 
remission ,  forgiveness 
knowledge 
power 

tribulation ,  distress 
judgment 


creation 
παράκλησής,  -εως,  ή,  exhortation 
πίστις,  -εως,  ή,  faith 

πόλις,  -εως,  ή,  city 

τις,  τί,  interrogative  pronoun,  who ,  which ,  what? 
τις,  τι,  indefinite  pronoun,  onef  a  certain  one .  a  certain 
thing;  some  one ,  something. 
που,  interrogative  adverb,  where? 


114 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


277.  The  declension  of  πόλις  is: 

Stem  πολι-  (πολει-) 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

πόλις 

πόλεις 

Gen. 

πόλεως 

πόλεων 

Abl. 

πόλεως 

πόλεων 

Loc. 

πόλει 

πόλεσι 

Ins. 

πόλει 

πόλεσι 

Dat. 

πόλει 

πόλεσι 

Acc. 

πόλιν 

πόλεις 

The  voc.  sing,  πόλι  does  not  occur  in  the  New 
Testament. 

278.  Observe:  I.  In  the  nom.  and  acc.  sing,  the 
stem  is  πολι-.  2.  In  the  other  cases  the  stem  is  πολει 
(t  is  here  a  semi-vowel).  3.  πόλεως  and  πόλεων  of 
the  gen.  and  abl.  are  for  πολε(ι)ως  and  πολε(ι)ων. 
ε  here  preserves  the  semivowel  sound  of  t  which  is 
dropped.  Note  the  apparent  exception  to  rule  of 
accent,  that  the  accent  cannot  stand  on  antepenult 
when  the  ultima  is  long,  -ως  is  lengthened  from  -ος. 
4.  In  the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing,  πόλει  is  for  πόλε(ι)ι; 
t  of  the  case  ending  and  ε  contract,  ε  +  1  =  ει  (diph¬ 
thong).  5.  In  acc.  sing,  -v  is  the  case  ending,  not  -a. 
6.  The  nom.  plural  πόλεις  is  for  πολε(ε)ες;  ε+ε  con¬ 
tract  tc  ει  (diphthong).  7.  The  acc.  plural  (old 
form  πόλεας)  is  assimilated  to  the  nominative. 

279.  Like  πόλις  are  declined  all  substantives  (not 
having  accent  on  ultima)  in  -σις,  -ξις,  -ψις.  They 
are  mainly  abstract  substantives  of  the  feminine 
gender. 


INTERROGATIVE  AND  INDEF.  PRONOUNS  115 


280.  The  declension  of  the  interrogative  pronoun 
τίς,  τί  is: 


Singular 

Plural 

Masc.and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

τίς 

τί 

τίνες 

τίνα 

Gen. 

τίνος 

τίνος 

τίνων 

τίνων 

Abl. 

τίνος 

τίνος 

τίνων 

τίνων 

Loc. 

τίνι 

τίνι 

τίσι 

τίσι 

Ins. 

τίνι 

τίνι 

τίσι 

τίσι 

Dat. 

τίνι 

τίνι 

τίσι 

τίσι 

Acc. 

τίνα 

τί 

τίνας 

τίνα 

a.  Note  that  this  pronoun  is  declined  in 

the  third 

declension;  the  masculine  and  feminine  genders  are 
alike;  the  neuter  differs  from  the  masculine  and 
feminine  only  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  b.  The  inter¬ 
rogative  pronoun  has  the  acute  accent  on  the  first 
syllable;  it  is  never  changed  to  the  grave. 

281.  The  declension  of  the  indefinite  pronoun  τις,  τί 
is: 


Singular 

Plural 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

τις 

τί 

τινές 

τινά 

Gen. 

τινός 

τινός 

τινών 

τινών 

Abl. 

τινός 

τινός 

τινών 

τινών 

Loc. 

τινί 

τινί 

τισΓ 

τισί 

Ins. 

τινί 

τινί 

τισί 

τισί 

Dat. 

τινί 

τινί 

τισί 

τισί 

Acc. 

τινά 

τί 

τινάς 

τινά 

Note  that  the  indefinite  pronoun  is  declined  like 
the  interrogative,  except  that  the  accent  is  placed  on 


116 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


the  ultima  because  it  is  an  enclitic  and  loses  or  retains 
its  accent  according  to  the  principles  given  in  138. 

282.  Examine  carefully  the  following  examples  of 
the  use  of  the  interrogative  pronoun: 

1.  σί>  τις  εΐ;  who  art  thou? 

2.  τίνα  μισθόν  έχετε;  what  pay  (reward)  have  you ? 

3.  τίς  έστιν  δ  άνθρωπος  ουτος;  who  is  this  man? 

4.  τίνα  ζητείτε;  whom  are  you  seeking? 

5.  τί  ποιήσω;  what  shall  I  do? 

6.  γινώσκετε  τίς  έστιν  δ  άνήρ,  you  know  who  the  man  is. 

Note:  1.  The  interrogative  τίς  is  used  as  a  sub¬ 
stantive  (1,  3  and  4)  or  as  an  adjective  (2).  2.  It 

is  used  in  both  direct  (1-5)  and  indirect  (6)  questions. 

283.  The  neuter  accusative  τί  is  frequently  used 
adverbially  in  the  sense  of  “why.” 

τί  με  λέγεις  αγαθόν;  why  do  you  call  me  good? 

284.  In  indirect  questions  the  same  mode  and  tense 
is  generally  found  as  in  the  direct;  and  the  same 
interrogative  words: 

είδε  πού  μένετε,  he  saw  where  y ou  are  staying. 
έγίνωσκε  τί  έστιν  έν  άνθρώπω,  he  knew  what  is  in  man. 

285.  Study  carefully  the  following  examples  of  the 
use  of  the  indefinite  pronoun: 

I.  είπέν  τις  αυτφ,  one  (a  certain  man) 

said  to  him. 

2  τινές  δέ  έξ  αυτών  εΤπον,  some  (certain  ones)  oj 

them  said. 

he  went  into  a  certain 
village. 


3.  είσήλθεν  είς  κώμην  τινά, 


THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  117 


4.  άνθρωχός  τις  είχεν  δύο  υιούς,  a  certain  man  had  two 

sons. 

Note  that  the  indefinite  τις  is  used  as  a  substantive 
(1  and  2),  or  as  an  adjective  (3  and  4). 

286.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τι  θέλετε  χοιήσω  ύμίν;  2.  ή  χίστις  σου  σώζει  σε. 
3·  αλλά  είσίν  έξ  υμών  τινές  ο”  ου  χιστεύουσιν.  4·  τΤ) 
δυνάμει  του  χνεύματος  εις  Γαλιλαίαν  εισέρχεται.  5·  είδομέν 
τινα  έν  τφ  όνόματί  σου  έκβάλλοντα  δαιμόνια.  6.  γράψω  έχ’ 
αύτδν  τδ  δνομα  του  θεού  μου  καί  τδ  δνομα  τής  χόλεως  τού 
θεού  μου. 

II.  ι.  What  shall  we  say?  2.  Ye  have  power  to 
become  the  children  of  God.  3.  In  a  certain  city  he 
was  preaching  the  word.  4.  A  certain  man  said, 
“Lord,  I  will  follow  thee.”  5.  Why  are  you  going 
away?  6.  The  faith  which  we  have  saves  men. 


LESSON  XXXV 


Third  Declension  (Continued):  Stems  in  -ευ  (ef)  and  -εσ. 


287. 


Vocabulary 


άρχιερεύς,  -έως,  δ,  chief 

priest 

βασιλεύς,  -έως,  δ,  king 

γραμματεύς,  -έως,  δ,  scribe 

ίερεύς,  -έως,  δ,  priest 

γένος,  -ους,  τό,  race 

έθνος,  -ους,  τό,  nation 

έθος,  -ους,  τό,  custom 


έλεος,  -ους,  τό,  pity ,  mercy 
έτος,  -ους,  τό,  year 
μέλος,  -ους,  τό,  member 
μέρος,  -ους,  τό,  part 
χλήθος,  -ους,  τό,  crowd , 

midtitude 

σκότος,  -ους,  τό,  darkness 
τέλος ,  -ους,  τό,  end 


118 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


288.  The  declension  of  βασιλεύς  is: 


Stem 

βασιλευ(/0-  1 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

βασιλεύς 

Ν.  V.  βασιλείς 

Gen. 

βασιλέως 

βασιλέων 

Abl. 

βασιλέως 

βασιλέων 

Loc. 

βασιλει 

βασιλεΰσι 

Ins. 

βασιλει 

βασιλεΰσι 

Dat. 

βασιλει 

βασιλεΰσι 

Acc. 

βασιλέα 

βασιλείς 

Voc. 

βασιλεύ 

Observe:  1. 

The  final 

υ  (f)  of  the  stem  is  dropped 

when  it  would  come  between  two  vowels;  it  is 
retained  when  final  (vocative)  or  followed  by  a  con¬ 
sonant  (nom.  sing.;  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  plur.).  2.  In 
the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing.,  and  in  the  nom.  and 
acc.  plural  contraction  takes  place.  3.  In  the  acc. 
sing,  -a  is  the  case  ending  and  not  -v.  The  acc. 
plural  has  been  assimilated  to  the  nominative.  Com¬ 
pare  βασιλεύς  with  πόλις. 


289.  All  substantives  with  nom.  sing,  in  -εύς  are 
masculine,  and  are  declined  like  βασιλεύς. 

290.  The  declension  of  γένος  is: 


STEM  γενεσ- 


Singnlar 

Nom.  γένος 
Gen.  γένους 
Abl.  γένους 


Plural 

γένη 

γενών  (γενέων) 
γενών  (γενέων) 


1  f,  vau,  called  also  digamma,  an  old  letter  standing  in  the  alpha¬ 
bet  after  ε,  and  pronounced  like  w.  Its  presence  as  a  semi-vowel 
is  often  shown  by  u. 


THIRD  DECLENSION  —  CONTINUED  119 


Loc.  γένεε 

Ins.  γένεε 

Dat.  γένεε 

Acc.  γένος 


γένεσε 

γένεσε 

γένεσε 

γένη 


Observe:  ι.  The  nom.  (and  acc.)  is  the  stem  with 
vowel  s  strengthened  to  o.  2.  In  all  other  cases  the 
σ  of  the  stem  is  dropped,  and  contraction  of  the  con¬ 
current  vowels  takes  place. 

a.  In  the  gen.  and  abl.  sing,  γένους  came  from 
γένεσος;  σ  dropped  out,  ε  -f-  o  contracted  to  ou.  b.  In 
the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing,  γένεε  came  from  γένεσε; 
σ  dropped  out,  ε  +  ε  contracted  to  -εε.  c.  The  nom. 
and  acc.  plural  γένη  came  from  γένεσα;  σ  dropped  out, 
ε  a  contracted  to  η.  d.  In  {he  gen.  and  abl. 
plural  γενών  (γενέων)  came  from  γενέσων;  σ  dropped 
out,  ε  +  ω  contracted  to  ω,  or  remained  uncontracted 
as  γενεών,  β.  The  accent  of  the  contracted  gen. 
and  abl.  plural  is  a  circumflex  over  the  ultima. 

291.  Like  γένος  are  declined  all  neuters  with  nom. 
sing,  in  -ος  (stem  -εσ). 

292.  Exercises 

I.  I.  σύ  εε  6  βασελεύς  των  Τουδαεων.  2.  ο?  βασελεες 
των  έθνών  κυρεεύουσεν  1  αυτών.  3·  άλλ’  ουχω2τδ  τέλος 
έστίν.  4·  εμελλεν  ’Ιησούς  άχοθνήσκεεν  υχέρ  του  έθνους, 
καί  ουχ  υχέρ  τού  έθνους  μόνον.*  5·  0Ι^κ  εχεες  μέρος  μετ’ 
έμού.  6.  οε  άρχεερείς  είχον  Ουκ  έχομεν  βασελέα. 

II.  I.  The  multitude  will  follow  him.  2.  That 
one  is  not  king  of  this  world.  3.  This  is  the  gospel 

1  κυριεύω,  to  be  lord  of,  or  to  rule  (over),  with  the  genitive. 

2  ουπω,  not  yet. 

8  μόνον,  adv..  onlu. 


120 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


which  I  proclaim  among  (έν)  the  nations.  4.  You 
have  a  part  in  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  5.  The 
scribes  and  priests  have  not  mercy. 


LESSON  XXXVI 


First  Aorist  Indicative  Active  and  Middle 

293.  Vocabulary 

αγιάζω,  I  sanctify  καθαρίζω,  I  purify 

βασιλεύω,  I  reign ,  I  am  king  καταλύω,  I  destroy 
θεάομαι,  I  behold  τυφλόω,  I  make  blind,  blind 

294.  The  second  aorist  tense  (178)  is  older  than 
the  first  aorist.  As  tense  the  first  aorist  is  not  a  dif¬ 
ferent  tense  from  the  second  aorist.  The  second  and 
first  aorists  are  just  two  different  forms  of  the  same 
tense. 


295.  The  first  aorist  indicative  active  of  λύω  is: 


Stem  λυσ(α)- 

Singular 

1.  έλυσα,  I  loosed , 

2.  ελυσας  etc. 

3.  ελυσε 


Plural 

1.  έλύσαμεν 

2.  έλύσατε 
3·  έλυσαν 


First  aorist  active  infinitive,  λύσαι 

For  translation  of  the  aorist,  see  187. 

296.  On  the  formation  of  the  first  aorist  it  is  to  be 
observed : 

1 .  The  first  aorist  stem  is  formed  by  adding  -σα  to 
the  verb  stem. 

2.  The  secondary  active  personal  endings  (see  66) 


FIRST  AORIST  INDICATIVE 


121 


are  used.  But  -v  is  not  used  in  the  first  singular; 
and  -e  of  the  third  sing,  seemingly  takes  the  place 
of  a. 

3.  In  the  indicative  there  is  an  augment  as  in  the 
second  aorist  (182.  3,  and  70). 

4.  The  infinitive  ending  is  -at ;  the  accent  is  on  the 
penult. 

297.  The  first  aorist  indicative  middle  of  λύω  is: 


Singular 

1.  έλυσάμην  I  loosed 

2.  έλύσω  ( for )  myself , 

3.  έλύσατο  etc. 


Plural 

1.  έλυσάμεθα 

2.  έλύσασθε 

3.  έλύσαντο 


First  aorist  middle  infinitive,  λύσασθαι 
a.  The  second  pers.  sing,  έλύσω  came  from  έλύσασο; 
σ  dropped  out,  and  the  concurrent  vowels  a  and  0 
contracted  to  ω. 


298.  Observe:  1.  That  the  secondary  middle  end¬ 
ings  (see  80)  are  added  directly  to  the  theme  λυσα-. 

2.  The  middle  infinitive  ending  -σθαι  is  added  to 
the  theme  λυσα-. 


299.  The  same  principles  of  augment  are  found  in 
the  first  aorist  indicative  as  in  the  second  aorist 
(182.  3)  and  imperfect  (70). 

300.  The  form  έλύσατο  may  be  analyzed  thus:  έ-λύ- 
σα-το;  έ  is  the  augment;  λυ-  is  the  verb-stem,  σα  is 
the  tense  suffix;  λυσ(α)  is  the  tense  stem,  λυσα  is  the 
tense  theme,  and  το  is  the  secondary  middle  per¬ 
sonal  ending  of  the  third  person.  Analyze  the  active 
έλύσατε. 

For  the  meaning  of  the  aorist  middle  see  Lesson 
XXIV,  and  52. 


122 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


301.  Verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  vowel  (except 
a,  ε,  o)  regularly  form  the  first  aorist  (if  they  have  a 
first  aorist)  like  λύω. 

Thus:  κωλύο),  I  hinder — first  aorist  έκώλυσα. 

πιστεύω,  I  believe — first  aorist  έπίστευσα. 

302.  Generally,  verbs  that  have  a  first  aorist  do  not 
have  a  second  aorist;  and  verbs  that  have  a  second 
aorist  do  not  have  a  first  aorist. 

a.  A  few  verbs  have  both  aorists.  When  they  occur, 
the  first  aorist  is  usually  transitive  and  the  second 
aorist  intransitive. 

In  the  New  Testament  it  is  common  for  a  second 
aorist  stem  to  have  a  of  the  first  aorist:  thus  είδα,  ' 
είδας,  ε’ίδαμεν,  etc.;  είπα,  etc. 

303.  i.  Verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  short  vowel 
α,  ε,  or  o,  form  the  first  aorist  by  lengthening  the 
vowel  before  the  tense  suffix  σα  (as  in  the  future 
before  σ%,  215): 

a  is  lengthened  to  η  (except  after  ε,  i,  or  p,  when 
ε  is  lengthened  to  η  it  is  lengthened  to  a.) 

0  is  lengthened  to  ω. 

Thus: 

αγαπάω,  I  love ,  first  aorist  ήγάπησα. 

ποιέω,  I  do,  make ,  first  aorist  έποίησα. 
πληρόω,  I  fill ,  first  aorist  έπλήρωσα. 

Active  infinitives,  άγαπήσαι,  ποιήσαι,  πληρώσαι. 

2.  But  a  few  verbs  like  καλέω,  I  call,  and  τελέω, 
I  end,  I  complete,  do  not  lengthen  ε  before  the  aorist 
tense  suffix.  Thus: 

καλέω,  I  call,  first  aorist  έκάλεσα 
τελέω,  I  finish ,  first  aorist  έτέλεσα 


FIRST  AORIST  INDICATIVE 


123 


3.  Verb  stems  with  endings  in  mutes  make  the 
same  changes  with  σ  of  -σα  to  form  the  aorist,  as 
was  made  with  σ  of  the  future,  215-16-17. 


Thus :  Labial  (χβφ) :  χέμχω,  aorist  εχεμψα 

γράφω,  aorist  έγραψα 

Palatal  (κγχ) :  διώκω,  aorist  έδιωξα 

διαλέγω,  aorist  διέλεξα 

Lingual  (τδθ):  σώζω  (σωδ-),  aorist  έσωσα 

χείθω,  aorist  έχεισα 


304.  There  is  no  difference  in  meaning  between  a 
first  aorist  and  a  second  aorist.  Both  express  punc- 
tiliar  action — point  action.  See  178-179. 

305.  There  were  originally  two  verb-types,  the  one 
denoting  durative  or  linear  action,  the  other  momen¬ 
tary,  or  punctiliar  action.  Thus  in  έσθίω  the  verb- 
stem  is  durative  or  linear,  and  in  εφαγον  the  verb- 
stem  is  punctiliar.  So  in  English  “blink  the  eye” 
is  a  different  kind  of  action  from  “live  a  life.” 
In  Greek  this  matter  of  the  “kind  of  action”  in  the 
verb-stem  (or  root),  called  Aktionsart,  applies  to  all 
verbs.  This  “kind  of  action”  of  the  verb-stem  itself 
was  before  there  was  any  idea  of  the  later  tense 
development. 

The  aorist  tense  at  first  was  used  with  verb-stems 
of  punctiliar  sense.  The  verb-stem  itself  may  accent 
the  beginning  of  the  action,  the  end  of  the  action, 
or  the  action  as  a  whole.  The  aorist  tense  itself 
always  means  point -action  (punctiliar  action).  But 
the  individual  verb-stem  meaning  may  deflect  the 
punctiliar  action  to  the  beginning  or  to  the  end. 
Consequently,  in  the  aorist  the  tense  idea  is  to  be 


124 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


combined  with  the  verb-stem  meaning.  Thus  in 
punctiliar  action  three  distinctions  arise:  (i)  the 
unmodified  point-action,  called  constative;  (2)  the 
point  action  with  the  stress  on  the  beginning  of  the 
action,  called  ingressive ;  (3)  the  point-action  with  the 
stress  on  the  conclusion  or  end  of  the  action,  called 
effective.  Thus: 

έκ  του  πληρώματος  αύτοΰ  ήμεΐς  έλάβομεν,  of  his  fulness 
we  received.  (Effective.) 

6  λόγος  σαρξ  έγένετο,  the  word  became  flesh.  (Ingressive.) 
έσκήνωσεν  έν  ήμΐν,  he  dwelt  among  us.  (Constative.) 

Sometimes  the  same  word  can  be  used  for  each  of 
these  ideas;  as  βάλει  v  may  mean  “throw”  (consta¬ 
tive),  or  “let  fly”  (ingressive),  or  “hit”  (effective). 

306.  The  aorist  tense,  although  at  first  it  was  con¬ 
fined  to  verbs  of  punctiliar  action,  came  gradually 
to  be  made  on  verbs  of  durative  action.  (So  also 
verbs  of  durative  action  came  to  have  the  tenses  of 
punctiliar  action.)  Thus  the  tenses  came  to  be 
used  for  the  expression  of  the  idea  that  once  belonged 
only  to  the  verb-stem  (or  root).  That  is,  the  aorist 
tense  imposed  a  punctiliar  idea  on  a  durative  verb- 
stem.  (So  also  the  present  tense  imposed  a  durative 
idea  on  a  punctiliar  verb-stem.)  Thus  the  aorist 
just  treats  as  punctiliar  an  act  which  is  not  in  itself 
point-action.  This  is  the  advance  that  the  tense 
makes  on  the  verb-stem  (or  root).  So  all  aorists  are 
punctiliar,  in  fact  or  statement. 

307.  Of  course  the  “kind  of  action”  of  the  tense 
(punctiliar)  and  the  “kind  of  action”  of  the  verb- 


FIRST  AORIST  SUBJUNCTIVE 


125 


stem  (Aktionsart)  run  through  the  whole  tense 
(modes,  infinitive,  and  participle). 

308.  What  was  said  in  Lessons  XXIV  and  XXV 
about  the  meaning  of  the  second  aorist  applies  also 
to  the  first  aorist;  and  what  is  said  in  this  lesson 
applies  to  the  second  aorist.  Review  the  meaning 
of  the  modes. 

309.  Exercises 

I.  I.  είς  τούτο  γάρ  Χρίστος  άχέθανεν  καί  έζησεν.  2.  ούκ 

ήλθον  καταλύσαι  τον  νόμον  άλλα  χληρώσαι.  3·  έγραψα 
υμϊν,  χαιδία,  ότι  γινώσκετε  τδν  πατέρα.  4*  εζησαν 

και  έβασίλευσαν  μετά  τού  χριστού  χίλια  (thousand)  έτη. 
5·  αυτός  ήγάχησεν  ημάς.  6.  έθεάσαντο  ά  έχοίησεν  καί 
έχίστευσαν  εις  αυτόν. 

II.  ι.  Darkness  blinded  his  eyes.  2.  We  did  not 
receive  the  gospel  because  we  did  not  hear  the  word. 
3.  They  made  him  king.  4.  He  came  to  destroy 
the  works  of  the  devil.  5.  He  sanctified  them  in 
truth. 


LESSON  XXXVII 

i 

First  Aorist  Subjunctive  Active  and  Middle 


Vocabulary 


310. 

άνεμος,  δ,  Wind 
θαυμάζω,  I  wonder ,  marvel 
ίσχυρός,  -ά,  -ov,  strong 
κρίμα,  τό,  judgment 
μισέω,  I  hate 
νικάω,  I  conquer 


νομίζω,  I  think ,  suppose 
χρεσβύτερος,  δ,  elder 
σκανδαλίζω,  I  cause  to  stum 
ble}  offend 

φόβος,  δ,  fear 
χρεία,  ή,  need 


126  BEGINNER’S  GREEK 

GRAMMAR 

311.  The  first  aorist  subjunctive  active  and  middle 

of  λύω: 

Active 

Singular 

Plural 

I.  λύσω 

I.  λύσωμεν 

2.  λύσης 

2.  λύσητε 

3·  λύση 

3·  λύσωσι 

Middle 

I.  λύσωμαι 

I.  λυσώμεθα 

2.  λύση 

2.  λύσησθε 

3·  λύσηται 

3·  λύσωνται 

α.  λύση,  the  second  pers.  sing,  middle,  came  from 

λυσησαι;  σ  dropped  out,  and  η  and  at  contracted  to  η. 

312.  Observe:  i.  There  is  no  augment.  Augment 

belongs  to  the  secondary  tenses  of  the  indicative 
only.  2.  The  stem  λυσ(α)  (σ(α)  is  the  tense  suffix) 
is  che  same  stem  as  in  the  aorist  indicative.  3.  The 
long  thematic  vowel  ω/η  is  added  to  the  stem.  Com¬ 
pare  the  present  subjunctive  165  and  172.  4.  The 

personal  endings  are  the  primary  active  and  middle 
endings,  the  same  as  in  the  present  subjunctive 
(165  and  172). 

313.  In  the  formation  of  the  first  aorist  subjunctive 
of  verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  short  vowel  or  a 
mute,  the  same  changes  are  made  at  the  end  of  the 
stem  as  in  the  first  aorist  indicative  (see  303.  1,  3). 
Thus  the  first  aorist  subjunctive  of 

οέγαχάω  is  αγαπήσω,  άγαχήσης,  etc. 

χοιέω  is  ποιήσω,  χοιήσης,  etc. 

χληρόω  is  πληρώσω,  χληρώσης,  etc. 


FIRST  AORIST  SUBJUNCTIVE 


127 


πέμπω 

is  πέμψω,  πέμψης, 

etc. 

άρχομαι 

1S  άρξωμαι,  άρξη, 

etc. 

πείθω 

is  πείσω,  πείσης, 

etc. 

σώζω  (σω 

δ-)  is  σώσω,  σώσης, 

etc. 

314.  Write  the  first  aorist  subjunctive  of 

αίτέω,  I  ask ;  έρωτάω,  I  ask  (question);  φανερόω,  I 
make  manifest ;  δέχομαι,  I  receive;  γράφω,  I  write; 
βλέπω,  I  see;  σώζω,  I  save. 

315.  Of  course  the  “kind  of  action”  of  the  aorist 
subjunctive  is  punctiliar;  and  Aktionsart  is  present 
as  in  the  indicative.  What  was  said  in  304-306 
about  punctiliar  action  and  Aktionsart  applies  to  the 
aorist  subjunctive. 

316.  It  needs  to  be  repeated  that  the  difference  in 
the  meaning  between  the  present  subjunctive  and 
the  aorist  subjunctive  is  in  the  “kind  of  action” 
expressed  by  the  two  tenses:  durative  action  in  the 
present,  and  punctiliar  action  in  the  aorist. 

317.  The  aorist  subjunctive  (in  the  second  and 
third  persons)  with  μή  is  used  to  express  a  prohibi¬ 
tion. 

1 .  Generally  in  the  second  person : 

μή  άρξησθε  λέγει v,  do  not  begin  to  say. 

2.  Less  often  in  the  third  person: 

μή  τις  υμάς  πλανήση,  let  no  one  cause  you  to  err. 

318.  Exercises 

I.  I.  τινές  δέ  έξ  αυτών  άπήλθον  πρδς  τους  Φαρισαίους 
καί  είπαν  αυτοΐς  ά  έποίησεν  ’Ιησούς.  2.  έτύφλωσεν  αυτών 


128 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


τους  όφθαλμους  Υνα  μή  ” δωσι  τοΤς  όφθαλμοΤς.  3*  μή  νομίσητε 
ότι  ήλθον  καταλύσαι  τδν  νόμον  ή  τους  χροφήτας.  ουτος 
ήλθε  εις  μαρτυρίαν  Υνα  μαρτυρήσγ)  χερί  τού  φωτός  Υνα  χάντες 
(all)  χιστεύσωσιν  Sc’  αυτού.  5*  ζητήσωμεν  αυτόν.  6.  μή 
χερί  τούτων  γράψης. 

II.  ι.  What  shall  we  do?  2.  Let  us  receive  the 
Gospel.  3.  Do  not  love  the  world.  4.  They  asked 
him  concerning  the  parable.  5.  If  we  do  his  will, 
he  will  love  us. 


LESSON  XXXVIII 

First  Aorist  Active  and  Middle  Participle.  Adjectives 
of  the  Third  Declension.  Declension  of  χάς 

319.  Vocabulary 

άδικος,  -η,  -ον,  unrighteous 
αδύνατος,  -ον,  unable ,  impossible 
ακάθαρτος,  -ον,  unclean 
αμήν,  adv.,  truly ,  verily 
άχας,  άχασα,  άχαν,  all,  altogether 
άχολύω,  I  release 

βφλίον,  τό,  book,  a  written  document 
θεραχεύω,  I  heal 

δτε,  relative  temporal  adv.  with  the  indicative,  when 
όταν,  relative  temporal  adv.  with  the  subj.  and  indica¬ 
tive,  whenever ,  when 
χάς,  χάσα,  χάν,  all,  every 

320.  The  first  aorist  active  participle  of  λύω  is  λύσας 
(masc.),  λύσασα  (fern.),  λΰσαν  (neut.). 


FIRST  AORIST  PARTICIPLE 


129 


STEM  λυσαντ- 
Singular 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

λύσας 

λύσασα 

λΰσαν 

Gen. 

λύσαντος 

λυσάσης 

λύσαντος 

Abl. 

λύσαντος 

λυσάσης 

λύσαντος 

Loc. 

λύσαντι 

λυσάση 

λύσαντι 

Ins. 

λύσαντι 

λυσάση 

λύσαντι 

Dat. 

λύσαντι 

λυσάση 

λύσαντι 

Acc. 

λύσαντα 

λύσασαν 

λΰσαν 

Plural 

Nom. 

λύσαντες 

λύσασαι 

λύσαντα 

Gen. 

λυσάντων 

λυσασών 

λυσάντων 

Abl. 

λυσάντων 

λυσασών 

λυσάντων 

Loc. 

λύσασι 

λυσάσαις 

λύσασι 

Ins. 

λύσασι 

λυσάσαις 

λύσασι 

Dat. 

λύσασι 

λυσάσαις 

λύσασι 

Acc. 

λύσαντας 

λυσάσας 

λύσαντα 

a.  All  participles  with  masc.  nom.  in  -ας  are  de¬ 
clined  like  λύσας,  λύσασα,  λΰσαν. 

321.  Observe:  I.  The  aorist  tense  suffix  σα  appears 
throughout.  2.  To  the  aorist  theme  is  added  the 
participial  ending  -ντ.  3*  The  stem  is  λυσαντ-;  and 
(i)  to  this  is  added  ς  to  form  the  nominative  masc. 
sing. ;  ντ  cannot  stand  before  ς  and  drops  out,  and 
a  is  lengthened;  (2)  the  neuter  nom.  sing,  is  the 
mere  stem,  τ  being  dropped  (234,  4) ;  (3)  the  fern, 
nom.  sing,  λύσασα  is  from  λυσανσα  from  λυσαντια  (see 
234,  3  footnote).  4.  The  masc.  and  neuter  are 
declined  according  to  the  third  declension,  and  the 
fern,  is  declined  according  to  the  first  declension. 


130 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


322.  The  first  aorist  middle  participle  of  λύω  is 
λυσάμενος,  λυσαμένη,  λυσάμενον.  Note  the  middle  par¬ 
ticiple  ending  -μένος,  -μενη,  -μενον  is  added  to  the 
aorist  theme  λυσα-.  The  first  aorist  middle  participle, 
like  the  present  and  second  aorist  middle  participles, 
is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  the  first  and  second 
declensions. 

323.  Of  course  the  kind  of  action  (punctiliar)  and 
the  Aktionsart  of  the  verb-stem  apply  to  the  par¬ 
ticiple. 

324.  The  declension  of  πας,  πάσα,  πάν  is: 

Stem  παντ- 
Singular 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut . 


Nom. 

πας 

πάσα 

πάν 

Gen. 

παντός 

πάσης 

παντός 

Abl. 

παντός 

πάσης 

παντός 

Loc. 

παντ( 

πάση 

παντ( 

Ins. 

παντι 

πάση 

παντί 

Dat. 

παντί 

πάση 

παντί 

Acc. 

πάντα 

πάσαν 

πάν 

Plural 

Nom. 

πάντες 

πάσαι 

πάντα 

Gen. 

πάντων 

πασών 

πάντων 

Abl. 

πάντων 

πασών 

πάντων 

Loc. 

πάσι 

πάσαις 

πάσι 

Ins. 

πάσι 

πάσαες 

πάσι 

Dat. 

πάσι 

πάσαες 

πάσι 

Acc. 

πάντας 

πάσας 

πάντα 

USES  OF  χάς 


131 


a.  άχας  is  a  strengthened  form  of  χάς  and  except 
for  the  accent  is  declined  like  πας. 

325.  i.  Note  that  except  for  the  accent  χάς  is 
declined  like  the  first  aorist  participle  λύσας;  and  the 
formation  of  genders  and  cases  is  like  λύσας. 

2.  Observe  that  the  accent  in  the  masculine  and 
neuter  singular  is  that  of  monosyllables  of  the  third 
declension  (226),  while  in  the  plural  the  accent  is  on 
the  penult. 

326.  Examine  carefully  the  following  examples  of 
the  use  of  χάς : 

1.  In  the  predicate  position: 

a.  χάσα  ή  χόλις,  all  the  city 
h.  χάσαι  at  χόλεις,  all  cities 

2.  In  the  attributive  position : 

a.  ή  χάσα  χόλις,  the  city  as  a  whole 

h.  δ  χάς  νόμος,  the  entire  law ,  the  whole  law 

c.  ot  χάντες  ανδρες,  the  total  number  of  the  men 

3.  With  a  singular  substantive,  without  the  article; 
χάσα  χόλις  or  χόλις  χάσα,  every  city 

4.  χάς  0  and  the  participle  is  a  common  construc¬ 
tion  in  the  New  Testament. 

χάς  ό  άκούων,  every  one  hearing ,  every  one  who 

hears 

χάντες  οι  άκούοντες,  all  those  hearing ,  all  those  who  hear 
χαντίτφ  άκούοντι,  to  every  one  hearing ,  to  every  one 

who  hears 

χάντες  οι  άκοόσαντες,  all  those  having  heard,  all  those 

who  heard 


132 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


327.  ώστε,  so  that  (to  be  distinguished  from  ώστε  used 
as  an  inferential  conjunction,  and  so,  therefore )  is 
used  with  the  infinitive  (twice  with  the  indicative) 
to  express  result: 

καί  έθεράχευσεν  αυτόν  ώστε  τον  τυφλόν  βλέχειν,  and  he 
healed  him  so  that  the  blind  man  was  seeing. 

a.  The  accusative  τόν  τυφλόν  is  not  the  subject  of 
the  infinitive  βλέχειν.  The  infinitive  does  not  have 
a  subject;  it  has  no  personal  endings,  and  is  not  a 
finite  verb.  The  acc.  limits  an  idea  in  content, 
scope,  and  direction.  The  action  in  βλέχειν  is 
limited  by  the  acc.  to  τόν  τυφλόν.  This  use  of  the 
acc.  is  generally  called  the  acc.  of  general  reference. 

328.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ό  χέμψας  με  δίκαιός  έστιν.  2.  ταΰτα  χάντα 
έλάλησεν  ό  ’Ιησούς  έν  χαραβολαϊς  τοίς  δχλοις.  3·  πας 
ό  έν  αύτώ  μενών  ούχ  αμαρτάνει,  φ  άκουσας  ταύτα  είχεν 
αυτω  Τ ι  τούτο  ακούω  χέρι  σού ;  5·  ήλθον  χοιήσαι  τό  θέλημα 
τού  χέμψαντός  με.  6.  δταν  άκούσωσιν  τόν  λόγον,  μετά 
χαράς  λαμβάνουσιν  αυτόν.  J.  αμήν  αμήν  λέγω  υμΐν  ότι 
ερχεται  ώρα  καί  νύν  έστιν  δτε  οί  νεκροί  άκουσουσιν  τής  φωνής 
τού  υιού  τού  θεού  καί  οί  άκούσαντες  ζήσουσιν. 

II.  ι.  Having  heard  this  he  went  away.  2.  He 
healed  all  the  blind  so  that  they  marvelled.  3.  Every 
one  believing  on  him  comes  not  into  judgment. 
4.  When  you  hear  his  voice,  you  will  believe.  5.  Let 
us  hear  him  who  sent  him. 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  133 


LESSON  XXXIX 


Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension:  Stems  in  -ες. 
Irregular  Adjectives,  πολύς  and  μέγας 


Vocabulary 


329. 

αληθής,  -ές,  true 
ασθενής,  -ές,  weak ,  sick 
γάμος,  δ,  marriage 
μέγας,  μεγάλη,  μέγα,  great 
μονογενής, -ές,  only  begotten 


πολύς,  πολλή,  πολύ,  mucht 
many 

προσευχή,  ή,  prayer 
υπάγω,  I  go  away ,  depart 
υγιής,  -ές,  whole ,  healthy 


330.  The  declension  of  άληθής  is: 


Stem  άληθεσ- 


Singular 
Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

άληθής 

άληθές 

Gen. 

άληθοΰς 

άληθοΰς 

Abl. 

άληθοΰς 

άληθοΰς 

Loc. 

άληθεϊ 

άληθεϊ 

Ins. 

άληθεϊ 

άληθεϊ 

Dat. 

άληθεϊ 

άληθεϊ 

Acc. 

αληθή 

άληθές 

Plural 
Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

άληθεϊ  ς 

αληθή 

Gen. 

άληθών 

άληθών 

Abl. 

άληθών 

άληθών 

Loc. 

άληθέσι 

άληθέσι 

Ins. 

άληθέσι 

άληθέσι 

Dat. 

άληθέσι 

άληθέσι 

Acc. 

άληθεϊς 

άληθή 

134 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


There  are  about  sixty  adjectives  in  the  New 
Testament  declined  like  αληθής. 

Compare  the  declension  of  αληθής  with  γένος  (290). 

331.  In  the  declension  of  αληθής  observe:  1.  The 
neuter  nom.  and  acc.  sing,  is  the  mere  stem.  2.  The 
masc.  nom.  sing,  is  the  stem  with  the  stem  vowel 
lengthened.  3.  In  the  other  cases  σ  of  the  stem 
drops  out  and  the  concurrent  vowels  contract.  The 
gen.  and  abl.  sing,  αληθούς  is  from  άληθέσος  (ε  +  o=  ου) ; 
the  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  sing,  άληθεϊ  is  from  άληθέσι 
(ε  +  c  =  ει) ;  the  masc.  acc.  sing,  αληθή  is  from  άληθέσα 
(ε  +  α  =  η) ;  the  masc.  nom.  plur.  αληθείς  is  from 
άληθέσες  (ε  +  ε  =  ει) ;  the  neut.  nom.  and  acc.  plur. 
αληθή  is  from  άληθέσα  (ε  +  α  =  η) ;  the  gen.  plural  άληθών 
is  from  άληθέσων  (ε  +  ω  =  ω) ;  the  masc.  and  fern.  acc. 
plur.  αληθείς  is  like  the  nom.  (probably  borrowed 
from  the  nom.).  4.  The  masc.  and  fern,  forms  are 
alike.  (This  is  the  first  adjective  given  thus  far,  the 
feminine  of  which  is  declined  in  the  third  declen¬ 
sion.)  5.  The  gen.,  abl.,  loc.,  ins.  and  dat.  in  all 
three  genders  are  alike. 

332.  The  declension  of  χολυς  is: 

Stems  χολυ-  and  χολλο-,  -α- 


Singular 


Masc . 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

χολυς 

χολλή 

χολυ 

Gen. 

χολλο ΰ 

χολλής 

χολλο υ 

Abl. 

χολλο υ 

χολλής 

χολλο υ 

Loc. 

χολλώ 

χολλή 

χολλώ 

IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 


135 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Ins. 

χολλώ 

s 

χολλη 

χολλώ 

Dat. 

χολλώ 

» 

χολλη 

χολλώ 

Acc. 

χολύν 

χολλήν 

χολύ 

Plural 

Nom. 

χολλοί 

χολλαί 

χολλά 

Gen. 

χολλών 

χολλών 

χολλών 

Abl. 

χολλών 

χολλών 

χολλών 

Loc. 

χολλοίς 

χολλαίς 

χολλοίς 

Ins. 

χολλοίς 

χολλαίς 

χολλοίς 

Dat. 

χολλοίς 

χολλαΐς 

χολλοίς 

Acc. 

χολλούς 

χολλάς 

χολλά 

Observe : 

ι.  The  masc.  and  neut. 

nom.  and  acc. 

sing,  are  made  on  the  stem  χολυ-.  2. 

Ail  the  other 

cases  (masc. 

fern,  and  neut.)  are  made  on  the  stem 

χολλο-  (fern. 

end.  -η)  and  declined  according  to  the 

first  and  second  declensions. 

333.  The  declension  of  μέγας  is: 

Stems  μεγα-  and  μεγάλο-,  · 

-a-. 

Singular 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

μέγας 

μεγάλη 

μέγα 

Gen. 

μεγάλου 

μεγάλης 

μεγάλου 

Abl.  . 

μεγάλου 

μεγάλης 

μεγάλου 

Loc. 

μεγάλφ 

μεγάλη 

μεγάλφ 

Ins. 

μεγάλφ 

μεγάλη 

μεγάλφ 

Dat. 

μεγάλω 

μεγάλη 

μεγάλφ 

Acc. 

μέγαν 

μεγάλην 

μέγα 

136 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Plural 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

μεγάλοι 

μεγάλαι 

μεγάλα 

Gen. 

μεγάλων 

μεγάλων 

μεγάλων 

Abl. 

μεγάλων 

μεγάλων 

μεγάλων 

Loc. 

μεγάλοις 

μεγάλαις 

μεγάλοις 

Ins. 

μεγάλοις 

μεγάλαις 

μεγάλοις 

Dat. 

μεγάλοις 

μεγάλαις 

μεγάλοις 

Ace. 

μεγάλους 

μεγάλας 

μεγάλα 

Observe : 

ι.  The  masc. 

and  neut. 

nom.  and  acc 

sing,  are  made  on  the  short  stem  μεγα-. 

2.  All  the  other  cases  (masc.,  fern.,  and  neut.) 
are  made  on  the  long  stem  μεγάλο-  (fern.  end.  -η) 
and  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declensions. 

334.  Study  carefully  the  following  examples  of  in¬ 
direct  discourse: 

1.  Indirect  assertions.  I.  After  οτι  {that): 

συ  λέγεις  δτι  βασιλεύς  ε?μι,  thou  sayest  that  I  am  a  King, 
είδον  ότι  έσθίει,  they  saw  that  he  was  eating. 

2.  With  the  infinitive: 

λέγουσιν  αυτόν  μένειν,  they  say  that  he  remains. 

3.  With  the  participle: 

ε’ίδαμέν  τινα  έκβάλλοντα  δαιμόνια,  we  saw  one  casting 
out  demons. 

II.  Indirect  questions: 

αύτός  γάρ  έγίνωσκεν  τί  ήν  έν  τω  άνθρώπφ,  for  he  himself 
knew  what  was  in  man. 
είδαν  που  μένει,  they  saw  where  he  was  abiding. 
ή  ρώτησαν  τι  φάγωσι,  they  asked  what  they  were  to  eat „ 


INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 


137 


III.  Indirect  commands. 

τφ  Παυλω  ελεγον  διά  τοΰ  πνεύματος  μή  έχιβαίνειν  ε£ς 
Ιεροσόλυμα,  they  said  to  Paul  through  the  spirit 
that  he  should  not  go  up  to  Jerusalem  (literally, 
not  to  go  up  to  Jerusalem). 

335.  Observe: 

1.  Indirect  assertions  are  expressed  (i)  by  ότι 
and  the  indicative;  (2)  by  the  infinitive;  (3)  by  the 
participle. 

2.  The  same  introductory  words  are  generally 
used  in  indirect  questions  as  those  which  are  found 
in  direct  questions. 

3.  The  infinitive  is  frequently  used  in  indirect 
commands. 

a.  Sometimes  7va  and  a  finite  mode  is  used.1 

4.  The  tense  generally  remains  unchanged  in  the 
Greek  indirect  discourse. 

a.  Sometimes  there  is  a  change,  as  in  the  first 
example  under  II ;  the  imperfect  ήν  seems  to  represent 
a  present  in  the  direct. 

5.  The  mode  generally  remains  unchanged  in  the 
Greek  indirect  discourse.  The  subjunctive  mode 
(φάγωσι)  in  the  third  example  under  II  was  in  the 
direct. 

6.  The  person  of  the  verb  is  or  is  not  changed 
according  to  the  circumstances. 

In  the  third  example  under  II  the  third  person  was 
first  or  second  in  the  direct. 

1  Also  used  as  object-clause  after  verbs  of  striving,  beseeching,  etc. 


138 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


336.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καί  έγένετο  φόβος  μέγας  έχΐ  χάντας.  2.  τις  γάρ 
έστιν  ανθρώπων  δς  ού  γινώσκει  την  Έφεσιων  1  χόλιν 
νεωκόρον2  ουσαν  τής  μεγάλης  Άρτέμιδος;  3·  λέγουσιν 
άνάστασιν  μή  είναι.  4·  πολύ  πλήθος  αχό  τής  Γαλιλαίας 
ήκολούθησεν  αύτω.  5·  είπεν  δτι  μεγάλη  'έστίν  ή  χίστις 
αύτοΰ.  6.  ετι  χολλά  Ίχω  υμίν  λέγειν.  J.  μετά  ταυτα 
ήκουσα  ώς  φωνήν  μεγάλην  όχλου  χολλοΰ.  8.  γινώσκομεν 
ότι  άληθής  εί. 

II.  ι.  They  did  not  know  what  they  would  see. 

2.  They  know  that  there  shall  be  great  tribulation. 

3.  Many  saw  the  Lord  coming  and  said  that  he  was 
the  Saviour  of  the  world.  4.  This  one  is  the  only 
begotten  son. 

LESSON  XL 

First  Aorist  Passive  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 
Future  Passive  Indicative 

337.  Vocabulary 

άναγινώσκω,  I  read  λυχέω,  I  grieve 

άνωθεν,  adv.,  from  above,  όχου,  rel.  adv.,  where 
again  χόθεν,  interrogative  adv., 

aupiov,  adv.,  tomorrow  whence 

Ιγγός,  adv.,  near  σαλεύω,  I  shake 

επαύριον,  adv.,  on  the  morrow  σταυρόω,  I  crucify 

338.  The  stem  of  first  aorist  passive  is  formed  by 
adding  θε  directly  to  the  verb-stem.  Thus  λυθε-  is 
the  first  aorist  stem  of  λύω. 

1  Έφέσιος,  -η,  -ον,  Ephesian. 

2  νεωκόρος,  δ  or  ή,  temple-keeper 


FIRST  AORIST  PASSIVE 


139 


339.  The  first  aorist  passive  indicative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  έλύθην,  I  was  loosed  i.  έλύθημεν,  we  were  loosed 

2.  έλύθης,  you  were  loosed  2.  έλύθητε,  you  were  loosed 

3.  έλύθη,  he  was  loosed  3.  έλύθησαν,  they  were  loosed 

First  aorist  passive  infinitive — λυθήναι,  to  be  loosed 
Observe:  1.  The  vowel  ε  of  the  aorist  passive 
tense  suffix  θε  is  lengthened  to  η  (θη)  throughout  the 
indicative,  and  in  the  infinitive.  2.  The  personal 
endings  of  the  aorist  passive  indicative  are  the 
secondary  active  personal  endings  (66).  3.  The 

endings  are  added  directly  to  the  aorist  passive  stem. 

4.  In  the  indicative  there  is  an  augment  as  in  the 
aorist  active  ind.  (182,  3  and  296,  3),  and  is  formed 
on  the  same  principles  as  in  the  imperfect  (70). 

5.  The  aorist  passive  infinitive  ending  is  -vat;  the 
accent  of  the  aorist  passive  infinitive  is  always  on  the 
penult. 

340.  The  aorist  passive  subjunctive  of  λύω  is: 


Singular 

1.  λυθώ 

2.  λυθής 
3·  λυθτί 


Plural 

1.  λυθώμεν 

2.  λυθήτε 
3·  λυθώσι 


Observe :  1 .  The  subjunctive  has  the  primary  per¬ 
sonal  endings.  2.  The  subjunctive  mode  sign  ω/η 
contracts  with  ε  of  the  passive  suffix.  3.  The  cir¬ 
cumflex  accent  is  written  over  the  contracted  syllable. 
4.  The  subjunctive  does  not  have  an  augment. 

341.  Review  the  “kind  of  action”  (punctiliar)  of 
the  aorist  tense  and  Aktionsart  of  the  verb-stem, 


140 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


178-180,  305-307.  These  of  course  apply  to  the 
aorist  passive  as  well  as  to  active  and  middle. 

342.  For  the  meaning  of  the  passive  voice  see  51. 
Some  defective  (152)  verbs  have  no  aorist  middle, 
but  passive  form;  but  not  the  passive  meaning:  the 
meaning  is  either  middle  or  active  (or  intransitive) : 

χορεύομαι,  I  go;  έχορεύθην,  I  went. 

Some  verbs  have  both  aorist  middle  and  passive 
forms,  as  άχεκρινάμην,  άχεκρίθην. 

343.  Verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  short  vowel  (α,  ε,  o) 
generally  lengthen  (a  to  a  after  ε,  t,  or  p)  the  vowel 
of  the  stem  before  the  tense  suffix  θε  in  formation  of 
the  aorist  passive.  Thus: 

χοιέω;  aorist  passive,  έχοιήθην. 
γεννάω;  aorist  passive,  έγεννήθην. 
φανερόω;  aorist  passive,  έφανερώθην. 

a.  A  few  verbs  like  τελέω  do  not  lengthen  ε;  but 
have  σ  before  θε,  as  έτελέσθην. 

344.  The  future  passive  is  made  upon  the  aorist 
passive  stem.  Thus  λυθήσομαι,  I  shall  he  loosed ,  is 
the  aorist  passive  stem  λυθη  +  σο  (the  future  tense 
suffix  and  thematic  vowel)  +  μαι  (the  primary  mid¬ 
dle  ending).  The  future  passive  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  λυθήσομαι,  I  shall  he  loosed  1.  λυθησόμεθα,  we  shall  he 

2.  λυθήση,  you  shall  he  2.  λυθήσεσθε  loosed ,  etc. 

loosed  3·  λιιθήσονται 

λυθήσεται  he ,  she  or  it  shall  he  loosed 


SECOND  AORIST  PASSIVE 


141 


Observe  that  the  future  passive  is  conjugated  like 
the  future  middle  except  that  the  stem  of  the 
passive  is  λυθησ-,  whereas  the  stem  of  the  middle  is 
λυσ-. 

345.  In  some  verbs  (having  no  first  aorist  passive) 
there  is  found  a  second  aorist  passive  with  suffix 
-ε  (-η)  added  directly  to  the  verb-stem.  The  con¬ 
jugation  is  like  that  of  the  first  aorist  passive, 
except  there  is  no  Θ. 

Thus:  the  second  aorist  passive  of  γράφω  is 
έγράφην,1  έγράφης,  etc.:  στρέφω,  έστράφην,  etc.  Second 
aorist  passive  infinitive  γραφήναι. 

The  second  future  passive  is  built  on  the  second 
aorist  stem.  The  second  future  passive  of  φαίνω 
(second  aor.  pass.,  έφάνην)  is  φανήσομαι. 

346.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καί  έξελθών  έχορεύθη  είς  έτερον  τόπον.  2.  άμήν 
άμήν  λέγω  σοι,  έάν  μή  τις  γεννηθή  άνωθεν,  ου  δύναται  C δείν 
την  βασιλείαν  τού  θεού.  3·  τούτο  έφανερώθη  ό  υιός  τού 
6εού  ινα  λύση  τά  έργα  διαβόλου,  φ  λέγει  αύτω  Σίμων 
Πέτρος,  Κύριε,  πού  υπάγεις;  άπεκρ'θη  ’Ιησούς '  Οπου  υπάγω 
ού  δύνασαί  μοι  νύν  άκολουθήσαι.  5·  ^Υϊύς  ήν  ό  τόπος  τής 
πόλεως  όχου  έσταυρώθη  ό  ’Ιησούς. 

II.  ι.  If  he  be  made  manifest,  we  shall  be  like 
(όμοιοι)  him  (associative-instrumental  case).  2.  Those 
who  believed  were  begotten  of  (έκ)  God.  3.  It  was 
written  in  order  that  the  Scripture  might  be  fulfilled. 
4.  The  powers  of  the  heavens  shall  be  shaken. 

1  The  second  aorist  passive  is  really  an  active  form  that  came  to 
have  a  passive  meaning. 


142 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XLI 

Aorist  Passive  (Continued) 

347.  Vocabulary 

αληθώς,  adv.,  truly ,  surely  καλώς,  adv.,  finely,  well 
άνοίγω,  I  open  πειράζω,  I  test ,  tempt 

Biavota,  ή,  mind ,  under -  πρό,  prep,  with  abl.,  before 
standing  τελειόω,  I  end ,  complete , 

έπιθυμία,  ή,  desire  fulfill 

348.  The  formation  of  the  first  aorist  and  future 
passive  given  in  Lesson  XL  is  typical  of  all  verbs 
with  stems  ending  in  a  vowel. 

349.  Verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  mute  (217-218) 
suffer  euphonic  changes  in  the  mute  before  the  pas¬ 
sive  suffix  θε. 

1.  A  labial  mute,  πβφ,  before  Θ  (of  the  suffix)  be¬ 
comes  φ.  πέμπω,  stem  πεμπ-,  aorist  passive  έπέμφθην. 

2.  A  palatal  mute,  κγχ,  before  Θ,  becomes  χ. 
αγω,  stem  άγ-,  aorist  passive  -ήχθην. 

3.  A  lingual  mute,  τδθ,  before  θ  becomes  σ.  πείθω, 
stem  πειθ-,  aorist  passive  έπείσθην. 

These  changes  may  be  represented  to  the  eye  in 
tabular  form,  thus: 

π,  β,  φ  before  θ  =  φθ. 
κ,  γ,  χ  before  θ  =  χθ. 
τ,  δ,  θ,  before  θ  =  σθ. 

After  these  changes  are  made  the  conjugation 
follows  the  form  of  έλύθην.  Thus  λείπω: 

Aorist  passive  indicative  έλείφθην,  etc. 

Aorist  passive  subjunctive  λειφθώ,  etc. 

Aorist  passive  infinitive  λειφθήναι 
Future  passive  indicative  λειφθήσομαι,  etc. 


AORIST  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE 


143 


350.  The  stem  of  the  aorist  passive  participle  is 
made  on  the  aorist  passive  stem  with  the  participial 
ending  -ντ.  The  stem  of  the  aorist  passive  participle 
of  λύω  is  λύθεντ-. 


The  declension  of  the  aorist  passive  participle  of 


λύω  is: 

Singular 

• 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

λυθείς 

λυθεϊσα 

λυθέν 

Gen. 

λυθέντος 

λυθείσης 

λυθέντος 

Abl. 

λυθέντος 

λυθείσης 

λυθέντος 

Loc. 

λυθέντι 

λυθείση 

λυθέντι 

Ins. 

λυθέντι 

λυθείση 

λυθέντι 

Dat. 

λυθέντι 

λυθείση 

λυθέντι 

Acc. 

λυθέντα 

λυθεϊσαν 

λυθέν 

Plural 

Nom. 

λυθέντες 

λυθεϊσαι 

λυθέντα 

Gen. 

λυθέντων 

λυθεισών 

λυθέντων 

Abl. 

λυθέντων 

λυθεισών 

λυθέντων 

Loc. 

λυθεϊσι 

λυθεισαις 

λυθεϊσι 

Ins. 

λυθεϊσι 

λυθείσαις 

λυθεϊσι 

Dat. 

λυθεϊσι 

λυθείσαις 

λυθεϊσι 

Acc. 

λυθέντας 

λυθείσας 

λυθέντα 

Observe :  i 

:.  The  masc.  nom.  sing. 

is  formed  by 

adding  -ς  to 

the  stem  λυθεντ  =  λυθεντς;  ντ  cannot 

stand  before 

ς  and  drops  out;  the  ε 

is  lengthened 

(compensatory)  to  ει. 

2.  The  fem. 

nom.  sing,  is 

formed  from  λυθεντια  = 

=  λυθενσα  =  λυθεισα;  ε  is  length- 

ened  (compensatory)  to  ei;  see  321,3  (3);  234,3 
footnote.  3.  The  neut.  nom.  (and  acc.)  sing,  is  the 


144 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


mere  stem,  without  τ  (see  234,  3).  4.  For  the  forms 

of  the  masc.  and  neut.  loc.,  ins.,  and  dat.  plural  see 
229,  2,  and  lengthening  of  ε  to  ει  see  above.  5.  Note 
the  position  of  the  accent  on  the  aorist  passive  par¬ 
ticiple  in  comparison  with  the  other  participles. 

351.  The  aorist  passive  participle  of 


χέμχω  is  χεμφθείς,  -θεϊσα,  -θέν. 
άγω  is  άχθείς,  -θεϊσα,  -θέν. 
χείθω  is  χεισθείς,  -θεϊσα,  -θέν. 
γεννάω  is  γεννηθείς,  -θεϊσα,  -θέν. 
φανερόω  is  φανερωθείς,  -θεϊσα,  -θέν. 


The  second  aorist  passive  participle  of 

γράφω  is  γραφείς,  -εϊσα,  -έν. 
φαίνω  is  φανείς,  -εϊσα,  -έν. 
στρέφω  is  στραφείς,  -εϊσα,  -έν. 

352.  The  aorist  passive  participle  is  used  in  all  the 
participial  constructions  that  have  been  studied. 

353.  It  cannot  certainly  be  told  beforehand  what 
form  of  the  aorist  passive  a  verb  will  have.  The 
aorist  passive  stem  must  be  known. 

1.  Some  of  the  second  aorist  passives  found  in 
the  New  Testament  (besides  those  already  given) 


are: 


-έκόχην  (fut.  pass,  κοχήσομαι),  pres,  κόχτω,  I  beat ,  strike 


pres,  κρύχτω,  I  hide 
pres,  σχείρω,  I  sow 
pres,  (άχο)στέλλω,  I  send 


έκρύβην, 

έσχάρην, 

(άχ)έστάλην, 


ήνοίγην  (fut.  pass,  άνοιχθήσομαι,  άνοιγήσομαι),  pres,  ανοίγω, 


I  open 


AORIST  PASSIVE 


145 


2.  Some  verbs  have  apparently  irregular  forms 
in  the  first  aorist  and  future  passive : 


Present 

First  aorist  passive 

Future  passive 

ακούω 

ήκούσθην 

άκουσθήσομαι 

βάλλω 

έβλήθην 

βληθήσομαι 

γινώσκω 

έγνώσθην 

γνωσθήσομαι 

εγείρω 

ήγέρθην 

έγερθήσομαι 

καλέω 

έκλήθην 

κληθήσομαι 

λαμβάνω 

έλήμφθην 

-λημφθήσομαί 

Stem  όχ- 

ώφθην 

όφθήσομαι. 

(Presents  used,  βλέχω, 
όράω,  and  όχτάνομαι). 

354.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έκλήθηρ  δ£  b  J Ιησούς  είς  τον  γάμον.  2.  καί  τη, 
τρίτη  ήμερα  έγερθήσεται.  3·  δ  δέ  διεκώλυεν1  αυτόν 
λέγων  Έγώ  χρείαν  έχω  υχό  σοϋ  βαχτισθήν at.  ουτος 
μέγας  κληθήσεται  εν  τή  βασιλεία  τών  ουρανών.  5·  υμείς  δέ 
τίνα  με  λέγετε  είναι;  άχοκριθείς  ό  Πέτρος  λέγει  αυτω  Σό 
ει  ό  Χριστός.  6.  χίστει  Μωυσής  γεννηθείς  έκρύβη  τρίμηνον 
(three  months)  υχό  τών  χατέρων  αυτοΰ.  7·  ήχθηό’Ιησους 
υχό  τοΰ  χνεύματος  είς  την  έρημον  χειρασθήναι  ύχό  τοΟ 
διαβόλου.  8.  μετά  ταΰτα  ώφθη  χάσι  τοΐς  άχοστόλοις. 

II.  ι.  The  prince  of  this  world  will  be  cast  out. 
2.  Let  us  be  led  by  the  spirit.  3.  If  I  touch  him, 

I  shall  be  saved.  4.  He  who  was  begotten  of  God 
will  keep  you.  5.  If  we  be  raised  from  the  dead, 
they  shall  be  raised. 

1  διακωλύω,  I  hinder. 


146 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XLII 

Some  Irregular  Substantives  of  the  Third  Declension. 
Some  Uses  of  the  Infinitive 

355.  Vocabulary 

αντί,  prep,  (original  meaning  “at  ends”  [face  to  face]) 
with  the  gen.,  opposite ,  against;  instead  of ,  in 
place  of ,  for 

άξιος,  -a,  -ov,  fitting,  worthy 
έχιθυμέω,  I  desire 
νεφέλη,  ή,  cloud 

χάσχα,  τό  (indeclinable),  the  Passover 
χάσχω,  I  suffer ;  second  aorist  εχαθον 
σίγάω,  I  am  silent ,  keep  silent 
συνεσθίω,  I  eat  with  (someone) 
φοβέομαι,  I  am  afraid ,  I  fear 
φωνέω,  I  call ,  speak  aloud 
χρονίζω,  I  spend  time ,  tarry 

356.  Learn  the  forms  of  the  following  irregular 
substantives  of  the  third  declension  given  in  §  12: 
γόνυ,  τό,  knee ;  γυνή,  ή,  woman;  θρίξ,  ή,  hair;  κυων,  δ, 
dog;  ους,  τό,  ear;  ύδωρ,  τό,  water. 

Note  especially  the  forms  not  in  parentheses — 
the  forms  in  parentheses  do  not  occur  in  the  New 
Testament. 

357.  The  infinitive,  as  we  have  learned,  has  tense 
and  voice ;  but  it  has  no  manner  of  affirmation  and 
is  not  a  mode. 

There  are  a  great  many  uses  of  the  infinitive. 
Note  carefully  some  of  the  uses  of  the  infinitive  in 
the  following: 

I.  As  an  indeclinable  verbal  substantive  (of 


USES  OF  THE  INFINITIVE 


147 


neuter  gender)  the  infinitive  may  be  used  in  any 
case  (not  vocative)  with  or  without  the  article. 
With  the  article  it  is  indeclinable;  but  the  neuter 
article  with  the  infinitive  is  declined  and  shows  the 
case  of  the  infinitive. 

(1)  καλόν  σοί  έστιν  εισελθεΐν  εις  ζωήν,  it  is  good  for 
thee  to  enter  into  life .  εισελθεΐν  is  in  the  nominative 
case. 

(2)  ήλθομεν  προσκυνήσαι,  we  came  to  worship. 
χροσκυνήσαι  is  in  the  dative  case.  In  this  construc¬ 
tion  the  infinitive  is  common  for  the  expression  of 
purpose. 

(3)  ^ζήτησαν  τού'  καταλΰσαι  τα  έργα  αυτού,  they  sought 
to  destroy  his  work,  τού  καταλΰσαι  is  in  the  genitive 
case,  τού  and  the  infinitive  is  common  in  the  New 
Testament  to  express  purpose. 

2.  The  infinitive  with  the  article  is  used  in  most 
of  the  constructions  in  which  any  other  substantive 
is  used. 

(1)  The  infinitive  is  used  with  such  verbs 
as:  δύναμαι,  θέλω,  ζητέω,  αρχομαι,  etc.  In  fact,  the 
infinitive  can  be  used  with  almost  any  verb  that  can 
be  used  with  a  substantive. 

θέλει  άκούειν  τό  εύαγγέλιον,  he  wishes  to  hear  the  gospel. 
ού  δύναται  αύτω  δουλεύειν,  he  is  not  able  to  serve  him. 

(2)  The  infinitive  is  used  with  substantives,  most 
frequently  with  those  expressing  time,  fitness,  ability, 
need,  etc. 

έχομεν  έξουσίαν  γενέσθαι  τα  τέκνα  τού  θεού,  we  have  power 
to  become  the  children  of  God. 
εχει  χίστιν  τού  σωθήναι,  he  has  faith  to  be  healed  {saved). 


148 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


(3)  The  infinitive  is  used  with  adjectives,  com- 
monly  with 

άξιος,  δυνατός,  Ικανός. 

ούκέτι  είμί  άξιος  κληθήναι  υιός  σου,  /  am  no  longer  worthy 
to  be  called  a  son  of  thine. 

δυνατός  έστιν  αυτό  φυλάξαι,  he  is  able  to  guard  {keep)  it. 

(4)  The  infinitive  with  the  article  is  used  with 
many  prepositions. 

πρό  τοΰ  σε  Φίλιππον  φωνήσαι  είδόν  σε,  before  Philip  called 
thee ,  I  saw  thee. 

είπεν  παραβολήν  διά  τό  έγγύς  είναι  Ιερουσαλήμ  αυτόν,  he 
spoke  a  parable  because  he  was  near  Jerusalem. 
μετά  τό  άποθανείν  αυτόν  άπήλθον,  after  he  died ,  they  went 
away. 

ταυτα  ειπον  ύμΐν  είς  τό  μή  μένειν  υμάς  έν  τή  αμαρτία,  I  said 
this  to  you  in  order  that  you  might  not  remain 
in  sin. 

Note:  είς  τό  and  an  infinitive  is  a  common  con¬ 
struction  to  express  purpose. 

καί  έθαύμαζον  έν  τώ  χρονίζειν  έν  τώ  ναώ  αυτόν,  and  they 
marvelled  while  he  was  tarrying  in  the  temple. 

a.  Observe  that  the  case  of  the  infinitive  has  its 
proper  meaning.  The  prepositions,  as  with  cases  of 
other  substantives,  help  out  the  meaning  of  the 
cases.  What  the  resultant  meaning  is  depends  on 
the  meaning  of  the  word,  the  case  with  the  preposi¬ 
tion,  and  the  context.  In  the  first  example  the 
resultant  meaning  of  προ  τοΰ  φωνήσαι  (abl.  case)  is 
temporal;  of  the  second  example,  διά  τό  είναι, 
causal;  of  the  third,  μετά  τό  άποθανείν,  temporal;  of 
the  fourth,  είς  τό  μή  μένειν,  purpose;  of  the  fifth, 


PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT 


149 


έν  τώ  χρονίζειν  (loc.  case),  temporal,  b.  The  voices 
of  the  infinitive  have  the  usual  significance,  c.  The 
tenses  have  their  force  in  the  infinitive,  as  in  the 
modes  and  participle.  Tense  in  the  infinitive  has  no 
time  except  in  indirect  discourse,  d.  It  is  not  neces¬ 
sary  for  the  article  to  come  next  to  the  infinitive. 
Several  words  may  intervene  (see  first  example  under 
(4) )  and  the  clause  may  be  one  of  considerable 
extent,  e.  The  infinitive  is  not  a  mode  and  is  not 
limited  by  personal  endings;  and,  therefore,  does 
not  have  a  subject.  See  327,  a. 

358.  Exercises 

I.  I.  xpo  γάρ  του  έλθεΐν  τινάς  άχδ  Ιακώβου  μετά  τών 
έθνών  συνήσθίεν  δ  Πέτρος.  2.  ουκ  έστιν  καλόν  λαβείν  τόν 
άρτον  τών  τέκνων  καί  βαλεΐν  τοΐς  κυσίν.  3·  μετά  δέ  τδ 
σιγήσαι  αυτούς  άχεκρίθη  Ιάκωβος.  έχεΟύμησα  τούτο 
τδ  χάσχα  φαγείν  μεθ’  υμών  χρδ  τού  με  χαθεϊν.  5·  εφοβήθησαν 
δέ  έν  τώ  είσελθεΐν  αυτους  ε!ς  την  νεφέλην. 

II.  ι.  After  he  entered  the  house,  the  crowd  went 
away.  2.  While  the  woman  was  going  away,  he 
spoke  to  his  disciples.  3.  The  son  of  man  has  power 
to  save  men.  4.  He  was  worthy  to  receive  the  glory. 
5.  Before  he  saw  you  I  called  you. 


LESSON  XLIII 

The  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Indicative  Active 

859.  Vocabulary 

άχαγγέλλω,  I  announce ,  de-  σύρω,  I  drag ,  draw 
dare  ψεύστης,  -ου,  δ,  liar 


150 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


έξω,  adv.,  without ;  used  also  φεύγω,  I  flee,  take  flight; 

with  abl.  second  aorist, 

μακάριος,  -a,-  ov,  blessed,  happy  εφυγον. 

όράω,  I  see;  fut.  δψομαι;  second  aor.  είδον. 


360.  The  perfect  indicative  active  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  λέλυκα,  I  have  loosed,  I.  λελύκαμεν 

2.  λέλυκας  etc.  2.  λελύκατε 

3·  λέλυκε  3·  λελύκασι  or  λέλυκαν 

Perfect  active  infinitive,  λελυκέναι 


a.  In  the  second  pers.  sing,  a  form  like  λέλυκες 
occurs  a  few  times,  b.  In  the  third  pers.  plur.  a 
form  like  λέλυκαν  occurs  ten  times  in  the  New 
Testament. 


361.  Observe:  I.  To  the  verb-stem  (λ u-)  is  prefixed 
its  initial  consonant  (λ)  with  ε.  This  is  called 
reduplication.  2.  The  suffix  -κα  is  added  to  the 
reduplicated  verb-stem:  thus  is  formed,  in  the  in¬ 
dicative,  the  first  (or  κ)  perfect  stem  (active).  3.  The 
personal  endings  seem  to  be  the  secondary  personal 
endings,  except  -ασι  in  the  third  plur. 

362.  The  first  (or  κ)  perfect  (active)  is  generally 
formed  from  verb -stems  ending  in  a  vowel,  a  liquid 
(λ,  p),  or  a  lingual  (dental)  mute  (τ,  δ,  θ). 

i.  Vowel  stems.  If  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem  is 
long  (or  a  diphthong)  -κα  is  added  to  the  redupli¬ 
cated  verb-stem  without  change,  as  χεχίστευκα. 

If  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem  is  short,  it  is  length¬ 
ened  before  -κα  as  νικάω,  I  conquer,  νενίκηκα;  χοιέω* 
I  do,  χεχοίηκα;  χληρόω,  χεχλήρωκα. 

Here  α,  ε,  and  ο  follow  the  same  principle  of  length- 


SECOND  PERFECT  INDICATIVE  151 

ening  as  in  the  future  and  first  aorist  active  and 
passive. 

2.  Liquid  stems,  -κα  is  added  to  the  reduplicated 
verb-stem,  as  στέλλω  (σταλ-),  εσταλκα  (for  redupli¬ 
cation  see  below). 

3.  Lingual  mute  stems,  τ,  δ,  or  Θ  is  dropped  before 
-κα,  as  σώζω  (σωδ),  σέσωκα. 

363.  Verbs  beginning  with  a  vowel,  two  consonants 
(except  a  mute  and  liquid),  a  double  consonant 
(ζ,  ξ,  ψ),  or  p,  form  the  reduplication  like  the  aug¬ 
ment.  p  is  generally  doubled.  Thus:  άγαχάω, 
ήγάχηκα;  στέλλω,  εσταλκα;  ξηραίνω,  έξήραμμαι. 

364.  Verbs  beginning  with  a  rough  mute  (φ,  χ,  Θ) 
have  the  corresponding  smooth  mute  (x,  κ,  τ),  in  re¬ 
duplication.  Thus:  φιλέω,  χεφίληκα;  -θνήσκω,  τέθνηκα. 

365.  A  few  verbs  have  a  seemingly  irregular  perfect, 
as 

γινώσκω,  perf.  act.  έγνωκα. 
δράω,  perf.  act.  έώρακα. 

366.  In  formation  of  the  perfect  active  a  few  verbs 
add  -a  and  not  -κα  to  the  reduplicated  verb-stem. 
These  are  called  second  or  strong  perfects,  and  are 
older  than  the  κ-  perfects.  Conj.  like  κ-  perf. 


Present 

Second  perfect 

άκούω 

άκήκοα 

γίνομαι 

γέγονα 

γράφω 

γέγραφα 

έρχομαι 

έλήλυθα 

χάσχω 

χέχονθα 

χείθω 

χέχοιθα 

φεύγω 

χέφευγα. 

I 


1 52 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


367.  The  tense  in  Greek  called  perfect  is  really  a 
present  perfect.  The  perfect  presents  the  action 
of  the  verb  in  a  completed  state  or  condition.  When 
the  action  was  completed  the  perfect  tense  does  not 
tell.  It  is  still  complete  at  the  time  of  the  use  of 
the  tense  by  the  speaker  or  writer.  The  perfect 
expresses  the  continuance  of  completed  action.  It 
is  then  a  combination  of  punctiliar  action  and  dura- 
tive  action.  This  kind  of  action  expressed  by  the 
perfect  tense  is  sometimes  called  perfective  action. 

368.  The  perfect  tense  as  tense  is  timeless.  But  in 
the  indicative  the  time  element  is  present.  The  per¬ 
fect  indicative  generally  expresses  the  present  result 
of  a  past  action.  It  then  has  to  do  with  the  past  and 
the  present.  The  English  perfect  is  not  an  equiva¬ 
lent  to  the  Greek  perfect.  The  translations  given 
in  the  paradigms  are  not  at  all  to  be  taken  as  equiva¬ 
lent  to  the  Greek  perfect,  but  as  a  means  of  asso¬ 
ciating  the  verb  meaning  with  the  verb.  Aktionsart 
of  the  verb  applies  to  the  perfect.  E.g., 

γέγραφα,  I  wrote  and  the  statement  is  still  on  record. 
έλήλυθα,  I  came  (punctiliar)  and  am  still  here  (dura- 
tive) . 

369.  The  pluperfect  (past  perfect)  indicative  active 
of  λύω  is 

Singular  Plural 

1.  [(έ)λελύκειν],  I  had  loosedy  I.  [(έ)λελυκειμ,εν] 

2.  [(έ)λελύκεις]  etc.  2.  (έ)λελύκειτε 

3.  (έ)λελύκεε,  3·  (έ)λελυκεεσαν 

a.  The  forms  in  brackets  do  not  occur  in  the 
New  Testament. 


PLUPERFECT  INDICATIVE 


153 


Observe:  I.  The  pluperf.  is  made  upon  the  per¬ 
fect  stem.  2.  The  thematic  vowel  is  si.  3.  The 
personal  endings  are  the  secondary  personal  end¬ 
ings.  4.  There  is  an  augment  before  the  reduplica¬ 
tion.  The  augment  is  usually  dropped  in  the  plu¬ 
perf.  in  the  New  Testament. 

370.  If  a  second  perfect  has  a  pluperfect,  the  plu¬ 
perf.  is  made  on  the  second  perfect  stem  and  is 
called  the  second  pluperfect.  Thus: 

Second  pluperf. 

Present  Second  perf.  (third  pers.  sing.) 

γίνομαι  γέγονα  (έ)γεγόνει 

έρχομαι  έλήλυθα  έληλύθει 

The  pluperfect  expresses  continuance  of  the  com¬ 
pleted  state  in  past  time  up  to  a  prescribed  limit  in 
the  past. 

371.  Exercises 

I.  I.  δ  έωράκαμεν  καί  άκηκόαμεν  άχαγγέλλομεν  καί  ύμίν. 
2.  έν  τουτω  έστίν  ή  αγάπη,  ούχ  ότι  ημείς  ήγαχήκαμεν  τον 
θεόν,  άλλ’  οτι  αυτός  ήγάχησεν  ημάς.  3·  λέγει  αυτω ’Ιησούς 
νΟτι  έώρακάς  με  χεχίστευκας,  μακάριοι  οί  μή  ίδόντες  καί 
χιστευσαντες.  \.  ψεύστην  χεχοίηκε  αυτόν  ότι  ού  χεχίστευκεν 
εις  τήν  μαρτυρίαν  ήν  μεμαρτύρηκεν  ό  θεός  περί  τού  υιού  αυτού. 
5·  αύτη  δε  έστιν  ή  κρίσις  ότι  τό  φως  έλήλυθεν  εις  τον  κόσμον. 

,  6.  τόν  Παύλον  έσυρον  έξω  τής  χόλεως,  νομίζοντες  αυτόν 

τεθνηκέναι. 

II.  ι.  We  have  made  him  King.  2.  He  said 
“What  I  have  written,  I  have  written.”  3.  We 
have  kept  the  faith.  4.  I  have  come  to  do  the  will 
of  him  who  sent  me. 


154 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XLIV 


The  Perfect  Tense  (Continued) 


372. 


Vocabulary 


εορτή,  ή,  feast 
ήλιος,  6,  sun 
θεραπεύω,  I  heal 
έμός,  -ή,  -όν,  poss.  pron. 
of  first  pers.  my , 
mine 


σός,-  ή,-  όν,  poss.  pron.  of  the 
second  pers.,  thy ,  thine 
ήμέτερος,  -a,  -ov,  pOSS.  pron.  of 
the  first  pers.,  our 
ύμέτερος,  -a,  -ov,  poss.  pron.  of 
the  second  pers.,  your 


373.  The  declension  of  the  perfect  active  participle 
of  λύω  is 


Nom. 
Gen.l 
Abl. 
Loc. 
Ins. 
Dat. 
Acc. 


Nom. 
Gen.  1 
Abl.  J 
Loc.  1 
Ins. 

Dat.  J 

Acc. 


Singular 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

λελυκώς 

λελυκυϊα 

λελυκός 

λελυκότος 

λελυκυίας 

λελυκότος 

λελυκότι 

λελυκυίςι 

λελυκότι 

λελυκότα 

λελυκυΐαν 

λελυκός 

Plural 

λελυκότες 

λελυκυίαι 

λελυκότα 

λελυκότων 

λελυκυιών 

λελυκότων 

λελυκόσι 

λελυκυίαις 

λελυκόσι 

λελυκότας 

λελυκυίας 

λελυκότα 

PERFECT  MIDDLE 


155 


Observe:  I.  The  perfect  act.  part,  is  made  on  the 
perfect  act.  stem.  2.  In  the  masc.  and  neut.  it  is 
declined  according  to  the  third  declension,  and  in 
the  fern,  according  to  the  first  declension.  3.  The 
accent  seemingly  is  irregular. 

374.  The  second  perfect  act.  part,  is  made  on  the 
second  perfect  act.  stem,  and  is  commonly  declined 
like  λελυκώς,  -κυΐα,  -κός.  Thus, 


Present 

Second  perf. 

Second  perf.  part. 

λαμβάνω 

εϊληφα 

είληφώς,  -φυΐα,-φός 

376.  The  perfect  indicative  middle  and  passive 

λυω  is: 

Singular 

Plural 

I.  λέλυμαί 

I.  λελυμεθα 

2.  λέλυσαι 

2.  λέλυσθε 

3.  λέλυταε 

3.  λέλυνται 

Perf.  midd.  and  pass,  infinitive,  λελυσθαι 

Observe:  1.  The  stem  of  the  perf.  middle  and 
pass,  is  the  reduplicated  verb-stem.  2.  The  primary 
middle  personal  endings  are  attached  directly  to 
the  reduplicated  verb-stem.  3.  There  is  no  the¬ 
matic  vowel. 

a.  The  translations  I  have  loosed  (for)  myself 
(midd.)  and  I  have  been  loosed  (pass.)  do  not  give 
accurately  the  meaning  of  the  perfect  tense  in  Greek. 

376.  Verbs  with  stems  in  a  short  vowel  (α,  ε,  o) 
lengthen  the  vowel  (as  in  the  fut.,  aor.,  etc.)  before 
the  personal  endings,  as, 

τληρόω,  χεχλή  ρωμαι ;  θεάομαι,  τεθέαμαι. 


156 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


377.  Of  verbs  with  stems  in  a  labial  mute  (x,  β,  φ), 
a  palatal  mute  (κ,  γ,  χ),  a  liquid  (λ,  p),  or  a  nasal  (μ,  v), 
the  third  pers.  sing,  only  of  the  perf.  middle  and 
passive  occurs  in  the  New  Testament.  Of  verbs 
with  stems  in  a  lingual  mute  (τ,  δ,  Θ)  the  first  and 
third  pers.  sing,  and  the  first  pers.  plur.  occur  in  the 
New  Testament.  See  p.  240,  §  31. 

378.  The  pluperfect  indicative  middle  (and  passive) 
is  formed  by  adding  the  secondary  middle  endings 
to  the  perfect  middle  stem.  Sometimes  there  is  also 
an  augment.  The  pluperf.  indie,  middle  third  pers. 
plur.  of  λύω  is  (έ)λέλυντο.  The  pluperfect  indie, 
middle  (and  passive)  of  verbs  with  stems  in  a  con¬ 
sonant  is  so  rare  that  the  forms  are  not  given  here. 

379.  The  perfect  middle  (and  passive)  participle  is 
formed  by  adding  the  middle  participle  endings, 
-μένος,  -μένη,  -μένον,  to  the  perfect  middle  stem.  Thus 
the  perfect  middle  (and  passive)  participle  of  λύω  is: 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

λελυμένος  λελυμένη  λελυμένον 

With  the  exception  of  the  accent,  it  is  declined  like 
other  participles  in  μένος,  -η,  -ον. 

380.  It  needs  to  be  remembered  that  perfective 
action  runs  through  the  whole  perfect  tense,  and 
that  Aktionsart  of  the  verb-stem  modifies  the  tense 
action. 

The  perf.  participle,  then,  may  represent  a  state 
or  a  completed  action.  The  time  of  the  perf.  part, 
is  relative  to  the  time  of  the  principal  verb.  The 
action  of  the  participle  may  be: 


CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES 


157 


1.  Coincident  with  that  of  the  principal  verb;  e.g., 

είδον  η  δη  αύτδν  τεθνηκότα,  they  saw  that  he  was  already 
dead. 

2.  Antecedent  to  that  of  the  principal  verb;  e.g., 

πολλοί  τών  χεχιστευκότων  ήρχοντο,  many  of  those  having 
believed  were  coming. 

The  perf.  part,  may  be  used  in  any  of  the  con¬ 
structions  in  which  other  participles  are  used. 

381.  The  second  class  conditional  sentence.  It  is 
the  condition  determined  as  unfulfilled.  The  con¬ 
dition  is  assumed  to  be  contrary  to  fact.  The  thing 
in  itself  may  be  true,  but  it  is  treated  as  untrue. 
The  condition  has  only  to  do  with  the  statement , 
not  with  the  actual  fact.  The  condition  has  ει  -j-  a 
past  tense  of  the  indicative;  the  conclusion  has  a 
past  tense  of  the  indicative  usually  with  άν. 

αν  cannot  be  really  translated  into  English.  It 
seems  to  have  a  definite  sense,  in  that  case ,  and 
an  indefinite  sense.  It  is  a  particle  used  to  give  more 
color  to  the  mode  with  which  it  occurs. 

1.  The  imperf.  ind.  is  used  in  unfulfilled  condi¬ 
tions  about  present  time;  e.g., 

εί  ήν  δ  προφήτης,  έγινωσκεν  αν,  if  he  were  the  prophet ,  he 
woidd  know. 

2.  The  aorist  ind.  or  pluperf.  ind.  is  used  in  un¬ 
fulfilled  conditions  about  past  time;  e.g., 

ei  γάρ  εγνιοσαν,  οόκ  αν  τον  κύριον  τής  δόξης  έσταύρωσαν, 
for  if  they  had  known ,  they  would  not  have  crucified 
the  Lord  of  glory. 

a.  Sometimes  one  tense  occurs  in  one  clause, 


158 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


another  tense  in  the  other  clause,  b.  Each  tense  has 
its  proper  kind  of  action,  c.  The  negative  with  the 
protasis  (if-clause)  is  μή,  with  the  apodosis  ού. 

382.  Exercises 

I.  I.  όπεκρίθη  δ  ’Ιησούς  ’Αμήν  αμήν  λέγω  σοι,  έάν  μή 
τις  γεννηθή  έξ  υδατος  καί  πνεύματος,  ου  δύναται  είσελθεΐν 
είς  τήν  βασιλείαν  τού  θεού,  τδ  γεγεννημένον  έκ  τής  σαρκδς 
σαρξ  έστιν,  καί  τδ  γεγεννημένον  έκ  τού  πνεύματος  πνεύμα 
έστιν.  2.  έν  τούτψ  ή  οιγάπη  τού  θεού  τετελείωται.  3· 
ήμών  έξήλθαν,  άλλ’  ούκ  ήσαν  έξ  ήμών.  εί  γάρ  έξ  ήμών  ήσαν, 
μεμενήκεισαν  αν  μεθ’  ήμών.  φ  γέγραπται  έν  τώ  νόμω  καί  τοΐς 
προφήταις.  5·  ήμεΐζ  δέ  κηρύσσομεν  Χριστδν  έσταυρωμένον. 

II.  ι.  If  we  had  seen  him,  we  would  have  loved 
him.  2.  The  days  have  been  fulfilled.  3.  We 
receive  those  who  have  believed  on  the  Lord. 


LESSON  XLV 

Reflexive  Pronoun.  Reciprocal  Pronoun. 
Indefinite  Relative  Pronoun 

383.  Vocabulary 

έλπίζω,  I  hope  b  πλησίον,  neighbor 

μυστήριον,  τό,  mystery  ταπεινόω,  I  make  low , 

πλησίον,  adv.,  near  humble 

384.  The  reflexive  pronouns  are: 

έμαυτοΰ,  -ής,  myself  σεαυτού,  -ής,  thyself 

έαυτού, -ής, -ού  (rarely  αυτού, -ής, -ού),  himself ,  herself , 

itself 


REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 


159 


They  are  declined  as  follows: 

I.  First  person: 

Singular  Plural 


Gen. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem . 

Abl. 

Loc. 

-  έμαυτου 

έμαυτής 

έαυτών 

έαυτών 

Ins. 

Dat. 

*  έμαυτφ 

έμαυτγ) 

έαυτοΐς 

έαυταΐς 

Acc. 

έμαυτόν 

έμαυτήν 

έαυτούς 

έαυτάς 

2.  Second  person: 

Singular  Plural 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Gen.  ] 

Abl. 

Loc. 

*σεαυτου 

σεαυτής 

εαυτών 

έαυτών 

Ins. 
Dat.  , 

"σεαυτφ 

σεαυτ-fi 

έαυτοΐς 

έαυταΐς 

Acc. 

σεαυτόν 

σεαυτήν 

έαυτούς  έαυτάς 

3.  Third  person: 

Singular 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Gen.  ] 
Abl. 

j 

Loc. 

*έαυτου 

έαυτής 

έαυτου 

Ins. 

'έαυτφ 

έαυτη 

έαυτφ 

Dat.  „ 


Acc.  έαυτόν 


έαυτήν 


έαυτό 


160 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Masc. 

Plural 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Gen. 

Abl. 

"εαυτών 

εαυτών 

έαυτών 

Loc. 

Ins. 

"έαυτοϊς 

έαυταΐς 

έαυτοϊς 

Dat. 

Acc. 

έαυτοός 

έαυτάς 

έαυτά 

Observe:  I.  These  pronouns  occur  in  the  oblique 
cases  only.  2.  They  are  formed  from  the  personal 
pronouns  plus  αυτός.  3.  There  is  no  neuter  gender 
in  the  reflexive  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second 
persons.  4.  The  plural  form  is  the  same  for  all 
three  persons. 

385.  Examine  carefully  the  following  examples  of 
the  use  of  the  reflexive  pronouns. 

1.  έγώ  δοξάζω  έμαυτόν,  I  glorify  myself. 

2.  έχει  ζωήν  εν  έαυτώ,  he  has  life  in  himself. 

3.  τί  λέγεις  περί  σεαυτοΰ;  what  dost  thou  say  concerning 

thyself? 

4.  αυτοί  έν  έαυτοϊς  στενάζομεν,Τ^  ourselves  groan  Within 

ourselves. 

In  these  examples  it  is  seen  that  the  pronoun 
refers  back  to  the  subject  of  the  clause,  hence  the 
name  reflexive. 

386.  The  reciprocal  pronoun  is  άλλήλων,  of  one 
another.  It  occurs  in  the  New  Testament  only  in 
the  masculine  forms  άλλήλων,  άλλήλοις,  άλλήλους.  No 
fern,  and  neut.  forms  occur. 

έλεγον  πρός  άλλήλους,  they  said  to  one  another . 


INDEFINITE  RELATIVE 


161 


387.  οίδα,  I  know ,  an  old  perfect  with  a  present 
(durative)  meaning  is  conjugated  in  the  indicative 
active  as  follows: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  οίδα,  I  know,  I.  οί'δαμεν 

2.  οιδας  etc.  2.  οίδατε 

3·  οι  δε  3·  ο’ίδασι 

Infinitive,  είδέναι 

388.  The  forms  of  the  (indefinite)  relative  pronoun 
δστις,  ητις,  δτι,  given  below  are  the  forms  found 
in  the  New  Testament. 


Singular 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 

δστις 

ήτις 

δτι 

Acc. 

Plural 

δτι 

Nom. 

οίτινες 

αίτινες 

άτινα 

a.  An  old  form  δτου  (gen.)  is  found  in  certain  set 
phrases. 

This  pronoun  is  made  from  the  relative  δς  and 
the  indefinite  τις.  It  is  used  with  the  meanings 
“anyone”  (indefinite)  and  “ somebody  ”  in  particular 
(definite),  i.e.,  “whoever”  (indef.)  and  “who”  (def.). 

389.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έμέ  οίδατε  καί  οίδατε  χόθεν  είμί.  καί  αχ’  έμαυτου 
ούκ  έλήλυθα,  άλλ’  εστιν  αληθινός  ό  χέμψας  με,  δν  υμείς 
ούκ  οίδατε.  2.  καί  υχέρ  αυτών  έγώ  αγιάζω  έμαυτόν. 
3·  αγαπήσεις  τόν  πλησίον  σου  ώς  σεαυτόν.  οστις  ουν 

ταπεινώσει  έαυτόν  ώς  τό  χαιδίον  τούτο,  ουτός  έστιν  ό  μείζων 
(greatest)  έν  τη  βασιλείς  των  ουρανών.  5·  °ΰ  Υ^ρ  εαυτούς 


162 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


κηρύσσομεν  άλλα  Χριστόν  ΊησοΟν  Κύριον,  έαυτούς  δέ 
δούλους  υμών  διά  ΊησοΟν.  6.  καί  χολλοί  μισήσουσιν 
άλλήλους. 

II.  ι.  You  shall  love  one  another.  2.  I  have  not 
spoken  concerning  myself.  3.  We  preached  not  our¬ 
selves,  but  Christ.  4.  They  said  that  he  made  him¬ 
self  the  son  of  God. 


LESSON  XL VI 

Future  and  Aorist  Active  and  Middle  of  Liquid  Verbs 


390.  Vocabulary 


άχοκτείνω,  I  kill ,  slay  χρόβατον,  τό,  sheep 

έκτείνω,  I  stretch  out  σωτηρία,  ή,  salvation 

κράβαττος,  ό,  pallet}  bed  δφείλω,  I  owe ,  ought ;  (sec. 

aorist  without  augment, 
δφελον) 

391.  Verbs  with  stems  in  a  liquid  (λ,  v,  p)  form  the 
futures  by  adding  -ε  ο/ε1  the  stem.  The  ε  of  the 
suffix  contracts  with  the  thematic  vowel  o/e.  (Re¬ 
member  that  the  present  stem  is  not  always  the 
same  as  the  verb-stem.) 


392.  The  conjugation  of  κρίνω  in  the  future  indica¬ 
tive  is: 


Singular 

1.  κρίνω  (κρινέω) 

2.  κρίνεις  (κρινέεις) 
3·  κρίνει  (κρινέει) 


Active 

Plural 

1.  κρινουμεν  (κρινέομεν) 

2.  κρινεΐτε  (κρινέετε) 

3·  κρινούσι  (κρινέουσι) 


1  Originally  -εσ°/ε.  σ  was  expelled. 


f 


FUTURE  OF  LIQUID  VERBS 


163 


Middle 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  χρινουμοκ  (κρίνέομαι) 

2.  κρ ινη  (κρ^νέγ)) 

3·  κρινεΐται  (κρινέεται) 


1.  κρίνο υμεθα  (κρινεόμεθα) 

2.  κρινεΐσθε  (κρενέεσθε) 

3·  κρινουνταε  (κρινέονται) 


Observe  that  when  one  of  the  uncontracted  sylla¬ 
bles  has  an  accent  the  contracted  form  has  an  accent 
(the  circumflex,  if  possible). 

a.  The  uncontracted  forms  do  not  occur.  They 
are  given  to  exhibit  the  vowels  that  are  con¬ 
tracted. 

b.  Table  of  the  vowel  contractions. 


ε  +  ο  =  ου 
ε  +  ου  =  ου 


ε  +  ω  =  ω 
ε  +  ει  =  ει 
ε  +  ε  +  ει 


393.  Verbs  with  stems  in  a  liquid  form  the  aorist 
active  and  middle  by  lengthening  the  stem  vowel 
and  adding  -a.1  a  of  the  stem  is  lengthened  to  η 
(but  ά  before  p),  s  to  ει,  X  to  i  and  ΰ  to  ΰ. 
The  conjugation  through  all  the  modes,  infinitives, 
and  participles  is  like  the  regular  first  aorist;  thus 
the  aor.  ind.  act.  of  μένω  is  εμεινα,  etc. ;  the  subj., 
μείνω,  etc.;  infinitive,  μεΐναι  part.,  μείνας.  The  aor. 
ind.  middle  of  κρίνω  is  έκρινάμην,  etc.  Notice  that 
these  verbs  have  no  σ  in  the  aorist. 

394.  Liquid  verbs  may  have  a  second  aorist,  as 
βάλλω  (βαλ-),  εβαλον. 


1  Originally  σ  was  expelled  after  a  liquid. 


164 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


395.  Learn  the  stem,  the  future,  and  aorist  of  the 


following 

verbs : 

Present 

Stem 

Future 

Aorist  act 

αγγέλλω 

άγγελ- 

άγγελώ 

ήγγειλα 

a?  ρω 

άρ- 

άρώ 

ήρα 

άχοκτείνω 

(άχο)κτεν- 

άχοκτενώ 

άχέκτεινα 

άχοστέλλω 

(άχο)στελ- 

άχοστελώ 

άχέστειλα 

βάλλω 

βαλ- 

βαλώ 

εβαλον 

έγειρω 

έγερ- 

έγερώ 

ήγειρα 

Of  course  the.compound  forms  of  these  verbs  form 
their  tenses  in  the  same  way  as  the  uncompounded 
forms,  as 


έχαγγέλλω,  έχαγγελώ,  έχήγγειλα 

άχοκτείνω  and  άχοστέλλω  are  compound  verbs. 

396.  The  tenses  of  the  verb  in  Greek  are  divided 
into  nine  tense-systems.  As  we  have  seen  each 
tense-system  has  a  distinct  stem,  called  tense-stem. 

Systems  Tenses 

I.  Present,  including  present  and  imperfect  in  all 

voices. 

future  active  and  middle, 
first  aorist  act.  and  middle 
(and  liquid  aorists  also), 
second  aorist  act.  and 
middle. 

first  perfect  and  pluperf. 
active. 

second  perfect  and  pluperf. 
active. 


2.  Future, 

3.  First  aorist, 

4.  Second  aorist, 

5.  First  perfect, 

6.  Second  perfect, 


<  < 


(< 


u 


n 


u 


TENSE-SYSTEMS 


165 


7.  Perfect  middle,  including  perfect  and  pluperf. 

middle  and  passive 
(and  future  perfect). 

8.  First  passive,  “  first  aorist  and  future 

passive. 

9.  Second  passive,  “  second  aorist  and  future 

passive. 

a.  Most  verbs  have  only  six  of  these  nine  systems, 
since  very  few  verbs  have  both  the  first  and  second 
forms  of  the  same  tense;  many  verbs  have  less  than 
six.  No  verb  occurring  in  the  New  Testament  is 
used  in  all  nine  systems. 

397.  The  principal  parts  of  a  Greek  verb  are  the 
first  person  singular  indicative  of  every  system  used 
in  it;  e.g., 

λύω,  λύσω,  έλυσα,  λέλυκα,  λέλυμαι,  έλύθην. 
βάλλω,  βαλώ,  έβαλον,  βέβληκα,  βέβλημαι,  έβλήθην. 
γίνομαι,  γενήσομαι,  έγενόμην,  γέγονα,  γεγένημαι,  έγενήθην. 

To  know  a  verb  one  must  know  its  principal  parts. 

398.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καθώςέμέ  άχέστειλας  εις  τον  κόσμον,  κάγώ1  άχέστειλα 
αυτούς  εις  τον  κόσμον,  καί  ύχέρ  αυτών  έγώ  αγιάζω  έμαυτόν, 
?να  καί  αυτοί  ώσιν  ηγιασμένοι  έν  άληθεία.  2.  δ  έγείρας  τον 
Τησοΰν  καί  ημάς  συν  ’Ιησού2  έγερεϊ.  3·  άχοκτενούσιν 
αυτόν,  καί  τη  τρίτη  ημέρα  έγερθήσεται.  έν  ύμίν  μείνη 

δ  άχ’  άρχής  ήκούσατε,  καί3  υμείς  έν  τφ  υίφ  καί3  έν  τφ  χατρί 
μενεΐτε.  5·  ή?2  τ^ν  κράβαττον  αύτοΰ.  6.  έξήλθεν  δ 

σχείρων  τού  σχείραι. 

1  κάγώ  =  καί  έγώ,  see  §  4· 

2  Associative-ins.  case.  3  See  καί  .  .  .  καί  in  415° 


166 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


II.  i.  They  sought  to  kill  him.  2.  The  disciples 
sowed  the  word.  3.  I  will  send  unto  them  prophets 
and  apostles.  4.  If  we  remain  in  the  truth,  the 
truth  will  remain  in  us. 


LESSON  XL VII 

The  Imperative  Mode 

399.  Vocabulary 

άρχομαι,  I  begin  νηστεύω,  I  fast 

ναός,  δ,  temple  υποκριτής-,  -ου,  δ,  pretender , 

hypocrite 

400.  The  imperative  is  comparatively  a  late  develop¬ 
ment  in  Greek.  More  of  its  forms  came  from  an 
old  injunctive  mode  than  from  any  other  source. 

401.  The  personal  endings  of  the  imperative  are: 

Active 

Singular  .  Plural 

2.  — ,  -θι,  -ς  -τε 

3.  -τω.  -τωσαν. 

Middle  (and  Passive) 

2.  -σο  -σθε 

3·  -σθω  -σθωσαν. 

α.  -θι  (probably  an  old  adverb)  is  found  in  a  few 
old  verbs,  and,  except  in  the  aor.  pass.,  is  not  used 
in  the  active  forms  of  the  imperative  of  most  verbs. 
The  ending  -ς  is  found  only  in  a  few  old  verbs. 
b.  -τω  is  probably  an  old  ablative  form  of  a  demon¬ 
strative  pronoun. 


IMPERATIVE  MODE 


167 


402.  The  present  imperative  active,  middle,  and 
passive  is  made  on  the  present  tense-stem.  See  396. 

403.  The  present  active  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λΟε,  loose  (thou)  2.  λύετε,  loose  (ye) 

3.  λυέτω,  let  him  loose  3.  λυέτωσαν,  let  them  loose 

a.  λύε  is  the  verb-stem  with  the  thematic  vowel 
e.  Note  the  thematic  vowel  ε  in  all  persons. 

404.  The  present  middle  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λύου,  loose  (for)  thyself  2.  λύεσθε,  loose  (for)  your¬ 

self 

3.  λυέσθω,  let  him  loose  3.  λυέσθωσαν,  let  them  loose 

(for)  himself  (for)  themselves 

a.  λύου  is  for  λύεσο,  σ  is  expelled,  and  ε  and  0 
contract  to  ou. 

405.  The  present  passive  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λύου,  be  (thou)  loosed  2.  λύεσθε,  be  (ye)  loosed 

3.  λυέσθω,  let  him  be  loosed  3.  λυέσθωσαν,  let  them  be 

loosed 

Observe  that  the  pres,  passive  imperative  is  like 
the  pres,  middle  in  form. 

406.  The  second  aorist  active  imperative  of  βάλλω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  βάλε  2.  βάλετε 

3.  βαλέτω  3·  βαλέτωσαν 


168 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


a.  The  second  pers.  sing,  of  some  second  aorists 
is  accented  on  the  ultima,  as  elx έ,  έλθ'έ,  ευ ps ; 
accent  of  imps,  recessive,  b.  No  augment. 


Plural 

2.  βάλεσθε 

3.  βαλέσθωσαν 


Singular 
2.  βαλοΰ 
3·  βαλέσθω 


a.  Note  the  accent  of  βαλοΰ. 

Observe  that  in  the  endings  the  imperative  of  the 
second  aor.  act.  and  middle  is  like  that  of  the  present 
act.  and  middle.  The  difference  between  them  is 
the  difference  in  tense-stem:  the  present  tense- 
stem  is  βαλλ-,  the  second  aorist  tense-stem  is  βαλ-. 

408.  The  imperative,  like  the  subjunctive,  is  always 
future  in  time,  though  it  may  apply  to  the  immediate 
future. 

The  difference  in  meaning  between  the  present 
imperative  and  the  aorist  imperative  is  in  the  kind  of 
action , — durative  action  in  the  present,  and  punctiliar 
action  in  the  aorist.  The  pres,  imperative,  then,  has 
to  do  with  action  in  progress.  The  aorist  imperative 
has  to  do  with  the  simple  act  without  regard  to 
progress.  E.g., 

βάλλε  λίθους,  keep  on  (or  go  on)  throwing  stones. 
μή  βάλλε,  stop  (or  quit)  throwing  stones. 
εισελθε  είς  τον  οίκον,  enter  the  house. 
μή  είσέλθης  εις  τον  οίκον,  do  not  (do  not  begin  to)  enter 
the  house. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  first  and  second  exam¬ 
ples  (present)  have  reference  to  the  continuance  of 


IMPERATIVE  MODE 


169 


the  action,  while  the  third  and  fourth  examples 
(aorist)  have  reference  to  the  simple  act.  In  the 
second  example  μή  with  the  pres,  imperative  forbids 
the  continuance  of  the  action;  while  in  the  fourth 
example  μή  with  the  aor.  subjunctive  forbids  the 
beginning  (ingressive)  of  the  action.  In  the  second 
example  the  action  is  going  on;  in  the  fourth  example 
the  action  has  not  begun.  Thus  Aktionsart  must 
be  considered.  In  prohibitions  to  forbid  a  thing  not 
yet  done  the  aor.  subj.  (not  the  imperative)  is 
used  with  μή  (see  fourth  example  above) . 

409.  The  first  aorist  act.  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λύσον  2.  λύσατε 

3.  λυσάτω  3·  λυσάτωσαν 

a.  The  origin  of  -ον  of  the  second  pers.  sing,  is 
obscure. 

Observe  that  the  stem  is  the  aorist  stem  λυσα-. 

410.  The  first  aorist  middle  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λΰσαί  2.  λύσασθε 

3.  λυσάσθω  3·  λυσάσθωσαν 

a.  The  second  pers.  sing,  ending  -at  probably  came 
from  the  aorist  infinitive.  Note  accent,  βάπτισαι. 

411.  The  aorist  passive  imperative  of  λύω  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  λύθητί,  be  ( thou )  loosed,  2.  λύθητε 
3·  λυθήτω  etc.  3·  λυΟήτωσαν 

a.  -τι  of  the  second  pers.  sing,  was  -0t.  Θ  was 
changed  to  τ  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  rough  mute. 


170 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Observe  that  the  forms  are  made  on  the  aor.  pass. 
Stem  λυθε(η). 

412.  In  the  imperative  in  Greek  there  is  no  first 
person  form.  In  the  first  person  the  subjunctive 
is  used  instead  of  the  imperative. 

413.  The  original  significance  of  the  imperative  was 
demand  or  exhortation;  but  it  was  not  confined  to 
this  idea. 

The  imperative  is  used  in : 

1.  Commands  or  exhortations — 

άκουέτω,  let  him  hear. 

ε’ίσελθε  είς  τδν  οίκον,  enter  the  house. 

2.  Prohibitions — 

μή  κρίνετε  quit  {don't  go  on)  judging 

3.  Entreaties — 

πάτερ  άγιε,  τή ρήσον  αύτους  έν  τώ  όνόματί  σου,  Holy  Father , 
keep  them  in  thy  name. 

Note. — The  negative  of  the  imperative  is  μή. 

414.  Exercises 

I.  I.  μή  κρίνετε  Υνα  μή  κριθήτε.  2.  άγιασθήτω  τδ  ονομά 
σου,  έλθάτω  ή  βασιλεία  σου,  γενηθήτω  το  θέλημά  σου,  ώς  έν 
ουρανώ  καί  έπί  γης.  3·  ^ταν  δέ  νηστεύητε,  μή  γίνεσθε  ώς 
οί  υποκριταί  σκυθρωποί.1  φ  ο  εχων  ώτα  άκουειν  άκουέτω. 
5·  πορεύθητι  πρ6ς  τον  λαόν  τούτον.  6.  άρθητι  καί  βλήθητι 
είς  τήν  θάλασσαν.  7·  ^«έγει  αυτώ  Έρχου  καί  ιδε. 

II.  ι.  Let  him  depart.  2.  Guard  thyself  from 
the  evil  one.  3.  Say  to  this  people  all  the  words  of 
this  life.  4.  Quit  saying  evil  things. 

1  σκυθρωχός,  adj.,  of  a  gloomy  countenance. 


NUMERALS 


171 


LESSON  XL VIII 
Numerals,  ουδείς 


415.  Vocabulary 

διψάω,  I  thirst  πάλιν,  adv.,  again 


καί .  .  .  καί,  both — and 

πεινάω,  I  hunger ,  am  hun - 

μήτε .  .  .  μήτε,  neither — nor 

gry 

ούκέτι,  no  longer ,  no  more 

πώποτε,  ever  yet 

οϋτε.  .  .ούτε,  neither — nor 

τέ.  .  . καί,  both — and 

416.  Learn  the  numerals 

(cardinal  and  ordinal) 

from  one  (first)  to  twelve  (twelfth). 

Cardinals 

Ordinals 

1.  είς,  one ,  etc. 

πρώτος,  first,  etc. 

2.  δύο 

δεύτερος 

3·  τρεις 

τρίτος 

4·  τέσσαρες 

τέταρτος 

5·  πέντε 

πέμπτος 

6.  εξ 

έκτος 

7·  επτά 

έβδομος 

8.  δκτώ 

ογδοος 

9.  έννέα 

ένατος 

ΙΟ.  δέκα 

δέκατος 

II.  εν  δέκα 

ενδέκατος 

12.  δώδεκα 

δωδέκατος 

δεκαδύο 

Other  numerals  may  be  learned  from  a  lexicon  as 
they  are  needed. 

417.  The  ordinals  have  the  regular  terminations  of 
adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions,  as 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


172 

τρίτος  (masc.),  τρίτη  (fern.),  τρίτον  (neut.),  and  are 
so  declined. 

418.  The  cardinals  are  indeclinable,  except  the 
first  four  and  from  200  onward. 

The  first  four  are  declined  as  follows: 


I.  είς,  μία, 

Masc., 

εν,  one 

Fem.  Neut. 

2.  δυο,  two 

Masc.,  Fem.,  and  Neut . 

Nom. 

είς 

μία 

V 

εν 

Nom. 

δυο 

Gen.  ] 
Abl. 

-  ενός 

μιας 

ενός 

Gen. 

Abl. 

-  δύο 

Loc. 

Ins. 

”  ένί 

μια 

ένί 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  δυσί 

Dat.  J 
Ace. 

ενα 

μίαν 

έν 

Dat.  „ 
Ace. 

δύο. 

3.  τρεις,  τρία,  three 

4.  τέσσαρες, 

τέσσαρα,  four 

Masc.  and  Fem.  Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fem.  Neut. 

Nom. 

τρεις 

τρία 

Nom. 

τέσσαρες  τέσσαρα 

Gen.  ' 
Abl. 

-  τριών 

τριών 

Gen. 

Abl. 

-  τεσσάρων  τεσσάρων 

Loc. 

Ins. 

>■  τρισί 

τρισί 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  τέσσαρσι  τέσσαρσι 

Dat.  _ 
Ace. 

τρεις 

τρία 

Dat. 

Ace. 

τέσσαρας  τέσσαρα. 

These  cardinals  agree  with  the  substantives  with 
which  they  are  used. 


419.  The  declension  of  ούδείς,  ούδεμία,  ούδέν,  no  one 
{nobody) ,  nothing ,  is: 


NEGATIVES 


173 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Nom. 
Gen.  ' 

ουδείς 

ούδεμία 

ουδέν 

Abl. 

/ 

Loc. 

ούδενός 

ουδεμιάς 

ουδενός 

Ins. 

Dat. 

κ  ούδενί 

ούδεμιόί 

οόδενί 

Acc. 

ουδένα 

ουδεμίαν 

ουδέν 

Like  ούδεις  is  declined  μηδείς,  μηδεμία,  μηδέν,  no  one , 
nothing,  μη  δεις  is  generally  used  wherever  μή  would 
be  the  appropriate  negative. 

420.  A  negative  sentence  in  Greek  may  have  more 
than  one  negative  particle.  In  Greek  the  succession 
of  negatives  merely  strengthens  the  first  negative 
if  the  second  (and  third)  is  a  compound  form  like 
ουδέ,  ούδείς,  ουχω,  μηδείς,  etc.,  e.g., 

μη  δεν*  μηδέν  όφείλετε,  owe  no  one  anything. 

421.  ου  and  μή  are  used  in  direct  questions  to 
indicate  the  kind  of  answer  expected. 

1 .  ο  u  expects  the  answer  yes. 

ou  τώ  δνόματι  έχροφητευσαμεν;  Did  we  not  prophesy  by 
thy  name? 

2.  μή  expects  the  answer  no. 

χαιδία,  μή  τι  χροσφάγιον  έχετε;  Little  children ,  have  you 
anything  to  eat?  ( You  haven't  anything  to  eat , 
have  you?) 

422.  ou  μή  is  used  with  the  aorist  subjunctive  (rarely 
present)  or  occasionally  the  future  ind.  in  the  sense 
of  an  emphatic  negative  future  indicative. 


174 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


καί  τον  έρχόμενον  τυρός  με  ού  μή  έκβάλω  εξω,  and  him  who 
comes  to  me  I  will  not  cast  out. 

423.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καί  ούκ  εφαγεν  ούδέν  έν  ταϊς  ήμέραις  έκείναις,  καί 
συντελεσθεισών  αυτών  έπείνασεν.  2.  ο υ δεις  δύναται  δυσί 
κυ ρίους  δουλεύειν,  τδν  γάρ  ενα  μισήσει  καί  τδν  ετερον  αγαπή¬ 
σει.  3·  δ  Ερχόμενος  προς  έμέ  ού  μή  πεινάση,  καί  ό  πιστεύων 
είς  έμέ  ού  μή  διψήσει  πώποτε.  4·  είπεν  ούν  δ  ’Ιησούς  τοϊς 
δώδεκα  Μ  ή  καί  ύμεις  θέλετε  ύχάγειν;  5·  ούκ  είμί  έλεύθερος ; 
ούκ  είμί  απόστολος;  6.  δ  θεός  φώς  έστιν  καί  σκοτία  ούκ 
εστιν  έν  αύτώ  ούδεμία.  7·  ο ύ δεις  αγαθός  εί  μή 1  είς  δ 
θεός.  8.  ούτε  έμέ  οίδατε  ούτε  τόν  πατέρα  μου. 

II.  ι.  Let  no  one  enter  the  house.  2.  Did  he 
not  see  me?  3.  I  will  not  serve  him.  4.  Is  he  able 
to  serve  two  masters? 

•  j 

LESSON  XLIX 

Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs  in  -έω. 

•I 

424.  Vocabulary 

άρνέομαι,  I  deny  οίκοδομέω,  I  build 

δοκέω,  I  think ,  suppose;  im-  δμολογέω,  I  agree  with , 

pers.  it  seems  confess 

θεωρέω,  I  look  at,  gaze,  see  περιπατέω,  I  walk  (live) 

μετανοέω,  I  repent  φιλέω,  I  love 

425.  The  conjugation  of  verbs  with  stems  in  α,  ε,  or 
0,  has  been  given  in  all  tenses  except  the  present  and 
imperfect.  The  conjugation  of  these  verbs  (stems 
in  α,  ε,  or  0)  differs  from  that  of  regular  ω-  verbs  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  only. 

1  εί  μή  (or  εάν  μή)  with  a  substantive  means  except. 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


175 


426.  In  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses  the  vowel 
(α,  ε,  or  o)  of  the  stem  unites  with  the  thematic 
vowel  (and  in  some  forms  the  personal  ending  also) 
and  forms  a  diphthong  or  a  single  long  vowel.  This 
is  called  contraction. 

427.  The  conjugation  of  φιλέω  in  the  present  system 
is  as  follows: 

I .  The  present  indicative : 


Active 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  φιλώ  (φιλέω) 

2.  φιλείς  (φιλέεις) 
3·  φιλει  (φιλέει) 


1.  φιλουμεν  (φιλέομεν) 

2.  φιλείτε  (φιλέετε) 

3·  φιλοΰσι  (φιλέουσι) 


Middle  and  Passive 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  φιλουμαι  (φιλέομαι) 

2.  φίλη  (φιλέη) 

3·  φιλεΐται  (φιλέεται) 


1.  φιλουμεθα  (φιλεόμεθα) 

2.  φιλείσθε  (φιλέεσθε) 

3·  φιλουνται  (φιλέονται) 


2.  The  present  subjunctive: 

Active 


Singular 


Plural 

I.  φιλώμεν  (φιλέωμεν) 


1.  φιλώ  (φιλέω) 

2.  φίλης  (φιλέης) 
3·  φίλη  (φιλέη) 


2.  φιλήτε  (φιλέητε) 
3·  φιλώσι  (φιλέωσι) 


Middle  and  Passive 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  φιλώμοα  (φιλέωμαι) 

2.  [φίλη  (φιλέη)] 

3·  φιλήται  (φιλέηται) 


1.  φιλώμεθα  (φιλεώμεθα) 

2.  φιλήσθε  (φιλέησθε) 

3·  φιλώνται  (φιλέωνται) 


176 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


3.  The  present  imperative: 

Active 

Singular  Plural 

2.  φίλει  (φίλεε)  2.  φιλεΐτε  (φιλέετε) 

φιλείτω  (φιλεέτω)  3·  φιλείτωσαν  (φιλεέτωσαν) 

Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

2.  φίλου  (φιλέου)  2.  φιλεϊσθε  (φιλέεσθε) 

3·  φιλείσθω  (φιλεέσθω)  3·  φιλείσθωσαν  (φιλεέσθωσαν) 

4·  The  present  infinitive: 

ACTIVE  φιλεΐν  (φιλέειν) 


Middle  and  Passive  φιλείσθαι  (φιλέεσθαι) 


5.  The  present  participle: 

Active 

φιλών  (φιλέων),  φιλούσα  (φιλέουσα),  φιλούν  (φιλέον) 


Middle  and  Passive 


φιλούμενος,  -η,  -ον  (φιλεόμενος,  -η,  -ον) 


6.  The  imperfect  indicative: 


Singular 

1.  έφίλουν  (έφίλεον) 

2.  έφίλεις  (έφίλεες) 
3·  έφίλει  (έφίλεε) 


Active 

Plural 

1.  έφιλουμεν  (έφιλέομεν) 

2.  έφιλείτε  (έφιλέετε) 

3·  έφίλουν  (έφίλεον) 


Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

1.  έφιλουμην  (έφιλεόμην)  I.  έφιλουμεθα  (έφιλεόμεθα) 

2.  έφιλοϋ  (έφιλέου)  2.  έφιλεϊσθε  (έφιλέεσθε) 

3·  έφιλεΐτο  (έφιλέετο)  3·  έφιλοΰντο  (έφιλέοντο) 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


177 


428.  The  declension  of  the  present  active  participle 
φιλών,  -ούσα,  -ούν  is: 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Abl. 

Loc. 

Ins.  - 

Dat. 

Acc. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Abl. 


Loc. 
Ins.  - 
Dat.  „ 
Acc. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Abl. 

Loc. 

Ins. 

Dat. 

Acc. 


Masc. 


Singular 

Fem. 


Neut . 


φιλών  (φιλέων)  φιλούσα  (φιλέουσα)  φιλούν  (φιλέον) 
φιλούντος  φιλούσης  like  masc. 

(φιλέοντος) 


φιλούντι  φιλούση  like  masc. 

(φιλέοντι) 


φιλούντα  φιλούσαν  φιλούν  (φιλέον) 

(φιλέοντα) 

Plural 


Masc. 

Fem. 

φιλούντες  (φιλέοντες) 

φιλούσαι  (φιλέουσαι) 

φιλούντων  (φιλεόντων) 

φιλουσών 

φιλούσι  (φιλέουσι) 

φιλοόσαις 

φιλούντας  (φιλέοντας) 

φιλούσας 

Neut. 

φιλούντα  (φιλέοντα) 

like  masc. 

like  masc. 

φιλούντα  (φιλέοντα). 

178 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


429.  The  scheme  of  contraction  for  regular  -εω  verbs 
is  as  follows: 

ε  +  ε  =  ει  ε  +  ει  =  ει 

ε  +  ο  =  ου  ε  +  7)  =  7) 

\ 

ε  +  ω  =  ω  ε  +  ου  =  ου 

430.  Observe  that:  ι.  The  syllable  resulting  from 
contraction  has  an  accent  if  either  one  of  the  com¬ 
ponent  syllables  had  an  accent  in  the  uncontracted 
form.  2.  The  accent  is  circumflex,  if  the  first  vowel 
(of  the  contracting  vowels)  had  the  acute;  but  it  is 
an  acute,  if  the  second  vowel  had  the  acute. 

431.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καλώς  χοιείτε  τοΐς  μισουσιν  υμάς.  2.  μή  θαυμά¬ 
ζετε,  άδελφοί,  εΣ  μισεί  υμάς  δ  κόσμος.  3·  ταύτα  αυτού 
λαλοΟντος  χολλοί  έχίστευσαν.  φ  δέ  ύμΐν  δοκεί;  5· 
εάν  τι  αίτώμεθα  κατά  τδ  θέλημα  αυτού  ακούει  ημών.  6.  καΣ 
μετά  ταϋτα  χεριεχάτει  ’Ιησούς  εν  τη  Γαλιλαία,  ου  γάρ 
ηθελεν  έν  τή  Ίουδαία  χεριχατείν,  ότι  έζήτουν  αυτόν  οί 
Ιουδαίοι  άχοκτεΐναι.  7·  έφο^ουντο  τον  λαόν. 

II.  ι.  Who  is  seeking  to  kill  you?  2.  He  who 
hates  his  brother  walks  in  darkness.  3.  Follow  me. 
4.  Quit  doing  these  things.  5.  They  feared  the 
crowd. 


LESSON  L 

Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs 

432.  Vocabulary 

εξεστιν,  it  is  lawful ,  is  χαλαιός,  -ά,  -όν,  old ,  ancient 

possible  χερισσός,  -ή,  -όν,  abundant 
νέος,  -α,  -ον,  young ,  new  χλούσιος,  -α,  -ον,  rich 


COMPARISON 


179 


433.  The  comparative  degree  of  an  adjective  in  -ος 
is  generally  formed  by  adding  -τερος,  -a,  -ov  to  the 
masc.  stem  of  adj.  as  found  in  the  positive  degree. 
To  form  the  superlative1  degree,  -τατος,  -η,  -ov  is  added 
to  the  masc.  stem  of  adj.  as  found  in  the  positive 
degree. 

434.  Examine  carefully  the  following  examples: 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

1.  ίσχϋρός,  -ά,  -δν,  ισχυρότερος, -α, -ον,  [ισχυρότατος, -η, -ον] 

strong  stronger  strongest 

2.  νέος,  -α,  -ον  νεώτερος,  -α,  -ον  [νεώτατος,  -η,  -ον] 

3·  σοφός,  -ή,  -όν  σοφώτερος,  -α,  -ον  [σοφώτατος,  -η,  -ον] 

a.  The  forms  enclosed  in  brackets  are  not  found 
in  the  New  Testament. 

Similarly  adjectives  in  -ες  make  the  comparison. 

4.  ασθενής,  -ές  ασθενέστερος,  -α,  -ον  [ασθενέστατος,  -η,  -ον] 

435.  Observe:  1.  If  the  penult  of  the  adjective  (with 
nom.  sing.  masc.  in  -ος)  is  short2  in  the  positive, 
the  0  of  the  stem  is  lengthened  to  ω3  in  the  com¬ 
parative  and  superlative.  2.  All  comparatives  and 
superlatives  have  recessive  accent. 

436.  The  stem  from  which  the  comparative  is  formed 
may  be  an  adverb,  e.g., 

έξω,  out  έξώτερος,  outer 

ανω,  Up ,  above  ανώτερος,  higher 

1  There  are  only  three  superlative  forms  in  -τατος  in  the  New 
Testament. 

2  A  penult,  although  its  vowel  is  short,  is  considered  long  if  its 
vowel  is  followed  by  two  consonants  or  a  double  consonant. 

3  Sometimes  -ώτερος  occurs  instead  of  -ότερος,  and  vice  versa. 


180 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


437.  With  the  comparative  degree  (of  adverbs  also) 
the  ablative  is  commonly  used  to  express  the  standard 
of  comparison,  e.g., 

τδ  μωρόν  τοΰ  θεού  σοφώτερον  των  άνθρώπων,  the  foolishness 
of  God  (is)  wiser  than  men. 

ερχεται  δέ  ό  ισχυρότερος  μου,  but  there  comes  one  stronger 
{mightier)  than  I. 

438.  The  comparative  may  be  followed  by  ή  {than), 
then  the  standard  of  comparison  is  in  the  same  case 
as  the  object  compared,  e.g., 

Σοδόμοις  έν  τή  ημέρα  έκείνη  άνεκτότερον  Ισται  η  τη  πόλει 
έκείνη,  it  will  be  more  tolerable  in  that  day  for 
Sodom  than  for  that  city. 

α.  ή  is  used  also  in  the  comparison  of  clauses. 

439.  The  superlative  form  is  rare  in  the  New  Tes¬ 
tament.  When  it  occurs,  it  generally  has,  not  the 
true  superlative  sense,  but  the  elative  sense  of  very 
or  exceedingly. 

In  the  New  Testament  the  comparative  with  the 
article  generally  performs  the  peculiar  functions  of 
the  superlative,  e.g., 

6  δέ  μικρότερος  έν  τη  βασιλεία  των  ο ύ ρ ανών,  the  least  in 
the  kingdom  of  heaven. 

440.  Adverbs  are  made  from  adjectives  also.  Note 
carefully  the  following  example. 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

Ακριβώς,  άκριβέστερον,  [ακριβέστατα] 

accurately  more  accurately  most  accurately 
adj.  άκριβιό^ 


COMPARISON 


181 


Observe:  I.  The  positive  degree  of  the  adverb  is 
made  by  adding  the  ablative  ending  -ως  to  the 
adjective  stem.  (In  a  mechanical  way  the  positive 
degree  of  the  adverb  is  formed  from  the  positive 
degree  of  the  adjective  by  changing  final  v  of  the 
ablative  plural  neuter  to  ς  and  retaining  the  accent  of 
the  adjective.)  2.  The  comparative  of  the  adverb 
is  the  neut.  sing.  acc.  of  the  adjective.  3.  The 
superlative  of  the  adverb  is  the  neut.  plur.  acc. 
of  the  superlative  of  the  adjective. 

441.  δ  δέ,  ή  δέ,  ο!  δέ  are  used  demonstratively  to  refer 
to  persons  already  mentioned  in  an  oblique  case,  e.g., 
χάλιν  δέ  δ  Πειλάτος  χροσεφώνησεν  αυτοΐς,  θέλων  άχολΰσαι 

τον  Ίησούν.  οι  δέ  έχεφώνουν  λέγοντες  Σταύρου  σταυρού 
αύτόν,  And  again  Pilate  spoke  to  them ,  wishing 
to  release  Jesus.  But  they  shouted ,  saying, 
“Crucify,  crucify  him.” 
ο!  δε  refers  to  αυτοΐς. 

442.  In  comparisons  μάλλον  {more,  rather)  and  η 
are  used  with  the  positive  degree. 

443.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καί  τδ  άσθενές  (weakness)  τού  θεού  ίσχυρότερον 
των  άνθρώχων.  2.  μακάριόν  έστιν  μάλλον  διδόναι  (to  give) 
ή  λαμβάνειν.  3·  δ  δέ  όχίσω  μου  έρχόμενος  ισχυρότερος  μου 
έστίν.  4*  Σάββατόν  έστιν,  καί  ούκ  έξεστίν  σοι  άραι  τδν 
κράβαττον.  δς  δέ  άχεκρίθη  αύτοΐς  'Ο  χοιήσας  με  υγιή  έκεΐνός 
μοι  είχεν  ΤΑρον  τδν  κράβαττόν  σου  καί  χεριχάτει.  5·  αυτή  δέ 
έστιν  ή  κρίσις  ότι  τδ  φώς  έλήλυθεν  είς  τδν  κόσμον  καί  ήγάχησαν 
οί  άνθρωχοι  μάλλον  τδ  σκότος  ή  τδ  φώς,  ήν  γάρ  αυτών  χονηρά 
τα  έργα.  6.  άχοκριθείς  δέ  δ  ήγεμών  είχεν  αυτοΐς  Τινα  θέλετε 
άχδ  τών  δύο  άχολύσω  υμΐν;  οί  δέ  είχαν  Τδν  Βαραββάν. 


182 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


II.  i.  That  man  is  stronger  than  I.  2.  He  said 
to  them,  “Come  unto  me.”  They  said  to  him,  “We 
are  not  able  to  go.”  3.  The  children  of  God  loved 
light  rather  (μάλλον)  than  darkness.  4.  Seek  ye 
rather  to  enter  the  kingdom  than  to  die  in  sin. 


LESSON  LI 


Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  (Continued). 
Declension  of  Adjectives  with  Stems  in  -ov- 


444. 


Vocabulary 


άφρων,-ον,  foolish 
ευ,  well 

ευθέως,  adv.,  straightway , 
at  once 

τέλειος,  -a,  -ov,  finished , 
complete 


πολύ,  adv.,  much 
ταχέως,  ταχύ,  adv.,  quickly 
σώφρων,  -ov,  of  sound  mindt 
sober-minded 
ώδε,  adv.,  here ,  hither 


445.  The  following  adjectives  show  irregularities 
of  comparison. 

Comparative  suffix  -ιων  (masc.) 
Superlative  suffix  -ιστός  (masc.) 


Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

άγαθός 

κρείσσων 

κράτιστος 

κρείττων 

(only  as  title) 

κακός 

χείρων 

ησσων 

μέγας 

μείζων 

μέγιστος 

μικρός 

μικρότερος 

έλάσσων 

έλάχιστος 

πολύς 

πλείων 

πλεΐστος 

χλέων 

COMPARISON 


183 


446.  The  declension  of  μείζων,  -ον,  the  comparative 
of  μέγας,  is: 


STEM  μεΐζον-  (μειζοσ-) 
Singular 


Nom. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

μείζων 

Neut. 

μεΐζον 

Gen. 
Abl.  , 

*  μείζονος 

μείζονος 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  μείζονι 

μείζονι 

Dat.  , 
Acc. 

μείζονα,  μείζω 

μεΐζον. 

Nom. 

Plural 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

μείζονες,  μείζους 

Neut. 

μείζονα, 

μείζω 

Gen. 

Abl. 

-  μειζόνων 

μειζόνων 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  μείζοσι 

μείζοσι 

Dat. 

Acc. 

μείζονας,  μείζους 

μείζονα, 

μείζω. 

447.  Comparatives  in  -(ι)ων  are  declined  like  μείζων; 
'  so  κρείσσων,  χλείων,  etc.  The  superlatives  in  -ιστός, 

-η,  -ον  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declensions. 

448.  Adjectives  with  stems  in  -ov-  are  declined  like 
μείζων,  except  that  they  do  not  have  the  second  forms 
like  μείζω  and  μείζους:  as  οίφρων,  -ον,  σώφρων,  -ov,  etc. 

The  voc.  sing,  of  οίφρων  is  οίφρων  (like  nom.). 


184 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


449.  Observe  carefully  the  following  examples  of 
the  comparison  of  irregular  adverbs.  (See  438,  1-3) : 


Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

ευ 

βέλτιον 

καλώς 

κάλλιον 

κακώς 

ήσσον 

(μάλα) 

μάλλον 

μάλιστα 

πολύ 

πλείον 

πλέον 

έγγύς 

έγγύτερον 

έγγιστα 

τάχα  or 

τάχιον 

τάχιστα 

ταχέως 

τάχειον 

a.  The  positive  of  the  adverb  is  sometimes  made 
from  the  neut.  acc.  sing,  of  the  adjective. 

460.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ήκουσαν  οί  Φαρισαίοι  ότι  ’Ιησούς  πλείονας  μαθητές 
ποιεί  καί  βαπτίζει  ή  Ίωάνης.  2.  δ  πιστεύων  είς  έμέ  τα  έργα 
α  έγώ  ποιώ  κάκείνος1  ποιήσει  καί  μείζονα  τούτων  ποιήσει,  δτι 
έγώ  προς  τον  πατέρα  πορεύομαι.  3·  «φρων,  ταύτη  τή  νυκτί 
τήν  ψυχήν  σου  αίτούσι  άπδ  σοΰ.  4·  λέγει  ούν  αυτώ  ’Ιησούς, 
*0  ποιείς  ποίησον  τάχειον.  5*  ούκ  εστιν  δούλος  μείζων  τού 
κυρίου  αυτού  ουδέ  απόστολος  μείζων  τού  πέμψαντος  αυτόν. 
6.  έγώ  γάρ  είμι  δ  έλάχιστος  τών  αποστόλων.  7·  τίς  #ρα2 
μείζων  έστίν  έν  τή  βασιλείς  τών  ουρανών;  δστις  ούν  ταπεινώσει 
έαυτδν  ως  τδ  παιδίον  τούτο,  ουτός  έστιν  δ  μείζων  έν  τή 
βασιλείς  τών  ούρανών. 

II.  ι.  My  brother  is  greater  than  I.  2.  I  hope 
to  come  unto  you  quickly.  3.  I  am  able  to  do  more 
work  than  this.  4.  Is  it  lawful  to  do  well  on  the 

sabbath? 

1  See  §  4,  p.  217. 


2  a  pa,  an  inferential  particle,  then,  therefore 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


185 


LESSON  LII 


Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs  in  -άω 

I 

451.  Vocabulary 


διαλογίζομαι,  I  consider ,  reason ,  τελευτάω, 

discuss 

έχε  ρωτάω,  I  question ,  (a  τιμάω, 

question)  τολμάω, 

ίάομαι,  I  heal  σιωχάω, 

χλανάω,  I  cause  to  wander , 

lead  astray 


( I  finish) 

I  die 
I  honor 
I  dare 
lam  silent , 
keep  si¬ 
lence 


452.  The  conjugation  of  γεννάω,  as  an  example  of 
the  -άω  verbs,  in  the  present  system,  is: 

I.  THe  present  indicative: 


Singular 

1.  γεννώ  (γεννάω) 

2.  γεννάς  (γεννάεις) 
3·  γεννά  (γεννάει) 


Active 

Plural 

1.  γεννώμεν  (γεννάομεν) 

2.  γεννάτε  (γεννάετε) 
γεννώσι  (γεννάουσι) 


Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

1.  γεννώμαι  (γεννάομαι)  I.  γεννώμεθα  (γενναόμεθα) 

2.  γεννάσαι  (γεννάεσαι)  2.  γεννάσθε  (γεννάεσθε) 

3·  γεννάται  (γεννάεται)  3·  γεννώνται  (γεννάονται) 


2.  The  present  subjunctive: 

Active 


Singular 

1.  γεννώ  (γεννάω) 

2.  γεννάς  (γεννάης) 
3·  γεννά  (γεννάη) 


Plural 

1.  γεννώμεν  (γεννάωμεν) 

2.  γεννάτε  (γεννάητε) 

3·  γεννώσι  (γεννάωσι) 


186 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Note  that  the  contract  forms  of  the  indicative  and 
subjunctive  active  are  alike. 


Middle  and  Passive 


Singular 

1.  γεννώμαι  (γεννάωμαι) 

2.  [γενν£  (γεννάη)] 

3·  γεννάται  (γεννάηται) 


Plural 

1.  γεννώμεθα  (γενναώμεθα) 

2.  γεννάσθε  (γεννάησθε) 

3·  γεννώνται  (γεννάωνται) 


3·  The  present  imperative: 

Active 

Singular  Plural 

2.  γέννα  (γένναε)  2.  γεννάτε  (γεννάετε) 

3·  γεννάτω  (γενναέτω)  3*  γεννάτωσαν  (γενναέτωσαν) 

Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

2.  γεννώ  (γεννάου)  2.  γεννάσθε  (γεννάεσθε) 

3·  γεννάσθω  (γενναέσθω)  3·  γεννάσθωσαν  (γενναέσθωσαν) 

4·  The  present  infinitive: 

Active 

γεννάν  (γεννάειν) ;  some  editors  write  γεννάν 

Note,  γεννάν  really  represents  γενναεεν,  for  the 
inf.  ending  -ειν  is  a  contraction  of  the  thematic 
vowel  ε  and  εν. 

Middle  and  Passive 

γεννάσθαι  (γεννάεσθαι) 

5.  The  present  participle: 

Active 

γεννών  (γεννάων),  γεννώσα  (γεννάουσα),  γεννών  (γεννάον) 

Middle  and  Passive 

γεννώμενος,  -η,  -ον  (γενναόαενος) 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


187 


6.  The  imperfect  indicative: 


Singular 


Active 


Plural 


1.  έγέννων  (έγένναον)  I.  έγεννώμεν  (έγεννάομεν) 

2.  έγέννας  (έγένναες)  2.  έγεννάτε  (έγεννάετε) 

3 .  έγέννα  (έγένναε)  3·  έγέννων  (έγένναον) 

Note.  In  the  third  plur.  a  form  like  έγέννουν  is 
sometimes  found.  Thus  from  έ ρωτάω,  imperfect 
ή  ρωτούν.  This  confusion  between  -άω  and  -έω  verbs 
began  early  in  the  Ionic. 

Middle  and  Passive 


1.  έγεννώμην  (έγενναόμην)  I.  έγεννώμεθα  (έγενναόμεθα) 

2.  έγεννώ  (έγεννάου)  2.  έγεννάσθε  (έγεννάεσθε) 

3-  έγεννάτο  (έγεννάετο)  3·  ^γεννώντο  (έγεννάοντο) 

453.  The  declension  of  the  present  active  participle 
γεννών,  -ώσα,  ών  is: 

Singular 

Masc.  Fem. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Abl. 


γεννών  (γεννάων) 
γεννώντος  (γεννάοντος) 


Loc. 

Ins. 

Dat. 


γεννώντι  (γεννάοντι) 


Acc.  γεννώντα  (γεννάοντα) 


Neut. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Abl. 


γεννών  (γεννάον) 

like  masc. 


γεννώσα  (γεννάουσα) 
γεννώσης  (γενναουσης) 

γεννώση  (γενναούσχ)) 
γεννώσαν  (γεννάουσαν) 


188 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


,1 


like  masc. 


Loc. 

Ins. 

Dat. 

Acc.  γεννών  (γεννάον) 

Plural 

Masc. 

Nom.  γεννώντες  (γεννάοντες) 


Fem. 

γεννώσαι  (γεννάουσαι) 


γεννώντων  (γενναόντων)  γεννωσών  (γενναουσών) 


γεννώσι  (γεννάουσι) 


γεννώσαις  (γενναούσαις) 


Gen. 

Abl. 

Loc. 

Ins. 

Dat. 

Acc.  γεννώντας  (γεννάοντας)  γεννώσας  (γενναουσας) 

Neut. 

Nom.  γεννώντα  (γεννάοντα) 
like  masc. 


like  masc. 


Gen. 

Abl. 

Loc. 

Ins. 

Dat. 

Acc.  γεννώντα  (γεννάοντα) 

454.  The  scheme  of  contraction  for  regular  -άω 
verbs  is  as  follows: 


a  -j-  ε  =  a 
a  +  η  =  a 
a  +  ει  =  $ 
α  +  ει(=ε-|-ε)  =  a 
a  +  V  =  <? 


a  +  ο  =  ω 
a  +  ω  =  ω 

a  +  ου  =  ω  (since  ου  in  these 
uncontracted  forms  is  a 
spurious  diphthong,  i.e.,  υ 
is  not  present  in  the  un¬ 
contracted  form  of  ου). 


For  the  accent  see  430. 


IMPERSONAL  VERB.  INFINITIVE  189 


455.  Exercises 

I.  I.  έάν  ε’ίχωμεν  ότι  αμαρτίαν  ούκ  έ'χομεν,  έαυτούς 

χλανώμεν  καί  ή  αλήθεια  ούκ  έστιν  εν  ήμΐν.  2.  οί  αμαρτωλοί 
τους  άγαχώντας  αυτούς  άγαχώσιν.  3·  τΥ)  ofodqi 

γενόμενος  έχηρώτα  αυτούς  Τί  έν  τή  δδω  διελογίζεσθε; 
οί  δέ  έσιώχων.  φ  Τίμα  τον  χατέρα  σου  καί  τήν  μητέρα. 
5·  τεκνία,  μηδείς  χλανάτω  υμάς.  6.  καί  χάς  ό  δχλος 
έζήτουν  άχτεσθαι  αυτού,  ότι  δύναμις  χαρ’  αυτού  έςήρχετο 
καί  ίάτο  χάντας.  7·  Τί  έξήλθατε  εις  τήν  έρημον  θεάσασθαι; 
8.  δ  μή  άγαχών  τδν  άδελφδν  αυτού  δν  έώρακεν,  τον  θεδν  δν 
ούχ  έώρακεν  ου  δύναται  άγαχςίν. 

II.  ι.  Let  us  love  one  another.  2.  He  who 
loves  his  brother  keeps  the  commandment  of  God. 
3.  The  disciples  were  not  able  to  heal  him.  4.  They 
were  asking  him  concerning  the  kingdom. 

LESSON  Lin 

Impersonal  Verbs,  χρίν  (ή)  and  the  Infinitive. 
Constructions  with  καί  έγένετο 

456.  Vocabulary 

άλέκτωρ,  -ορος,  δ,  cock  κοινόω,  I  make  common , 

άχαρνέο μαι,  I  deny  unclean 

διακονεω,  I  serve ,  minister  μανθάνω,  I  learn ;  second 
διάκονος,  δ,  servant ,  minister ,  aor.  έ'μαθον 
deacon  σταυρός,  δ,  cross 

κοινός,  -ή,  -όν,  common ,  un -  θανατόω,  I  put  to  death 
clean 

457.  There  are  some  verbs  used  in  the  third  person 
singular  with  an  impersonal  subject,  called  imper¬ 
sonal  verbs.  Examine  the  following  examples: 


190 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


1.  δει,  it  is  necessary.  δει  με  κ αί  'Ρώμην  ίδεΐν,  I 
must  see  Rome  also  (it  is  necessary  for  me  to  see 
Rome  also),  με  is  the  acc.  of  general  reference  with 
Εδεΐν ;  'Ρώμην  is  the  object  of  ίδεΐν.  Observe  that  the 
subject  of  δει  is  ίδεΐν. 

2.  δοκεΐ,  it  seems  {good),  τί  υμΐν  δοκεΐ;  what  think 
you?  (What  seems  (good)  to  you?)  Observe  the  case 
of  υμΐν.  δοκέω  is  used  in  the  personal  construction  also. 

3.  έξεστι,  it  is  possible ,  it  is  lawful,  ουκ  έξεστίν  σοι 
έχειν  αυτήν,  it  is  not  lawful  for  thee  to  have  her.  Ob¬ 
serve  that  έχειν  is  the  subject  of  έξεστιν,  and  that  σοι 
is  in  the  dative  case. 

4.  μέλει,  it  concerns ,  it  is  a  care,  καί  ού  μέλει  αυτφ 
περί  τών  προβάτων,  he  cares  not  for  the  sheep  (it  is  not 
a  care  to  him  concerning  the  sheep). 

458.  πριν  (or  πρίν  ή),  before ,  is  frequently  used  with 
the  infinitive  (in  the  ablative  case).  E.g., 

πριν  Αβραάμ  γενέσθαι  έγώ  είμί,  before  Abraham  came 
into  being ,  I  am. 

459.  The  idioms  containing  καί  έγένετο  (or  έγένετο  δέ), 
and  it  came  to  pass  {and  it  happened) ,  are  so  common 
in  the  New  Testament  that  they  call  for  a  special 
note.  The  New  Testament  has  four  constructions 
with  καί  έγένετο. 

1.  καί  έγένετο  καί  -f  the  verb. 

καί  έγένετο  έν  μιά  τών  ημερών  καί  αυτός  ήν  διδάσκων,  and 
it  came  to  pass ,  on  one  of  the  days,  that  he  was 
teaching. 

2.  καί  έγένετο  +  the  verb. 

καί  έγένετο  άπήλθεν  είς  τόν  οίκον  αυτού,  and  it  came  to 
pass  that  he  departed  to  his  home. 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


191 


3.  καί  έγένετο  καί  ίδου  +  the  verb. 

καί  έγένετο  καί  ίδου  άνδρες  δυο  έχέστησαν  αύταϊς,  and  it 
came  to  pass  that ,  behold ,  two  men  stood  by  them. 

4.  καί  έγένετο  +  an  infinitive. 

καί  έγένετο  αυτόν  έν  τοΐς  σάββασιν  διαχορεύεσθαι  διά  των 
σχορίμων,  and  it  came  to  pass  that  he  was  going 
through  the  grain-fields  on  the  Sabbath. 

460.  Exercises 

I.  I.  δει  υμάς  γεννηθήναι  ά'νωθεν.  2.  χρίν  άλέκτορα 
φωνήσαι  τρίς  άχαρνήση  με.  3·  με  δει  χοιεΐν  Υνα  σωθώ; 

έγένετο  δέ  έν  έτέρψ  σαββάτω  είσελθεΐν  αυτόν  εις  την 
συναγωγήν  καί  διδάσκειν.  5·  δοκει  σοί;  6.  ήμΐν  ούκ 
εξεστιν  άχοκτεΐναι  ούδένα.  7·  δοκώ  γάρ  κάγώ  χνευμα  θεού 
έχειν.  8.  διδάσκαλε,  ο’ίδαμεν  ότι  άληθής  ε\  καί  ου  μέλει 
σοι  χερί  ούδενός. 

II.  ι.  It  is  necessary  to  go  into  the  house.  2.  He 
does  not  care  for  any  one.  3.  It  came  to  pass  before 
he  went  into  the  house  that  his  brothers  came  to  him. 
4.  It  is  not  lawful  for  a  man  to  kill  any  one. 


LESSON  LIV 

Present  System  of  Contract  Verbs  in  -όω 

461.  Vocabulary 

διακονία,  ή,  service ,  ministry  ζηλόω,  I  am  jealous ,  desire 
δικαιόω,  I  declare  righteous,  eagerly 
justify  ληστής,  οΰ,  o,  robber 

έκχορεύομαι,  I  go  out  όμοιόω,  I  make  like 

ένώχιον,  prep,  with  gen.,  χροφητεύω,  I  prophesy 
before,  in  presence  of 


192 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


\ 


462.  The  conjugation  of  χληρόω,  as  an  example  of 
the  -όω  verbs,  in  the  present  system,  is: 

I.  The  present  indicative: 


Singular 

1.  χληρώ  (χληρόω) 

2.  χληροΐς  (χληρόεις) 
3·  χληροΐ  (χληρόει) 


Active 

Plural 

1.  χληροΰμεν  (χληρόομεν) 

2.  χληροΰτε  (χληρόετε) 

3·  χληροΰσι  (χληρόουσι) 

Middle  and  Passive 
Singular  Plural 

1.  χληρούμαι  (χληρόομαι)  I.  χληρούμεθα  (χληροόμεθα) 

2.  χληροΐ  (χληρόη)  2.  χληρούσθε  (χληρόεσθε) 

3·  χληροΰται  (χληρόεται)  3·  πληρούνται  (χληρόονται) 


2.  The  present  subjunctive: 

Active 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  χληρώ  (χληρόω) 

-< 

I. 

2.  χληροΐς  (χληρόης) 

2. 

3·  χληροΐ  (χληρόη) 

3· . 

Like  the  present 
indicative  (probably) 


The  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive  active  of 
-οω  verbs  in  New  Testament  seems  to  be  like  the 
pres,  indie.  Note  that  the  pres,  indie,  and  subj. 
active  are  alike.  The  pres.  subj.  act.  was  probably 
assimilated  to  the  pres.  ind.  act.  There  is  doubt 
concerning  the  plur.  forms  that  occur  in  the  New 
Testament, 


Middle  and  Passive 
Singular  Plural 

1.  χληρώμαι  (χληρόωμαι)  The  plural  does  not  occur 

2.  [χληροΐ  (χληρόη)]  in  the  New  Testament 

3.  χ>ΛΚ«)ται  (χληρόηται) 


CONTRACT  VERBS 


193 


If  the  plural  had  been  used  in  the  New  Testament 
it  would  have  probably  been  like  the  pres.  ind. 

Forms  in  brackets  []  are  not  found  in  the  New 
Testament. 

3.  The  present  imperative: 

Active 

Singular  Plural 

2.  χλήρου  (χλήροε)  2.  χληρουτε  (χληρόετε) 

3·  χληρουτω  (χληροέτω)  3·  πληρουτωσαν  (χληροέτωσαν) 

Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

2.  χληροϋ  (χληρόου)  2.  χληροΰσθε  (χληρόεσθε) 

3·  χληρούσθω  (χληροέσθω)  3·  πληρούσθωσαν  (χληροέσθω- 

σαν) 

4·  The  present  infinitive : 

Active 

χληροΟν  (χληρόειν);  some  editors  write  χληροίν. 
χληροΟν  is  for  χληροεεν.  See  note  to  45^»  4· 


Middle  and  Passive 
χληροΰσθαι  (χληρόεσθαι). 


5.  The  present  participle : 

Active 

χληρών  (χληρόων),  χληρούσα  (χληρόουσα), 
χληροϋν  (χληρόον) 

Middle  and  Passive 

χληρούμενος,  -η,  -ον  (χληροόμενος). 


194 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


6.  The  imperfect  indicative : 

Active 


Singular 


Plural 


1.  έχλήρουν  (έχλήροον)  I.  έχληρούμεν  (έχληρόομεν) 

2.  έχλήρους  (έχλήροες)  2.  έχληρούτε  (έχληρόετε) 

3·  έχλήρου  (έχλήροε)  3·  έπλήρουν  (έχλήροον) 

In  the  third  plur.  a  form  like  έχληρούσαν  (έχληρόοσαν) 
is  found. 


Middle  and  Passive 

Singular  Plural 

1.  έχληρούμην  (έχληροόμην)  I.  έχληρούμεθα  (έχληροόμεθα) 

2.  έχληρού  (έχληρόου)  2.  έχληρούσθε  (έχληρόεσθε) 

3·  έχληρούτο  (έχληρόετο)  3·  έχληρουντο  (έχληρόοντο) 

463.  The  present  active  participle  χληρών,  χληρούσα, 
χληροϋν  is  declined  like  φιλών,  φιλούσα,  φιλούν  (427). 
The  result  of  contraction  is  the  same  in  both  cases: 
ε  -f  0  =  ou;  and  0  +  0  =  ou. 

464.  The  scheme  of  contraction  for  regular  -όω 
verbs  is  as  follows: 


0  -b  ε  =  ou 
0  +  0  =  ou 
0  +  η  =  ω 


ο  +  ω  =  ω 
ο  -f  ει  =  οι 
ο  +  η  =  οι 


0  +  OU  =  0U 


465.  Exercises 

I.  I.  ώστε,  αδελφοί  μου,  ζηλούτε  τό  χροφητεύειν.  2.  τά 
δέ  έκχορευόμενα  έκ  τού  στόματος  έκ  τής  καρδίας  έξέρχεται, 
κάκεϊνα  κοινοί  τδν  ά'νθρωχον.  3·  σύν  «ύτώ  σταυρούσιν 
δύο  ληστάς.  4·  ειχεν  αυτοίς  'Υμείς  έσχέ  οί  δικαιούντες 
εαυτούς  ένώχιον  των  άνθρώχων.  5·  καί  είχατε  Άρχίχχψ 
Βλέχε  την  διακονίαν  ήν  χαρέλαβες  έν  κυρίψ,  Υνα  αυτήν 


CONJUGATION  OF  με-VERBS 


195 


πληροίς.  6.  ελεγον  την  εξοδον  (departure)  αυτού  ήν 
ήμελλεν  πληρούν  έν  Ιερουσαλήμ. 

II.  ι .  They  were  crucifying  him  with  two  robbers. 
2.  Let  us  love  him  who  justifies  us.  3.  The  works 
of  the  righteous  are  being  made  manifest.  4.  That 
which  goes  into  the  mouth  does  not  defile  man. 

LESSON  LV 

Conjugation  of  με-verbs:  δεδωμε.  Second  Aorist  of 

γενώσκω 

466.  Vocabulary 
δεδωμε,  I  give ,  deliver 

άχο  δεδωμε,  I  give  up  or  back;  restore ;  pay;  midd.,  sell 
έχεγενώσκω,  I  recognize ,  discover 
έχε δίδωμι,  I  give  over 

χαραδεδωμε,  I  give  over  (to  another),  deliver  up,  betray 

467.  Greek  verbs  are  of  two  main  conjugations, 
the  ω-conjugation  and  the  με-conjugation.  The  con¬ 
jugation  which  has  been  studied  thus  far,  except  ε(μί, 
is  the  ω-conjugation  (ω-verbs).  The  verbs  in  -ω 
are  by  far  more  common  than  the  verbs  in  -μι. 
The  verbs  (or  conjugations)  are  so  named  because 
the  ending  of  the  first  person  singular  present  in¬ 
dicative  active  of  one  is  -ω  and  of  the  other  is  -με. 

468.  με-verbs  differ  from  ω-verbs  only  in  the 
present  and  second  aorist  (called  με-aorist)  sys¬ 
tems.  The  essential  difference  between  the  με-verbs 
and  ω-verbs  in  these  systems  is  that  the  με-verbs 
do  not  have  the  thematic  vowel  °/e  which  the  ω- 


196 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


verbs  have,  before  the  personal  endings.  The  sub¬ 
junctive  of  the  μι-verbs,  however,  has  the  thematic 
vowel  ω/η  (mode-sign).  In  the  other  tense  systems 
the  μι-verbs  and  the  ω-verbs  are  conjugated  alike. 

469.  The  principal  parts  of  διδωμι1  are: 

δίδίομι,  δώσω,  εδωκα,  δέδωκα,  δέδομαι,  έδόθην 

Observe  that:  ι.  The  verb  stem  is  δο-.  2.  The 
present  stem  is  the  reduplicated  verb-stem,  with  the 
vowel  t  in  the  reduplication. 


470.  The  present  active  of  δίδωμι  is: 

1.  Indicative: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  δίδωμι  I.  [δίδομεν] 

2.  δίδω$  2.  [δίδοτε] 

3·  δίδωσι  3·  διδόασι 

In  the  first  sing,  a  form  διδώ  (from  διδόω)  occurs. 

2.  Subjunctive: 


Singular 

1.  [διδώ] 

2.  [διδως  or  διδοΐς] 

3·  διδώ  or  διδοί 

3·  Imperative: 

Singular 
2.  δίδου 
3·  διδότω 
4·  Infinitive: 

διδόναι 


Plural 

1.  [διδώμεν] 

2.  [διδώτε] 

3·  [διδώσι] 

Plural 

2.  δίδοτε 
3·  [διδότωσαν] 


1  μι-verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  are  numerous.  The 
uncompounded  forms  of  all  μι-verbs  are  given  as  quotable  in  the 
New  Testament,  although  the  form  may  be  found  only  in  com¬ 
pounds. 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


197 


5.  Participle: 

διδους,  διδοϋσα,  διδόν 

The  participle  is  declined  like  λύων  except  for 
the  nom.  sing,  masc.,  and  the  accent. 

471.  The  imperfect  indicative  active  of  δίδωμι  is: 
Singular  Plural 


1.  [έδίδουν] 

2.  [έδίδους] 
3·  έδίδου 


1.  [εδίδομεν] 

2.  [έ δ t δοτέ] 

3·  έδίδοσαν,  έδίδουν 


472.  The  present  middle  and  passive  of  δίδωμι  is: 

1.  Indicative: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  [δίδομαι]  I.  διδόμεθα 

2.  [δίδοσαι]  2.  [δίδοσθε] 

3.  δίδοται  3 .  [δίδονται] 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

3.  Imperative: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

4.  Infinitive: 

δίδοσθαι 

5.  Participle: 

διδόμενος,  -η,  -ον 

473.  The  imperfect  indicative  middle  and  passive 
of  δίδωμι  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  [έδιδόμην]  I.  [έδιδόμεθα] 

2.  [έδίδοσο]  2.  [έδίδοσθε] 

3.  έδίδοτο,  έδίδετο  3·  [έδίδοντο] 


198  BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 
474.  The  aorist  (μι-aorist)  active  of  δίδωμι  is: 


I.  Indicative: 

Singular 

1.  εδωκα 

2.  εδωκας 
3·  εδωκε 


Plural 

1.  έδώκαμεν 

2.  έδώκατε 

3·  εδωκαν,  εδοσαν 


Aorists  made  with  the  suffix  -κα  are  called  κ- 
aorists.  Actually  they  are  not  μι-  aorists. 


2.  Subjunctive: 
Singular 

1.  δω 

2.  δ  ως,  δοΐς 

3·  δω,  δοΐ,  δώγ) 


Plural 

1.  δώμεν 

2.  δώτε 
3·  δώσι  ’· 


Some  forms  like  δώσγ),  δώσω  μεν  are  probably  aorist 
subjunctives  from  a  first  aorist  έδωσα  (found  in  the 
papyri). 


3.  Imperative: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  δός  2.  δότε 

3.  δότω  3·  [δότωσαν] 

4·  Infinitive: 

δούναι 

5·  Participle: 

δούς,  [δοΰσα],  [δόν] 

Declined  like  the  present  act.  participle. 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


199 


475.  The  aorist  middle  of  δίδωμι  is: 


i.  Indicative: 
Singular 

1.  [έδόμην] 

2.  [εδου] 

3·  Ιδοτο,  εδετο 


Plural 

1.  [έδόμεθα] 

2.  εδοσθε 
3·  £δοντο 


2.  Subjunctive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 


3.  Imperative: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

4.  Infinitive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

5.  Participle: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 


476.  Some  ω-verbs  have  aorists  conjugated  like 
those  of  μι-verbs. 

1.  The  aorist  (μι-aorist)  indicative  active  of 
γινώσκω  is: 


Singular 

1.  εγνων 

2.  εγνως 
3·  εγνω 


Plural 

1.  Ιγνωμεν 

2.  εγνωτε 
3·  Ιγνωσαν 


2.  The  subjunctive  is  γνώ,  γνώς,  etc.,  with  ω 
throughout.  But  third  sing,  is  γνοϊ. 

3.  The  imperative  is  γνώθι,  γνώτω,  γνώτε,  [γνώτωσαν] 
4·  The  infinitive  is  γνώναι 

5.  The  participle  γνούς,  γνουσα,  [γνόν]. 


200 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


477.  Exercises 

I.  I.  υμΐν  το  μυστήριον  δέδοται  τής  βασιλείας  τού  θεού. 
2.  Κύριε,  τίς  έστιν  δ  χαραδιδούς  σε;  3·  παντί  αίτοϋντί  σε 
δίδου.  4·  δέ  ου  χοιώ  τα  έργα  τού  χατρός  μου,  μή 
χιστεύετε  μοι.  ε!  δέ  χοιώ,  καν1  έμοί  μή  χιστεύητε,  τοΐς 
εργοις  χιστεύετε,  ινα  γνώτε  καί  γινώσκητε  δτι  έν  έμοί  δ 
χατήρ  κάγώ  έν  τώ  χατρί.  5·  ^ότε  αυτοΤς  υμείς  φαγεΐν. 
6.  λέγω  δέ  υμΐν  δτι  ’Ηλείας  ήδη  ήλθεν,  καί  ουκ  έχέγνωσαν 
αυτόν.  7·  ασύδοτε  χάσι  τάς  όφειλάς  (dues).  8.  εξεστιν 
δούναι  κήνσον  (poll-tax,  tribute)  Καίσαρι  ή  ου;  δώμεν  ή 
μή  δώμεν; 

II.  ι.  If  I  know  all  mysteries  and  have  not  love, 
I  am  nothing.  2.  I  give  you  power  to  cast  out  de¬ 
mons.  3.  Jesus  was  giving  bread  to  the  disciples 
that  they  might  give  it  to  the  multitude. 


LESSON  LVI 


Conjugation  of  μι-Verbs  (cont’d):  ΐστημι.  Present 
Imperative  of  είμί.  Second  Aorist  of  βαίνω  φημί 


Vocabulary 


478. 

ΐστημι,  I  make  to  stand , 
place ,  stand 

άνθίστημι,  I  set  against , 
withstand 

άνίστημι,  I  raise  up}  rise , 
arise 

άφίστημι,  I  put  away ,  de¬ 
part  from 

έμβαίνω,  I  go  into ,  embark 


έφίστημι,  I  stand  upon 
or  by ,  come 
upon 

καθίστημι,  I  set  down ,  ap¬ 
point 

μεταβαίνω,  I  pass  over ,  de¬ 
part 

χαρίστημι,  I  place  beside , 
stand  by 


1  καν  =  καί  εάν,  “even  if,”  “though.” 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


201 


έξίστημι,  I  am  amazed ,  am  συν  (στη  μι,  I  commend ,  es- 
beside  myself  tablish 


479.  The  principal  parts  of  Υστημι  are: 

Υστημι,  στήσω,  έστησα,  εστηκα,  [Ισταμαι],  έστάθην, 
second  aor.  act.  εστην. 

Observe  that:  I.  The  verb-stem  is  στα-  2.  The 
present  stem  is  the  verb-stem  reduplicated,  with  the 
vowel  i  in  the  reduplication.  ιστα-  is  for  σιστα- 
(initial  σ  is  represented  by  the  rough  breathing). 


480.  The  conjugation  of 
is: 

I.  Indicative: 

Singular 

1.  Υστημι 

2.  [Υστης] 

3.  Υστησι 


Υστημι  in  the  present  active 

Plural 

1.  [Υσταμεν] 

2.  [Υστατε] 

3·  [ίστάσι] 


Many  forms  from  Ιστάνω  occur.  They  are  regular 
in  their  conjugation. 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

3.  Imperative: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

4.  Infinitive: 

ιστάναι 

5.  Participle: 

Ιστάς,  [ιστάσα],  [ιστάν].  (στάς  is  declined  like  πας. 

481.  Imperfect  indicative  active  forms  of  Υστημι  do 
not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 


202 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


482.  The  conjugation  of  the  present  middle  and 
passive  of  Υστημι  is : 

I.  Indicative: 

Singular  Plural 


1.  ίσταμαι 

2.  Υστασαι 


1.  ίστάμεθα 

2.  Υστασθε 
3·  Υστανται 


3·  Υσταται 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

3.  Imperative: 


Singular 
2.  Υστασο 
3·  [ίστάσθω] 

4.  Infinitive: 

5.  Participle: 


Plural 
2.  [Υστασθε] 

3·  [ίστάσθωσαν] 


Υστασθαι 


ισταμενος,  -η,  -ον 

483.  The  imperfect  indicative  middle  and  passive  of 
Υστημι  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  ιστάμην1  I.  ίστάμεθα 

2.  [Υστασο]  2.  Υστασθε 


ιστατο 


3·  Υσταντο 


484. 

pers. 

plur. 

sing. 

485. 


φημί,  I  say}  is  found  in  the  pres.  ind.  act.  first 
sing,  φημί,  third  pers.  sing,  φησί,  third  pers. 
φασί,  and  in  the  imperfect  ind.  act.  third  pers. 
εφη.  The  present  forms  are  enclitic. 

The  present  imperative  of  είμί,  I  am ,  is: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  Υσθι 
3·  έστω,  ήτω 


2.  [εστε] 

3.  εστωσαν 


. 


| 


1  Long  t.  See  70,  2. 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


203 


486.  The  aorist  (μι-aorist)  active  of  ΐ  στη  μι  is: 
I.  Indicative: 


Singular 

Plural 

I.  εστην 

I.  Ιστημεν 

2.  [εστης] 

2.  εστητε 

3·  εστη 

3·  έστησαν 

The  difference  in 

meaning  between  εστην  and 

έστησα  (first  aorist)  is 

that  Ιστην,  I  stood ,  is  intran- 

sitive,  and  έστησα,  I  set 

or  placed ,  is  transitive. 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Singular 

Plural 

I.  [στώ] 

I.  [στώμεν] 

2.  [στης] 

2.  στήτε 

3·  στη 

3.  στώσι 

3·  Imperative: 

Singular 

Plural 

2.  στήθι, 

2.  στήτε 

-στα 

3·  στήτω 

3·  [στήτωσαν] 

-στα  occurs  only  in  compounds. 

4.  Infinitive: 

στήναι 

5.  Participle: 

στάς,  [στάσα],  [στάν] 

-στάς  is  declined  like  χας. 

487.  Like  εστην  is  conjugated  εβην  the  second  (or  μι-) 
aorist  of  βαίνω.  Thus: 

Ind.  act.  εβην,  εβης,  etc. 

Subj.  act.  third  sing.  βή. 

Imperative  act.  βήθι  and  -βα,  βάτω,  -βατέ. 


204 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Infinitive  act.  βήναι 

Participle  act.  βάς,  declined  like  χάς. 

In  the  New  Testament  βαίνω  occurs  only  in  com¬ 
pounds  (see  vocabulary). 

488.  Exercises 

I.  I.  καί  άναστάς  ήλθεν  χρός  τον  χατέρα  έαυτου.  2.  καί 
ήκουσαν  φωνής  μεγάλης  έκ  τοΰ  ουρανού  λεγούσης  αύτοίς 
’Ανάβατε  ώδε,1  καί  άνέβησαν  εις  τόν  ουρανόν  έν  τή  νεφέλη. 
3·  ειχεν  δέ  τω  άνδρί  ’Έγειρε  καί  στήθι  εις  τό  μέσον  (midst) 
καί  άναστάς  έστη.  φ  *«ταβάς  δέ  Πέτρος  χρός  τούς  ά'νδρας 
είχεν  ’Ιδού  έγώ  είμι  δν  ζητείτε.  5·  παρέστη  γάρ  μοι  ταυτη 
τή  νυκτί  τοΰ  θεού  ου  είμί,  ω  καί  λατρεύω  (serve),  άγγελος 
λέγων  Μη  φοβοΰ,  Παύλε.  Καίσαρί  σε  δει  χαραστήναι.  6.  δ 
νόμος  γάρ  άνθρώχους  καθίστησιν  άρχιερεϊς  έχοντας  ασθένειαν. 

II.  ι.  An  angel  stood  by  Paul  in  the  night. 
2.  Two  men  went  up  into  the  temple.  3.  Who 
appointed  you  a  ruler  of  the  people?  4.  The  dis¬ 
ciples  went  into  the  boat. 

LESSON  LVII 

Conjugation  of  μι-Verbs  (Continued) :  τίθημι 

489.  Vocabulary 

τίθημι,  I  place ,  lay ,  put  (down) 

έχιτίθημι,  I  lay  upon,  place  upon 
μνημεΐον,  τό,  sepulchre,  tomb 
χαρατίθημι,  I  set  before,  commit 
χροστίθημι,  I  add,  give  in  addition 

1  ώδε,  adv.  hither ,  here. 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS  205 

490.  The  principal  parts  of  τίθημι  are: 
τίθημι,  θήΰω,  εθηκα,  τέθεικα,  τέθειμαι,  έτέθην 

Observe  that:  I.  The  verb-stem  is  θε-.  2.  The 
present  stem  is  the  reduplicated  verb-stem,  with  the 
vowel  i  m  the  reduplication.  3.  The  aorist  indie, 
has  -κα  as  suffix. 

491.  The  present  active  of  τίθημι  is: 

1.  Indicative: 

Singular 

1.  τίθημι 

2.  [τίθης] 

3·  τίθησι 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Singular 

ι.  τιθώ 
2.  τιθής 
3·  τιθή 

3·  Imperative: 

Singular 
2.  τίθει 
3·  τιθέτω 

4·  Infinitive: 

τιθέναι 

5·  Participle: 

τιθείς,  τιθεϊσα,  τιθέν 

Declined  like  the  aorist  passive  participle  of 
.όω:  λυθείς,  -εΐσα,  -έν,  (350). 


Plural 

1.  τίθεμεν 

2.  τίθετε 
3·  τιθέασι 

Plural 

1.  τιθώμεν 

2.  τιθήτε 
3·  τιθώσι 

Plural 
2.  τίθετε 
3·  [τιθέτωσαν] 


206 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


492.  The  imperfect  indicative  active  of  τίθημι  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  [έτίθην]  I.  [έτίθεμεν] 

2.  [έτίθεις]  2.  [έτίθετε] 

3.  έτίθει  3·  έτίθεσαν 

A  third  pers.  plur.  έτίθουν  is  from  τιθέω. 

493.  The  conjugation  of  the  present  middle  and 
passive  of  τίθημι  is: 

I.  Indicative: 

Singular  Plural 


1.  [τιθέμεθα] 

2.  τίθεσθε 

3 .  τίθενται 


1.  τίθεμαι 

2.  [τίθεσαι] 

3·  τίθεται 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Does  not  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

3.  Imperative: 

Plural 
2.  [τίθεσθε] 

3·  τιθέσθωσαν 


i 


Singular 
2.  [τίθεσο] 
3·  [τιθέσθω] 

4·  Infinitive: 


τίθεσθαι 


5·  Participle: 


τιθέμενος,  -η,  -ον 

494.  The  imperfect  indicative  middle  and  passive 
of  τίθημι  is: 

Singular  Plural 

1.  [έτιθέμην]  I.  [έτιθέμεθα] 

2.  [έτίθεσο]  2.  [έτίθεσθε] 

3*  έτίθετο  3·  ετίθεντο 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


207 


495.  The  aorist  active  of  τίθημι  is: 


I.  Indicative: 
Singular 


Plural 


1.  εθηκα  I.  έθήκαμεν 

2.  έθηκας  2.  έθήκατε 

3·  έθηκε  3·  έθηκαν 

As  is  the  case  with  δίδωμι,  so  τίθημι  has  the  κ- 
aorist  in  the  indicative  active.  Other  modes  are  of 
the  μι-  aorist  type. 

2.  Subjunctive: 

Singular  Plural 


1.  θώ 

2.  θγ)ς 

3· 

3·  Imperative: 
Singular 
2.  θές 
3·  [θέτω] 

4·  Infinitive: 


1.  Θώμεν 

2.  [θήτε] 

3·  θώσι 

Plural 
2.  θέτε 
3·  [θέτωσαν] 


θ  είναι 


5·  Participle: 

θείς,  [θεισα],  [θέν] 
Declined  like  τιθείς. 


496.  The  aorist  middle  of  τίθημι  is: 


I.  Indicative: 
Singular 

1.  έθέμην 

2.  εθου 
3·  έθετο 


Plural 

1.  [έθέμεθα] 

2.  έθεσθε 
3·  έθεντο 


208 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


2.  Subjunctive: 


Singular 

Plural 

1.  [θώμαι] 

I.  θώμεθα 

2.  [θή] 

2.  [θήσθε] 

3.  [θήται] 

3·  [θώνται] 

3.  Imperative: 

Singular 

Plural 

2.  θού 

2.  θέσθε 

3.  [θέσθω] 

3·  [θέσθωσαν] 

4.  Infinitive: 

5.  Participle 


θέσθαι 

θέμενος,  -η,  -ον 


497.  Exercises 

I.  I.  πας  άνθρωπος  πρώτον  τον  καλόν  οίνον  τίθησιν.  2. 
καί  φωνήσας  φωνή  μεγάλη  δ  ’Ιησούς  είπεν  Πάτερ,  είς  χείράς 
σου  παρατίθεμαι  τδ  πνεύμα  μου.  3·  ήραν  τον  κύριον  έκ  τού 
μνημείου,  καί  ούκ  οιδαμεν  πού  εθηκαν  αυτόν.  4·  δ  δέ  κύριος 
προσετίθει  τους  σωζομένους  καθ’  ημέραν1  επί  τδ  αυτό.1 
5·  διά  τούτο  με  δ  πατήρ  αγαπά  δτι  έγώ  τίθημι  τήν  ψυχήν 
μου,  ΐνα  πάλιν  λάβω  αυτήν,  ούδείς  ήρεν  αυτήν  άπ’  έμού, 
άλλ’  έγώ  τίθημι  αυτήν  άπ’  έμαυτοΰ. 


II.  ι.  The  good  shepherd  lays  down  his  life  for 
the  sheep.  2.  The  apostle  commends  the  disciple 
to  the  Lord.  3.  I  do  not  know  where  they  laid 
him.  4.  He  was  placing  his  hands  upon  the  children. 

Note:  The  students  may  now  begin  to  read  I  John 
and  continue  it  as  Lessons  after  Lesson  LIX  is  finished. 

1  καθ’  ήμέραν,  daily.  2  ίτά  xb  αυτό,  (to  the  same),  together. 


I 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 
LESSON  LVm 


209 


Conjugation  of  μι-Verbs  (Continued) :  άφίημι,  συνίημι 
Other  Verbs :  Old  Forms 


Vocabulary 


498. 


άφίημι,  I  send  away ,  for-  συνίημι,  I  perceive ,  under¬ 


stand 

τότε,  adv.,  then 
ηγαγον,  second  aor.  ind. 


give,  leave,  let 
είδώς,  -υΤα,  -ός,  knowing 
έστώς,  ώσα,  ός,  standing 


γίδειν,  old  pluperf.  (with  act.  of  αγω 
imp.  meaning)  of  οίδα.  κλίνη,  ή,  bed 

499.  The  verb  ιημι,  I  send,  occurs  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment  only  in  compounds.  Of  this  verb  the  most 
common  compounds  are  άφίημι  (αχό  -p  ϊημΟ  and 
συνίημι. 

The  verb-stem  of  Υημι  is  έ-.  The  present  stem  is 
the  reduplicated  verb-stem,  with  i  in  the  reduplica¬ 
tion. 

The  principal  parts  of  άφίημι  are: 

άφίημι,  άφήσω,  άφήκα,  άφέωνται  (third  plur.),  άφέθην. 

500.  The  following  forms  of  άφίημι  are  those  which 
occur  most  frequently  in  the  New  Testament. 

Present  indicative  active: 


Singular 

1.  [άφίημι] 

2.  άφεϊς  (from  άφίω) 
3·  άφίησι 


Plural 


1.  άφίεμεν,  άφίομεν 

2.  άφίετε 
3·  άφίουσι 


Imperfect  indicative  active: 

Third  sing,  ηφιεν  (notice  augment 
of  the  preposition) 


210 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Present  active  imperative: 

Third  sing,  άφιέτω. 

Present  active  infinitive : 

άφιέναι 

Present  indicative  middle  and  passive: 
Singular  Plural 

3.  άφίεται  3·  άφ£ενται 

άφ(ονται 


The  aorist  (κ-aorist)  indicative  active  άφήκα  is 
conjugated  like  εθηκα. 

The  second  (μι-)  aorist  subjunctive  active: 

Singular  Plural 


1.  άφώ 

2.  - 


3·  «ΦΏ 


I.  - 

2:  άφήτε 
3.  άφώσί 


The  second  aor.  imperative  active: 

Singular  Plural 

2.  αφες  2.  αφετε 

The  second  aor.  infinitive  active  ^φείναι 
The  second  aor.  participle  active  άφείς  (masc.). 


501.  The  following  forms  of  συνίημι  occur. 

Present  ind.  act.  third  plur.  συνιάσι  and  συνίουσι. 
Present  subj.  act.  third  plur.  συνίωσι. 

Present  act.  participle  συνιείς  and  συνίων. 

Second  aor.  subj.  third  plur.  συνώσι. 

502.  The  verb  αγω  has  a  reduplicated  second  aorist 
ηγαγον. 

Ind.  ηγαγον,  ήγαγες,  etc. 

Subj.  άγάγω,  όγάγης,  etc. ; 


CONJUGATION  OF  μι-VERBS 


211 


and  the  rest  like  ελιχον,  except  the  reduplication 
throughout  the  aorist. 

503.  The  old  pluperfect  of  οίδα  with  the  meaning 
of  the  imperfect  is 
I.  Indicative  active: 


Singular 

Plural 

1.  ηδειν,  I  knew 

I.  [h δειμεν] 

2.  ηδεις 

2.  ηδειτε 

3·  Τϊδει 

3·  βδεισαν 

2.  The  old  perfect  subjunctive  (with  meaning 
the  present)  of  this  verb  is 

Active 

Singular 

Plural 

-  I.  ειδώ 

I.  είδώμεν 

2.  είδης 

2.  είδήτε 

3·  είδϋ 

3·  [είδώσι] 

3.  The  old  perf.  infinitive,  είδέναι 

4.  The  old  perf.  participle,  είδώς,  είδυία,  είδος  (with 
meaning  of  the  present).  Declined  like  λελυκώς, 
-υία,  -ός. 

504.  An  old  perfect  active  participle  from  ϊστημι  is 
found  also  in  the  New  Testament. 

Nom.  έστώς,  έστώσα,  έστός 

Gen.  έστώτος,  έστώσης,  έστώτος 

The  other  cases  can  be  easily  formed  from  these, 
έστώς  has  the  intensive  meaning,  standing. 

505.  Exercises 

I.  I.  δ  μισθωτός  (hireling)  καί  ούκ  ών  χοιμήν,  οδ  ούκ 
εστιν  τά  χρόβατα  ’ίδια,  θεωρεί  τον  λύκον  (wolf)  ερχόμενον 
καί  άφίησιν  τά  χρόβατα  καί  φεύγει.  2.  διά  τούτο  έν  χαραβο- 


212 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


λαίς  αυτοίς  λαλώ,  δτι  βλέχοντες  ου  βλέχουσιν  καί  άκουοντες 
ούκ  άκουουσιν  ουδέ  συνίουσιν.  3·  αγωμεν  καί  ημείς  ϊνα 
άχοθάνωμεν  μετ’  αύτου.  φ  τ&  Ύ^Ρ  ^στΕν  εύκοχώτερον 
(easier),  είχείν  Άφίενταί  σου  αί  αμαρτία:,  ή  είχείν  "Εγειρε 
καί  χεριχάτει;  ινα  δέ  είδήτε  δτι  έξουσίαν  εχει  δ  υιός  του 
άνθρώχου  έχί  τής  γης  αφιέναι  αμαρτίας — τότε  λέγει 'τφ 
χαραλυτικω  (paralytic)  ’Έγειρε  αρόν  σου  τήν  κλίνην  καί 
υχαγε  είς  τδν  οίκον  σου.  5·  *αί  θεωρεί  τδν  ΊησοΟν  έστώτα, 
καί  ούκ  ήδει  οτι  Ιησούς  έστίν.  6.  Ίησοΰς  ο5ν  είδώς  χάντα 
τα  έρχόμενα  έχ’  αυτόν  έξήλθεν,  καί  λέγει  αύτοίς  Τίνα  ζητείτε; 

II.  ι.  We  saw  him  standing  in  the  boat.  2.  He 
said  to  the  man,  “Thy  sins  are  forgiven.”  3.  I 
knew  not  who  it  was.  4.  They  led  the  servants  to 
the  house. 

LESSON  LIX 

The  Optative  Mode.  Wishes 

506. 

ευαγγελίζομαι,  I  proclaim  glad  tidings  ( preach  the 

gospel) 

όλίγος,  -η,  -ον,  few,  little ,  small 

χαρουσία,  ή,  coming ,  presence 

σημεΐον,  τό,  sign 

σήμερον,  adv.,  to-day ,  this  day 

507.  Besides  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  and  im¬ 
perative  modes,  there  is  another  mode  in  Greek, 
called  the  Optative. 

In  meaning  the  optative  is  a  sort  of  weaker  sub¬ 
junctive.  The  subjunctive  and  optative  are  really 
different  forms  of  the  same  mode,  the  mode  of  hesi¬ 
tating  affirmation. 

1  κλίνη,  ή,  a  couch,  a  bed 


OPTATIVE  MODE 


213 


608.  In  the  New  Testament  the  optative  mode 
occurs  only  sixty-seven  times,  and  in  the  present 
and  aorist  tenses  only. 


509.  Of  the  forms  of  the  optative  mode  found  in 
the  New  Testament  the  following  are  representative: 
I.  Present  tense  (act.  and  middle): 

Singular  Plural 


2. 


I.  δυναίμην 

'  ειη  (from  είμί) 

3·  1  £χοι 
θέλοι 


2. 


3· 


χασχοιτε 

εχοίεν 

δυναιντο 

ν. 


Second  aorist  (act.  and  middle) : 
Singular  PluraJ- 


3.  ευροίεν 


I.  όναίμην  (fr.  δνίνημι) 
δωη  (fr.  δίδωμι) 
λάβοι 
3·  *  τΰχοι 
φάγοι 
γένοιτο 

3·  First  aorist  (act.  and  middle) : 

Singular  Plural 

I.  ευξαίμην 
χερισσεύσαι 


3· 


χλεονάσαι 
καταρτίσαι 
w κατευθυναι 


3· 


ποιήσαιεν 

ψηλαφήσειαν 


4·  First  aorist  passive: 

Third  sing.,  λογισθείη,  χληθυνθείη,  τηρηθείη. 

Observe  that:  1.  There  are  two  mode  signs  for 
the  optative,  either  1  or  ιη.  2.  i  is  used  with  the¬ 
matic  tense  stems,  as  εχοι,  ευξαίμην.  3.  ιη  is  used  with 


214 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


the  non-thematic  tense  stems,  as  εΥη,  δώη.  4.  ιε  and 
ta  in  the  third  person  plural  of  both  stems.  5.  The 
mode  sign  (t)  contracts  with  the  vowel  of  the  stem. 

510.  A  wish  about  the  future  is  usually  expressed 
in  the  New  Testament  by  the  optative  (generally 
the  aorist),  e.g., 

αυτός  δέ  6  θεός  τής  ειρήνης  ayiaaat  υμάς  όλοτελεις,  May 
the  God  of  peace  himself  sanctify  you  wholly. 

The  commonest  wish  of  this  kind  is  the  phrase 
μή  γένοίτο,  may  it  not  become. 

A  wish  about  the  future  may  be  expressed  by 
όφελον  1  and  the  future  indicative  —  once  in  N.  T. 

511.  A  wish  about  the  present  is  expressed  by  όφελον 
and  the  imperfect  indicative,  e.g., 

όφελον  ψυχρός  ής  ή  ζεστός,  would  that  thou  Wert  cold  ΟΥ 
hot. 

512.  A  wish  about  the  past  is  expressed  by  όφελον 
and  the  aorist  indicative,  e.g., 

'όφελον  έβασιλεόσατε,  would  that  you  did  reign 

513.  The  fourth  class  condition  is  the  condition 
undetermined  and  with  remote  prospect  of  deter¬ 
mination.  ei  and  the  optative  in  the  protasis,  and 
the  optative  with  άν  in  the  apodosis.  In  the  New 
Testament  no  whole  example  of  this  class  of  con¬ 
ditions  occurs.  There  is  found  the  condition  (pro¬ 
tasis)  or  the  conclusion  (apodosis),  but  not  both  at 
the  same  time. 

εί  καί  χάσχοιτε,  if  you  should  even  suffer  (protasis) 
εύξαίμην  άν,  I  could  pray  (potential  optative). 

1  δφελον  is  just  the  second  aor.  of  οφείλω  without  augment. 


PART  II:1  SUPPLEMENT  TO  PART  I 


1  Part  II  is  based  on  ilA  Grammar  of  the  Greek 
New  Testament  in  the  Light  of  Historical  Research  ,M 
by  A.  T.  Robertson. 


. 

' 

1 


. 


.  :  :·· 


,· 


. 

, 


. 


■ 

' 

·. 

, 


SOUNDS  AND  WRITING 


217 


A.  Sounds  and  Writing 

§  1.  Syncope  is  the  suppression  of  a  short  vowel 
between  consonants  for  the  sake  of  facility  in  pro¬ 
nunciation.  Tnus  χατρός  for  χατέρος. 

§  2.  Diaeresis  (. separation )  is  indicated  by  a  double 
dot  (*’),  written  over  t  or  u  to  show  that  t  or  u  does 
not  form  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel. 
Thus  χρωΐ,  early;  ίσχύϊ,  by  strength;  Μωϋσής,  Moses. 

§  3.  Elision  is  the  dropping  of  a  short  vowel  at  the 
end  of  a  word  before  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel. 
E.g.,  ax’  αρχής  for  άχδ  αρχής,  ούδ’  ΐνα  for  ουδέ  tva, 
άφ’  έαυτοΰ  for  άχδ  έαυτοΰ. 

Note  that  an  apostrophe  marks  the  omission  of 
the  vowel. 

§  4.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  a  vowel  or  diph¬ 
thong  at  the  end  of  a  word  with  one  at  the  beginning 
of  the  next  word.  Thus  κάμοί  for  καί  έμοί;  κάκείνος  for 
και  έκεΐνος;  τουνομα  for  τδ  δνομα. 

Note  that  crasis  is  indicated  by  the  coronis  (’) 
over  the  contracted  form. 

§  5.  When  a  smooth  mute  (x,  κ,  τ)  is  brought  before 
the  rough  breathing  by  elision  or  in  forming  com¬ 
pounds,  it  is  changed  to  the  corresponding  rough 
mute.  This  is  called  aspiration.  Thus  άνθ’  ών  for 
άντί  ών;  έφ’  ω  for  έχΐ  φ;  άφίημι  (άχδ  -f  ?ημΟ· 


218 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


§  6.  The  vowels  a,  e,  o  are  often  interchanged  in 
words  of  the  same  root.  Sometimes  there  is  an 
interchange  among  different  vowels.  This  is  called 
interchange  or  gradation  of  vowels.  Thus  πείθω, 
second  perf.  πέποιθα;  τρέφω,  I  nourish ,  τροφή,  nourish¬ 
ment ,  έτράφην,  I  was  nourished. 

§  7.  Modern  editors  of  Greek  texts  use  four  punc¬ 
tuation  marks:  the  comma  and  period  are  used  as 
in  English;  the  interrogation  mark  (;)  is  in  form 
like  the  English  semicolon;  the  point  above  the 
line  (*)  corresponds  to  the  English  semicolon  or 
colon. 


PARADIGMS  OF  NOUNS 


219 


B.  Paradigms  of  Nouns 


{a)  Substantives 


§  8.  Some  masculines  in  -ας  of  the  first  declension. 

βορράς,  δ,  north  (wind) 


Singular 
Nom.  βορράς 


Gen.  ' 
Abl. 

j 


βορρά 


Loc. 


Ins. 

Dat. 

Acc. 

Voc. 


β°ΡΡ<? 

βορράν 

βορρά 


So  declined  are  some  proper 
names  in  -ας. 


§  9.  The  normal  form  of  contract  substantives 
(those  with  stems  in  -ε-  or  -o-  of  the  second  declen¬ 
sion)  may  be  seen  in  the  masculine  and  neuter  of 
the  contract  adjective  διπλούς  (§14). 

Frequently  these  substantives  are  found  in  the  un¬ 
contracted  form.  Thus  δστέα,  acc.  plur.  of  δστούν 
(δστέον). 


§  10.  Substantives  of  the  third  declension  with 
stems  in  -u-. 


στάχυ ς,  δ,  ear  of  corn 


220 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 

Gen. 

στάχυς 

στάχυες 

Abl. 

j 

Loc. 

-  στάχυος 

σταχυων 

Ins. 
Dat.  j 

στάχυι 

στάχυσι 

Acc. 

στάχυν 

στάχυας 

So 

are  declined  Ισχύς,  ή,  strength 

;  όσφυς,  ή, 

Ιχθύς, 

δ,  fish; 

etc. 

§ιι. 

Substantives  of  the  third 

declension 

stems  in  -ο  υ- 

(-Of-). 

βους,  δ,  ΟΧ 

Singular 

Plural 

Nom. 
Gen.  ' 

βους 

[βόες] 

Abl. 

J 

Loc. 

βοός 

βοών 

Ins. 
Dat.  „ 

Υ 

ΤΟ 

Ο 

[βουσί] 

Acc. 

βουν 

βόας 

So  are  declined  νους,  6,  mind ;  πλους,  6,  voyage; 
and  χοΰς,  δ,  dust. 

§  12.  The  following  substantives  show  some  pe¬ 
culiarities,  either  of  form  or  accent:  τδ  γόνυ,  knee; 
ή  γυνή,  woman ;  ή  θρίξ,  hair;  τδ  οδς,  ear;  τδ  ύδωρ, 
water ,  and  δ  κυων,  [κυνός],  [κυνί],  [κυνα].  Plu.  κόνες,  ί 
[κυνών],  κυσι,  κυνας. 


PARADIGMS  OF  NOUNS  221 

Singular 


Nom. 

[γόνυ] 

γυνή 

θρίξ 

ου  ς 

ύδωρ 

Gen. 

Abl. 

Loc. 

”  [γόνατο 

ς]  γυναικός 

[τριχός] 

[ώτός] 

ύδατος 

Ins. 

-  [γόνατι] 

γυναικί 

[τριχί] 

[ώτί] 

ύδατι 

Dat.  „ 
Acc. 

[γόνυ] 

γυναίκα 

τρίχα 

ους 

ύδωρ 

Voc. 

γύναι 

Plural 

Nom. 

γόνατα 

γυναίκες 

τρίχες 

ώτα 

υδατα 

Gen.  ^ 

Abl. 

Loc. 

γονάτων 

γυναικών 

τριχών 

[ώτων] 

ύδάτων 

Ins. 

-  γόνασι 

γυναιξί 

θριξί 

ώσί 

υδασι 

Dat. 

Acc. 

γόνατα 

γυναίκας 

τρίχας 

ώτα 

υδατα 

( b )  Adjectives 

§13. 

ίδιος,  one's  own ,  and  μικρός, 

small , 

of  the 

a-  and 

ο-  declension. 

Singular 

Μ. 

F.  N. 

Μ . 

F. 

Ν. 

Nom. 

ίδιος 

ίδια  ίδιον 

μικρός 

μικρά 

μικρόν 

Gen.  ] 

Abl. 

Loc. 

-  ίδιου 

ίδιας  ίδιου 

μικρού 

μικράς 

μικρού 

Ins. 

■  ίδίψ 

ίδίςι  ίδίψ 

μικρφ 

μικρςί 

μικρφ 

Dat.  _ 
Acc. 

ίδιον 

ιδίαν  ίδιον 

μικρόν 

μικράν 

μικρόν 

Voc. 

ίδιε 

ίδία  ίδιον 

u-ί,κρέ 

μικρά 

μικρόν 

222 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Plural 


Nom. 

ίδιοι 

’ιδιαι 

ίδια  μικροί 

μικραί  μικρά 

Gen. 

Abl.  , 

*  ίΰίων 

Ιδίων 

ιδίων  μικρών 

μικρών  μικρών 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  ίδίοις 

ίδίαις 

ίδίοις  μικροΐς 

μικραίς  μικροΐς 

Dat. 

Acc. 

ΐδίο 

υς 

ιδίας 

’ίδια  μικρούς 

μικράς  μικρά 

Voc. 

like  nominative 

§  14. 

Contract  adjectives  of  the  a- 

and  ο-  declen- 

sion. 

διπλούς 

,  twofold ,  double. 

Singular 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

διπλοο- 

διπλοη- 

διπλοο- 

Nom. 

Gen. 

διχλούς 

διπλή 

διπλοΰν 

Abl. 

κ 

διπλού 

διπλής 

διπλού 

Loc. 

Ins. 

► 

διπλφ 

διπλή 

διπλφ 

Dat. 

Acc. 

διπλούν 

διπλήν 

διπλούν 

Plural 

Nom. 

διπλοί 

διπλαΐ 

διπλά 

Gen.  ' 

Abl. 

j 

- 

διπλών 

διπλών 

διπλών 

Loc. 

Ins. 

«- 

διπλοΐς 

διπλαΐς 

διπλοΐς 

Dat.  „ 
Acc. 

διπλούς 

διπλάς 

διπλά 

Of  like  form  are  those  whose  stems  end  in  e. 


PARADIGMS  OF  NOUNS  223 

a.  If  ε,  t,  or  p  precedes  the  stem  vowel,  a  is  found 
in  the  fem.  sing,  instead  of  η  (sometimes  η  occurs). 
So  are  declined — 

χρυσούς  (χρύσεος),  -ή,  -οΰν,  golden 
αργυρούς  (άργύρεος),  -ά,  -οΰν,  of  silver 

§  15.  Adjectives  (of  the  third  declension)  with 
stem  in  -u-  are  declined  like  όξύς,  sharp. 


j 

Singular 

Plural 

M. 

F. 

Ν. 

Μ. 

F. 

Ν. 

Nom. 

όξύς 

δξεΐα 

δξύ 

όξεΐς 

[όξεΐαι] 

δξέα 

Gen. 
Abl.  J 

y  δξέως 

δξείας 

όξέως 

όξέων 

όξειών 

δξέων 

Loc. 

Ins. 

*  όξεΐ 

[οξεία] 

όξεΐ 

[δ  ξέσι] 

δξείαις 

[δξέσι] 

Dat. 

Acc. 

[όξύν] 

όξεΐαν 

όξύ 

όξεΐς 

δξείας 

δξέα 

So  βαρύς,  heavy ;  βραχύς,  short;  ευθύς,  straight . 

§  16.  Most  of  the  participles  with  stems  in  -οντ- 
are  declined  like  the  present  participle  of  είμί.  Thus: 


M. 

F. 

Ν. 

Μ . 

F. 

Ν. 

Nom. 

ών 

ούσα 

δν 

δντες 

ούσαι 

δντα 

Gen.  Ί 
Abl. 

j 

“ δντος 

ουσης 

δντος 

δντων 

ούσών 

δντων 

Loc. 

Ins. 

-  δντι 

ουσγ) 

ν 

οντι 

ούσι 

οδσαις 

ούσι 

Dat. 

Acc. 

δντα 

ούσαν 

δν 

δντας 

οδσας 

δντα 

224 


BEGINNERS’  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


C.  Pronouns 

§17.  A  few  forms  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun 
οδε,  ή  δε,  τόδε,  this ,  occur  in  the  New  Testament.  It 
is  declined  like  the  article  (δ)  with  the  enclitic  δε 
added. 

§  18.  Most  other  pronouns  (not  personal)  are  de¬ 
clined  in  the  first  and  second  declensions,  and  may 
be  easily  learned,  as  they  are  needed,  from  a  lexicon. 


PARADIGMS  OF  VERBS 


225 


§  19.  Simple 

Indic. 

S. 

P. 

SUBJ. 

S. 

P. 

Opt. 

S. 

P. 

Imp. 

S. 

P. 

Inf. 

Part. 


D.  Paradigms  of  the  Verb 

ω-verb.  λύω. 


Active  Voice 


Present 

Imperfect 

Future 

I.  λύω 

ελυον 

λύσω 

2.  λύεις 

ελυες 

λύσεις 

_  3·  λύει 

ελυε 

λύσει 

I.  λύομεν 

έλύομεν 

λύσομεν 

2.  λύετε 

έλύετε 

λύσετε 

3.  λύουσι 

^λυον 

λύσουσι 

1.  λύω 

2.  λύης 

3*  Ml) 

1.  λύωμεν 

2.  λύητε 
3·  λύωσι 


1.  [λύοιμι] 

2.  [λύοις] 

3·  λύοι 

1.  [λύοιμεν] 

2.  λύοιτε 
3·  λύοιεν 

2.  λΰε 
3·  λυέτω 
2.  λύετε 
3·  λυέτωσαν 
λύειν 

λύων,  λύουσα,  λΰον 


λύσειν 

λύσων,-ουσα,-ον 


226 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


I 

Aorist 

ι  Perfect 

ι  Pluperf . 

Indic. 

r 

I. 

έλυσα 

λέλυκα 

[έλελύχειν] 

S.  - 

2. 

έ'λυσας 

λέλυχας 

[έλελύχεις] 

3· 

ελυσε 

λέλυκε 

(έ)λελύκει 

r 

I. 

έλύσαμεν 

λελύχαμεν 

[έλελύχειμεν] 

Ρ.  - 

2. 

έλύσατε 

λελύχατε 

(έ)λελύχειτε 

3· 

έλυσαν 

λελύκασι, 

(έ)λελύκεισαν 

or  -αν 

Subj. 

S. 

P. 


1.  λύσω 

2.  λύσης  Periphrastic: 

3.  λύση  Perf.  act.  par- 

1.  λύσωμεν  ticiple  and 

2.  λύσητε  pres.  subj.  of 

3.  λύσωσι  είμ(. 


Opt. 

S.  - 


P.  i 


1.  [λύσαιμι] 

2.  [λύσαις] 

3.  λύσαι 

1.  [λύσοαμεν] 

2.  [λύσα^τε] 

3·  λύσειαν  or  -αιεν 


Imp. 


S. 
Ρ. 


2.  λΰσον 
3·  λυσάτω 
2.  λύσατε 
3·  λυσάτωσαν 


Inf. 

Part. 


λΟσαι 


λελυχένα! 


λύσας  λελυχώς,  -υΐα,  -ός 
λύσασα 
λύσαν 


Indic. 

S. 

P. 

SUBJ. 

S. 

P. 


Opt. 

S. 

P. 

Imp. 

S. 

P. 


Inf. 

Part. 


PARADIGMS  OF  VERBS  227 

Middle  Voice 


Present 

Imperfect 

Future 

/■* 

I. 

λύομαι 

έλυόμην 

λύσομαι 

H 

2. 

λ  6η 

έλύου 

λύση 

3· 

λύεται 

έλύετο 

λύσεται 

* 

I. 

λυόμεθα 

έλυόμεθα 

λυσόμεθα 

A 

2. 

λύεσθε 

έλύεσθε 

λύσεσθε 

·» 

3· 

λύονται 

έλύοντο 

λύσονται 

- 

I. 

λύωμαι 

- 

2. 

λ  6η 

w 

3· 

λύηται 

r 

I. 

λυώμεθα 

2. 

λυησθε 

- 

3· 

λύωνται 

I. 

[λυοίμην] 

H 

2. 

[λύοιο] 

·* 

3- 

λύοιτο 

* 

I. 

[λυοιμεθα] 

2. 

[λύοισθε] 

s. 

3- 

[λύοιντο] 

r 

2. 

λύου 

< 

3- 

λυέσθω 

2. 

λύεσθε 

1 

3· 

λυέσθωσαν 

λύεσθαι 

λύσεσθαι 

λυόμενος, 

-η,  -ον  λυσόμενος,  -η,  - 

228 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Indic. 

S.  h 


P.  S 


StJBJ. 

s.  * 


P.  < 


Opt. 

S.  - 


P.  ^ 


Imp. 


P.  - 

Inf. 

Part. 


i. 


2. 

3- 

I. 


2. 

3· 


1. 


2. 

3· 

1. 


2. 

3. 


I. 


2. 

3· 

1. 


2. 

3- 

2. 

3. 

2. 

3- 


1  Aorist 

έλυσάμην 

έλυσω 

έλύσατο 

έλυσάμεθα 

έλύσασθε 

έλόσαντο 


I  Perfect 

λέλυμαι 

λέλυσαι 

λέλυταί 

λελύμεθα 

λέλυσθε 

λέλυνται 


ι  Pluperf. 

[έλε>  άμην] 

[έλέλυσο] 

(έ)λέλυτο 

[έλελύμεθα] 

(έ)λέλυσθε 

(έ)λέλυντο 


λόσωμαι 

λ  ύ  σγ)  Periphrastic : 

λύσηται  Perf.  midd. 
λυσώμεθα  part,  and 
λύσησθε  Sllbj.  of  είμ£. 
λυσωνται 

λυσαίμην 

[λύσαιο] 

[λόσαιτο] 

[λυσαίμεθα] 

[λύσαίσθε] 

[λυσαιντο] 

λϋσαι  λέλυσο 

λυσάσθω  [λελύσθω] 

λόσασθε  λέλυσθε 

λυσάσθωσαν  [λελύσθωσαν] 

λύσασθαι  λελόσθα: 


λυσάμενος,  -η,  -ον  λελυμένος,  -η,  -ον 


Passive  Voice 

The  passive  voice  of  the  present,  imperfect,  per¬ 
fect  and  pluperfect  tenses  is  the  same  in  form  as  the 
middle. 


PARADIGMS  OF  VERBS 


229 


ι  Aorist  ι 

Indic. 

I.  έλύθην 

S.  * 

2.  έλυθης 

.  3·  <^υθη 

I.  έλύθημεν 

Ρ.  - 

2.  έλύθητε 

3·  Πόθησαν 

SUBJ. 

I.  λυθώ 

S.  - 

2.  λυθής 

.  3·  λυθγ) 

I.  λυθώμεν 

Ρ.  - 

2.  λυθήτε 

3·  λυθώσι 

Opt. 

I.  [λυθείην] 

S.  - 

2.  [λυθείης] 

„  3·  λυθείη 

I.  [λυθείημεν] 

Ρ.  - 

2.  [λυθείητε] 

_  3·  [λυθείησαν] 

Imp. 

2.  λύθητι 

S.  | 

3·  λυθήτω 

Ρ.  - 

2.  λόθητε 

3·  λυθήτωσαν. 

Inf. 

λυθήναι 

Part. 

λυθείς,  -εΐσα,  -έν 

Future  I  Future  Perf. 

λυθήσομαι  [λελύσομαε] 
λυθήση  [λελύση] 

λυθήσεται  [λελύσεται] 

λγφησόμεθα  [λελυσόμεθα] 
λυθήσεσθε  [λελύσεσθε] 
λυθήσονταε  [λελύσονται] 


[λυθήσεσθαε] 

λυθησόμενος 


230 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


§  20.  κάθημαι  (κατα  -f-  ήμαι),  I  sit ,  I 

Stem  ήσ- 
Present 

INDIC.  f  I.  κάθημαι  f  I. 

S.  i  2.  κάθη  -s  2. 

3.  κάθηται  [  3- 

I.  [καθήμεθα]  Γ  I. 

P.  -J  2.  [κάθησθε]  -*  2. 

3·  κάθηνται  (_  3· 

SUBJ.  Γ  I.  [καθώμαι] 

S.  -  2.  [καθή] 

.  3·  [χαθηται] 

I.  [καθώμεθα] 

Ρ.  ^  2.  καθήσθε 

3·  [χαθώνται] 

Imp.  Γ  2.  κάθου  (as  if  from 
S.  ί  κάθομαι) 


am  seated . 

Imperfect 

[έκαθήμην] 

[έκάθησο] 

έκάθητο 

[έκαθήμεθα] 

[έκάθησθε] 

έκάθηντο 


Ρ.  \ 


3· 

2. 

3· 


Inf. 

Part. 


καθήσθαι 

καθήμενος,  -η,  -ον 


§  21.  κείμαι,  I  lie ,  I  am  laid. 

Stem  κει- 


Indic. 


S. 


Present 

1.  κείμαι 

2.  [κεϊσαι] 
3·  κείται 


-l 


Imperfect 

1.  [έκείμην] 

2.  [εκεισο] 

3.  εκειτο 


PARADIGMS  OF  VERBS 


231 


P.  - 

Inf. 

Part. 


Present 

Imperfect 

I.  κείμεθα 

I.  [έκείμεθα] 

2.  [κείσθε] 

2.  [εκεισθε] 

3.  κεΐνται 

„  3·  εκειντο 

κεΐσθαι 

κείμενος,  -η,  -ον 


§  22.  είμι,  I  am  going,  occurs  only  in  compounds  in 
the  New  Testament. 


Indic. 

S.  - 


P.  λ 


Stem  I-,  εί- 

Present 

1.  - 

2.  - 

3· - 

1.  - 

2.  - 

3-  -Τάσι 

-ίέναι 


Imperfect 

1. ’ - 

2.  - 

.  3·  “T i« 

1.  - 

2.  - 

.  3·  -ίεσαν 


-ίων,  -ίο  Οσα,  -ίόν. 


Inf. 

Part. 


Classes  of  Verbs 


232 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


CO 

a 

O 

•  T“H 

43 

cd 

o 

<d 

•  rH 

o 

S 


cd 

4-3 

U 

ω 

o 

Λ 

4-3 


a 

CD 

+3 

co 


cd 

u 

CD 

i> 

CD 

co 


-M 

d  . 

<d  a 

ΙΟ  »rH 

<D  rr-i 

u  ’d 

cl  a> 

S 

d  g 

5  o 

«44 


4-3 

O 

O 

U 

u 

o 

a 

CD 

4-3 

in 

*P 

*ri  co 
C»  a) 

>  X 

v  £G 

Λ  £ 

4-3  CO 

o  ° 

in 

x  g 
*g  .2 

•Q  +3 

<d  2 
u  "d 
cd  cd 

CO  rd 

<D  43 

3  ‘g 

CD 

4-3  TJ 

d 


«4-4 

O 


O 
rd 

"8 

6 

S  S 

5  « 

°  Λ 

43  X) 

txo  CD 

d  > 

CD 

«-Η  rd 

O  4^ 

I * 


o 

u 

Pd 


^3 

<D 

•  1-4 

in 
in 

2  O 

O  Ih 


4-3 

o 


0 

U 

d 


in 

d 

.§  a 

d  <D 
Cd  4-3 

>  «> 

<D  rf> 

e5  & 

H  > 

0 

CO  ^ 

w  £ 
M?5  O 


cd  t/ι 


*4 

O 

a 

r£  S 
u  m 
CD  i 

>  *6 
M  d 
CD 
d 
u 


CD 


o  *S 

*  a  £ 

H  O  cd 

£  £ 


43 

d 

o 

rd 


o 

o 

u 

u 

o 


Co  . 

3  S 

"§  2 

CO 


in 

in 

< 

•J 

o 


d 

£ 

o 

> 

o 


Pd 


CD  -d 

cd  cd 

a 

CD 

rd 

'4_> 

CM  d 

C03  5 


«ο 

<3 


CO 

8 

4-3 

a 

CO 

1 

Cd 

§ 

rP 

43 

CO 

CD 

4-3 

> 

d 

<D 

CD 

CO 

CD 

rd 

4-3 

• 

Ό 

u 

CD 

pH 

b 

<D 

rd 

κ 

co 

Cd 

Co 

•r» 

5^ 


8 

«Ο 

Co 

CO 

K 

Cd 


> 

i=* 

CE3 


•ς^  -i=* 


v- 


<o 

Co 

«4 


3 

tO 

~f=* 


Q> 

d 

CD 

<5> 

<0 

*  «S> 

CO 

CD 

H-i 

U 

3 

Oh 

·-» 

8 

C^> 

HO 

CD 

A. 

rd 

43 

CO 

Fut. 

0 

fc> 

-ί=· 

> 

SC 

cd 

3 

Q> 

to 

£ 

CO 

u 

«50 

d 

r-Si 

< D 

Ph 

Ph 

<o 

rO 

<3 


o 

»"h 


8 

zL 

8 

> 

o 

to 


2.  κάθ-ημαι,  I  sit  καθήσομαι 

3·  κείμαι,  I  lie 
4.  φημί,  I  say 

§25.  Second  Class.  The  non-thematic  reduplicated  present. 

The  reduplicated  verb-stem  without  the  thematic  vowel  appears  as  the  present. 


CLASSES  OF  VERBS 


233 


to 

«ο 

S3 

V. 

«Ο 


> 

3" 

> 

p- 

> 

S=· 

ί=· 

CD 

i=- 

<D 

CD 

-8 

CD 

m3 

MU 

t* 

MU 

<50 

Θ· 

t> 

s*u 

*8 

MU 

MU 

S  i=* 

S3  <33 
V*  w> 

δ  60 

JZ  *ω 


<o 

<o 

si 

w 

·*> 

8 

«-» 

£$ 

to 

«ο 

si 

8 

3, 

O 

rL 

I-* 

> 

rt 

— * 

o 

K3 

3 

MU 

»-» 

tu 

<33 

• 

ω 

<50 

<o 

MU 

o 

MU 

MU 

b, 

<o 

*8 

f 

&s 

<50 

• 

O 

3 

> 

·+-> 

1 

. 

8 

Q* 

• 

O 

<0 

8 

VP 

8 

Si 

S3 

• 

N 

3 

<o 

* 

i=" 

t* 

-3 

t* 

t> 

tu 

CD 

1 

8 

Ό 

to 

b 

MU 

«3 

fc> 

otu 

vtu 

1 

MU 

f 

»s 

<o 

•<s> 

K 

SO 


8 

* 

3 

<50 

fctU 


8 

»f=* 

f> 


3 


/a  3  3 

3  fc>  t> 

S  -ί=*  ·*=* 
'3  a-  ij 

to  *8  t> 


3 

t> 

-i=* 

CD 


to 


to 

* 

•g 

SuO 

b3 

S 

S3 

to 

Ό 

si 

<o 

S«5 

«Ο 

·-■<» 

•Co 

to 

to 

K 

►mi 

**M 

b, 

»-» 

rt 

•s 

rL 

»s 

zL 

·> 

«-> 

rL 

3 

i=* 

P· 

p- 

<50 

V«J 

CD 

«k»-» 

t> 

<50 

5«-> 

b> 

• 

• 

• 

• 

t— 1 

Oi 

CO 

'Φ 

•ts> 

·*■» 


8 

8 

«*<4 

> 

fc> 

so 

to 

i=* 

i=- 

X 

So 

t* 

f 

s=* 

so 

t> 

:tU 

t> 

stu 

03 

£(U 

3 


Ό 

•ts> 


so 

to» 

I 

£ 

O 

£ 

SO 

β 


in 

cn 

o 

Q  « 

T3  so 

PC  to 

t— i  so 

«  i 


CO 

<N 

«?5 


<υ 

-μ 

in 

4-> 

a 

<D 

t/3 

<D 

V-t 

Ot 

<D 

τΰ 

+-> 


U 

O 

M-i 

O 


to 

to 

S3 

SO 


to 

to 

S3 


> 

i=* 

<33 

*i=* 


> 

ί=· 

cd 

fc> 

o 

o 

X 


£  £ 

^  *i=- 


8 

O 

y 

r< 

3 

o 

U 

• 

to 

Q 

N 

8 

o 

r< 

u 

N 

ϊ< 

o 

V» 

-8 

-i=* 

H 

to 

b, 

>- 

?C 

*8 

6 

.  <υ 

-i=* 

-8 

8 

>  Ο  8 

°  f=*  g 

>-  N  3 

88-80 

^  ^  5< 

*s=·  *·*=■  »$3-  *£Γ 


to 

V 

o 


t2  JJ/> 
^  -<3 


*t3 

ΰ 

to 


£ 

to 


_  8 

3  zL 

f  3  o 
f  b  b 
N  ο  o 
8  ο  o 
>-  X  * 
*8  *8  *8 


to 

P> 

SO 

*-*  V. 

si 

1  to 

"Τ'  sh 

8  „ 

^  o 


rL 

D 

ri- 

3 

o 

-1-0 

(D 

‘-J 

to 

K 

b, 

■ 

Ϊ- 

3  W 
3 

> 

<< 

-O 

H 

3 

N  ^3 
8  o 

Vk.» 

to 

N 

• 

ϊ“ 

}C 

"8 

l·· 

(N 

*8 

-8  "8 

• 

M 

ci 

tOS 

M 

oi  CO 

234 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


> 

g 

«0 

> 

X 

> 

X 

> 

cr 

> 

> 

> 

X 

CD 

<D 

4-3 

• 

to 

> 

> 

<o 

CD 

CD 

CD 

X 

M«-» 

o 

JD 

P 

iD 

Ό 

in 

«ο 

X 

X 

•X 

• 

V 

X 

'3* 

tu 

X 

'3- 

tu 

θ- 

'8 

Ο¬ 

CD 

X 

'ω 

<05 

'X 

X 

tu 

t* 

fc> 

n 

i3 

CD 

t> 

Vfc_> 

tu 

<D5 

C> 

Mfc^» 

tu 

«to 

7* 

> 

> 

Χ 

MU 

* 

CD 

Cs 

X 

"8 

'X 

MU 

1 

MU 

·Ό> 

m 

CD 

MU 

MU 

iH 

e 

«-» 

cu 

to 

8 

to 

·-» 

8 

rL 

CD 

«ο 

«-» 

•X 

«to 

8 

rL 

X 

3* 

8 

rL 

X 

3* 

8 

rL 

X 

«_» 

d. 

rL 

8 

Ο¬ 

8 

rL 

X 

tu 

8 

rL 

X 

X 

D 

tu 

t* 

t) 

rd 

4-> 

g 

«ο 

<3 

X 

8 

rL 

t> 

«_» 

ω 

«fc> 

8 

rL 

«>» 

U) 

MU 

MU 

o 

Χ 

60 

X 

X 

«to 

X 

> 

;> 

> 

MU 

'tu 

MU 

ω 

o 

-to 

MU 

~8 

'X 

r}=* 

X 

to 

H 

'w'  — ^ 

*+-«  ^ 

X 

<o 

<3 


«to 


«ο 

•*4 

V. 

«to 


8 

8 

8 

e* 

* 

X 

8 

X 

3* 

Ο¬ 

X 

'tu 

Χ 

X 

Τ' 

MU 

MU 

"8 

X 

X 

8 


> 

X 


8 


2< 

>  £ 


8 

>; 

3 

ω 

I Γ» 

fc> 

■>.kj 

& 

ω 

& 


8 

fc> 


O 

4-* 


<D 

-X 

in 

I 

XI 

u 

CD 

> 


tu 


in 


«ο 


4- 

«to 


CD 

bfl  ~v) 

G  1 

o  -e 

£  s 


8 

CD 

»-» 

O 

MU 

ti 


8 

8  X 
N  3 
c*  tu 
fc>  Θ* 
mu  "ω 
fc>  H 


JJLP 


3*^  3· 

MU  o  MU  „ 

>  >  >  O'  _ 

*8  *X  ΛΧ  -p  fctU  MU  fctU 


O- 


•± 

'8 

JJLP 

8 

JJO* 

8 

fc> 

t> 

tu 

X 

D 

tu 

t* 

in 

<D 

> 

bX) 

to 

•<s> 

V 

8 

fc> 

a»-» 

> 

o 

ti 

> 

o 

X 

tu 

o 

X 

'8 

Λ 

cj 

tu 

«fc» 

3 

60 

^o 

i-i· 

* 

4-3 

H 

r\ 

X 

Q- 

MU 

^tu 

itU 

MU 

MU 

t_, 

X 

fctu 

fctu 

ttu 

Fut. 

3 

jjj* 

«■— ■ 

o 

8 

rL 

o 

JJLP 

3 

-3* 

"8 

«.» 

8 

rL 

o 

JJLP 

3 

3 

t> 

'ω 

X 

> 

Q- 

Ο¬ 

MU 

'X 

8 

^8 

*8 

Χ 

60 

to-p 

X 

s 

«to 

to 


S 

«to 

<2. 


X 

«_» 

O 

> 

"8 


3 

X 

Mfc_» 

o 

> 

'8 


8 

•«4 

«to 

«to 

•  -4 

«SO 

•  rCi 

«to 

«to 

toto 

§ 

«to 

«to 

V. 

«to 

<o 

X 

«to 

·»  «.  Xi 


X  T 

cl.  lt 

-w  8 
°' 

X 

Vs-// 

8 

r L  3 

O  Py. 

X  v8 
O-  ex. 

*8  X 


I  * 

X  "Τ' 

«ο  ω 
-co  s 
"  o 
to 

«-*  v  V 
8 

rL  3 

O  'tu 

X  * 

MO  O 
M3 


4  I 

4  tU 

-I  X 

8 

Γ  X 


3 

t> 

o 

tu 

t-* 

fc> 


«to 

«to 

**4 

*-4 

«to 

►c> 


>  I 

3 

tu 

Ir* 

t> 


3  v=> 

°  tu 
t* 
t> 


lo  VO  IX  00 


I 

8 
vJ* 

' — '  'tU 

3  *8 
'8  * 

^.r 

•  · 
.  Ο  I-I 

Q\  M  t-H 


m 

Ή  «a 

C$  0) 

.2  rt 

vu  τΰ 


CD 

£ 

O 

> 

o 

•  H 

4-> 

Ctf 


8 


in 


CD 


CD  m 

A  Λ 

-X  tQ 

<D  <D 

g  > 

.  ccj 
»*C>  CD 


fe< 


8 

«to 

«ο 

«to 


3  JL 

t>  o* 
tu  tu 
H  X 


«to 

<3 

v  3 

«to  «to 


Ά  l’. 

5  x 


3  3 

CD  t' 

V«J  V«J 

tu  tu 

H  X 


8 

rL 

o 

JUL P 

o 

tu 

Θ- 


C5  «to 
4»  «ο 

X  ^ 

fc,  ^ 


Λ  I 

t-  J— 
«  3 

Ά  θ* 


3  3 
l·’  X 

'X 

**  Θ- 


H  Ol  CO  Tt· 


§  28.  Fifth  Class.  The  reduplicated  thematic  present. 

The  thematic  vowel  %  is  added  to  the  reduplicated  (c  in  redupl.)  verb-stem. 
The  verb-stem  shows  syncope  of  the  stem  vowel. 


CLASSES  OF  VERBS 


235 


• 

> 

to 

to 

i=* 

> 

Q 

ar> 

f=- 

-i=* 

ce> 

V 

ρ¬ 

ω 

X 

VO 

O 

>— 

t* 

VO 

VO 

• 

«ο 

to 

8 

tL 

S=* 

to 

> 

-ω 

?— 

&4 

ω 

Ό 

<3 


V* 

to 


<0 

*<4 


S 


8 

to 

<o 


8 

p- 

o 

'■U) 


8 

rL 


I 

ω 


8 

rl 

o 

> 


8 

* 

3 

t* 

VO 


> 

S=* 

d. 

p- 

8 

> 

-o 

o 

o 

p- 

fc> 

t> 

X 

to 

to 

to 

to 

H 

L» 

VO 

fctO 

*C0 

su> 

8 


8 


i 

t* 

(O 

N 


8 
ri. 
o 

V  ,  ^  ^ - X 

^  mo 

d.  *  C  3 

?  w  ^  £ 
S.»J  VkO 


01 


I 

* 

to 

t* 


3 

V» 

X 

V»_l 

Jr* 

CO 


H 

% 

<o 


•<s> 


s 

CD 

43 

co 

I 

U 

CD 

> 

<D 

Λ 

4-3 

O 

4-3 

TJ 

<d 

aj 

<d 

v-t 


a) 

£ 

o 

> 

o 

'  t-4 
43 

Oj 


<d 

8  Λ 

ίΟ  4-3 
«Ο 

£  <1) 

*.§  "d 


t> 

xz> 

d. 

O 

'S=- 

o 

o 

sj 

ccj 

ρ¬ 

fc> 

JULP 

ω 

to 

-ω 

«  — 

-se 

CT5 

-tv, 

CO 

• 

pSi 

t*  H 

to 

t"4 

1  H 

'  CD 

c> 

K  co 

Ό 

to 

►c 

V 

■V» 

4. 

8 

CO 

?  S 

>"4 

-  o 

*"4 

to 

>O 

'"4 

in 

< 

.  1 

£h 

3Γ  CD 

t  V? 

CJ  f 
W  ^ 
b  x 

ύ  © 

CO  9 
co 

oov 


X 

i 

<D  w 
b  CL> 
Oh  ^ 

0)  ^ 

rd  ,ϋ| 


u 

o 

<44 


a 

u 

o 

<4-1 


CO 

<D 


CD 

S 

s 


co 


>- 

CO 

<D 


•  *— I 

4-3 

CD 


o 

CO 


co 


CO 

a 

(D 

4-3 

CO 

r3 

43 


236  BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


> 

to  £ 
to  <Γ> 
<3  to 

^  -p 
δ  8 

cQ. 

^  MO 


to 

to 

■CL 


8 
rL 
to 

m-» 

t* 

δ  '« 
CL  cO. 
^  to 
cQ- 


> 

ί=· 

<X> 

'3 

t> 

MO 


8 

zi, 

to 

3 

t> 

MO 

t> 


tr* 

f 


fc> 

to 

a 

Vh 

o 

t+— ( 

o 

4-3 


to  P* 

^  -3  Γ.  CE> 

■  <4  iT  K 

Q  P·  ^  "8 

-Μ  *  4o  H 

N  MO  I 


to 

to 

<3 

■CL 


8 

I 

a 

u 

o 

MO  *44 


8 

N-  8 
=»  ZL 

«μ 

^  -g*  8 

«  X  f 

Cl  to  mo 

X  f 


Q- 

» 

rv 
ί3  > 

ci  ·  tH 

b  +-> 

CU  O 
<D 

Z  cu 

8  ω 

i  <D 

V-. 


> 

.  i=* 

to  CO 

to  > 

<3  S=·  '» 

-CL  r<  >  ° 

.  p  S 

V.  J—  <X5  O) 

3>  J-  O-  H 

-μτ  *μτ 


to  -j 
§  « 
■*·  ,< 


to 

i- 


8 

zL 


fV  }-  °- 

^  fcS=-  tof=- 


•w» 

to 

<3 


to 

Os 


8 

8 

>— 

8 

ϊ< 

8 

* 

m~0 

H 

r< 

Q- 

?< 

'to 

3 

to 

MO 

xj=- 

!< 

to 

ΧΛ 

<D 

4-> 

•  r-H 
£ 

>~ 

u 

o 


to 

<3 


8 

X 

r> 

o- 


v-,  'S=- 

£  δ 
Os  X 


8 

r< 

r< 

in 

£ 

Q- 

Ito 

1 

• 

■**<» 

to 

8 

ϋ 

> 

|D 

r< 

8 

1 r* 

H 

u 

1 

to 

MO 

Q 

to 

}- 

Ir* 

t-M 

Ds 

fti=- 

r<  ,£ 


8 


8 


to 

•rs> 

V. 

<o 


to 

£ 


8 

to 

8 

8 

JOLT 

8 

CL. 

> 

o 

to 

J-U* 

8 

»-* 

8 

'to 

8 

to 

•“8 

fci 

C4 

ϊ< 

o- 

3 

cd. 

MO 

>: 

to 

MO 

!=ί=· 

^to 

S — y 

i<o 

ϊ-tO 

X 

•s 

X 


3 

b< 


a  ’"■< 

/7"  - 

to  , 

ρ  tJo 

Μ  N 

s  »  r< 
^  ca  Q 


3·  3 

T  hi* 

&  ti 

8  r< 

CQ.  MO 


I 

8 

Ο¬ 

Χ 


3 

L-J* 

"8 

Ο¬ 

Χ 


■  *s> 

V. 

to 

m 

CD 

a 

•  rH 

4-3 


8 
iJJ' 
to  3 


8 

(4  JJU» 

'5=*  8 
X  f 
mo  sto 


a) 

3 

a-» 

8 

3 

a 

Jtr 

zL 

to 

Ir· 

8 

*3 

a-> 

& 

r< 

3 

JJLP 

-8 

CL. 

3 

to 

-3 

o 

m 

'TJ 

Fut . 

'to 

o. 

i=* 

X 

o 

up 

'8 

l·* 

cQu 

<4 

MO 

X 

to 

CJ 

d 

to 

Ό 

Si 

to 

•<4 

ΣΧ 

S 

<o 

to 

« 

to 

•CL 

<o 

X 

si 

ΰ 

tuO 

8 

►“M 

►«i 

Λ 

Va 

t  \ 

Λ\ 

d 

<3 

V. 

<3 

to 


I 

(O 

3 

3 

i-J* 

-3 

to 


in 

a 

cd 

40 

m 

Λ 

4-3 


<N 


£ 

Ό 

to 

<o 

bs 


H  N  CO 


4 

<3 

X  ^ 
η  #\ 

C4 

<=~ 

3 

to 
to 
^to 
C4 
F*  '8 
X  t* 

HS  C4 


N‘ 
8 
I r* 


3 

to 

to 


•  Q- 

'tn  ω 

\ 

in  < 
cS 
C 

1  g 

cc3  O 


to 

I 


m 

•  r-t 

cr1 


Q- 

> 

a 

•  rH 

in 

a 

0) 

40 

m 

40 

•  i-H 

is 

'to 


Q. 

to 

i 


Τ'- 

to 

I 


Q- 

·>» 

I 

•\ 

> 
—  - 

I 


Q- 

tO 

I 


Τ' 

to 


Q- 

at-» 

8 

i 

a 

o3 


8 

r-C 


8 

T- 


to 

•3  ?  x 

v.  >—  8  'to 

^  a  i; 

^  fcj=-  »-f=-  -« 


»3 

-L  ^ 
S  j- 
bt  ?~ 
"8 

<o 

Ό 

£ 

3 

o 

S 

S 

e 


I 

r< 

ω 

N- 

>- 

-8 


»3 

> 

to 

«r* 

«3  o 

<4 

*8  "8 


•4 


s 

to 

to 

to 

ΐ 


3 

r-C 

'to 

ϊ~ 

”8 


to 

to 

4 


I 

a- 

”8 

3 

CL. 

S'* 

8 


i 

T- 

to 

>: 

I 

o 

ti 

”8 


3 

> 

to 

t* 

i< 

o 

& 

*8 


μ  Μ  tO 


CLASSES  OF  VERBS 


237 


X 

> 

X 

O 

i=- 

<d 

-i=- 

CD 

Q- 

X 

i=* 

CD 

i=* 

Q- 

'8 

X 

*=· 

X 

i=* 

O. 

O 

U 

<D 

ci 

<23- 

MU 

>- 

Ο¬ 

Χ 

t> 

“8 

(> 

'8 

Xl 

rG 

40 

MU 

MU 

MU 

MU 

MU 

8 

d- 

c 3- 
to 


8 

d. 


8 

d- 

Q. 


8 
d- 

r< 

<23.  -j=-  x 

--ω  ^  mo  „ 

CO.  MU  X  fctU 


ϊ~  Q-  8 
'  ^ 
t> 


8 

S.  « 

ω  C 
Q. 

03-  -JD  X 
MU  V.  SO 

03.  mu  X 


8 

X 

r< 


X 

O 

8 

8 

Q- 

X 

—  X 

ω  x 

8 

tu 

Ο¬ 

H  i- 

<23- 

Ϊ— 

Χ 

t>  -ω 

fctu 

*i=- 

fctU 

ito 

•3 

r< 

«3 

Q- 

ω 

•3 

X 

*3 

Q- 

<U 

8 

Ο¬ 

<23- 

•Hi) 

Χ 

t> 

8 

to 


?s 

0 

Ό 

δ 

κ 

<o 

►8 

K 

8 

to 

•'M 

•mh 

**s 

•s 

—V 

•s 

I 

H 

1 

1 

CL 

O- 

X 

CO 

1 

tu 

8 

<23- 

•HO 

Q- 

t> 

Vs-/ 

X 

M/ 

3 

3 

3 

Q- 

3 

Q- 

rC 

ω 

X 

V.J 

S»J 

ω 

"8 

JM 

Ο¬ 

<23- 

MU 

Χ 

t> 

cs 

~8 

<o 


to 

•s 

cs 

'δ» 

V. 


X  I 

I  ο¬ 
χ  8 

i-  * 


3 

X 

8 

O 


3 

Q- 


TJ 

<D 

·+-> 

U 

<D 

03 

G 

•  1— t 

03 


d 

03 

d 

G 

o 

•  r-C 

-4-> 

<D 

»G 

4-2 

cd 

CL 

a 

>> 

03 

Oj 

03 

<D 


<D 


*o 

to 

8 

■fc. 

• 

Js. 

C5 


to 

to 

8 


to 


X 

i=* 

CD 

fc> 

d- 

-ί=· 

r< 

MU 


8 

d. 

d. 

J=- 

r< 

i" 

ω 


x 

ί=· 

CD 

M3 

fc* 

MU 


Ό 

8 


Ss* 

<0 


•3 

8 


8 

X 

i=- 

V» 

Q- 

'8 

d- 

►*=· 


8 

t> 

t* 


8 


8 

X 

8 

Θ- 

JD 

s^· 

<D 

'8 

8 

X 

3 

8 

3 

<23. 

"tij 

r< 

rL 

to 

H 

MU 

b* 

^CO 

<23. 

'to 

rL 

x 

o 


a. 

8 

d- 

X 

O 

<23- 

0 

CD 

> 

8 

8 

0 

<23- 

rL 

& 

s^· 

i:U> 

siu 

fetu 

X 

o 

X 

D 

V* 


a 

8 

0 

d. 

0 

CO 

3 

t2 

-  § 

0 

>4 

'i=* 

8  d. 

X 

8 

fc> 

• 

X 

CxO 

G 

•  1— ♦ 

8 

k. 

t* 

Q- 

8 

d- 

d.  0 

0  -9- 
t>  d- 

-JD  -iD 

8 

d. 

0 

"8 

<23-  <-< 

t: 

G 

•  rH 

cti 

-4-3 

G 

O 

o 

X 

a 

W 

cti 

*G 


<3 


8 

to 

<o 

to 

κ 


8 
•  -s» 
to 


1 

f 

Q- 

8 

d- 

-8 

3 

> 

'8 

V* 

Q- 

8 

d- 

►8 


to 

-8 

8 


8 

x 

8 

to 


8  ^  k, 

CcO  λ 

t*M  "Τ'  ^~s 

<23.  G 
CD 


►8 

8 

·*» 

3=j 


1 

8 

<23- 


8 

r< 


8 

r i. 


8 

to 

<3 

►8 


D 

t* 


3 

X 


3 

x 

'8 

<23- 


3 

X 

'8 

Λ 

8  8  8 

<23-  r<  rL 


£  § 

v8 

3  * 

^  D 
£  p 


M  CO  i-  10  vO 


Q. 

X 


<υ 

4-3 

<Λ 

ο 

in 


*d 

<υ 

*d 

*d 

Oj 

s 

α> 

CO 

aJ 

X 


*  s 


w 

aj 

X3 

3 

X 

'o. 

X 


ctf 

X 

£ 

d 

03 


Tt*  *0  Ό  tM.  CO  O', 


c.  With  the  suffix  τ.  The  verb-stem  is  always  a  labial  mute  (x,  β,  φ) .  β  or  φ  changes 
to  x  before  τ. 

Present  Fut.  Aorist  Per},  act.  Per],  pass.  A  or.  pass. 


238 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


> 

> 

P 

CD 

Θ- 

-O 

> 

P 

P 

CD 

8 

β- 

X 

X 

►ω 

Hi) 

» 

zL 

o 

'8 

X 

ω 

X 


8 

3 

40 

.<3 


i 

β- 

*8 


3 

t* 

fW 


X3 

C D 

’d 

*d 

ctf 

CO 


X 

to 


*d  G 

"  g 

S  O 

•  rH  C/5 

'  I  Q 

P  o 
o 

Q 

a 

»  rH 

•,H  CO 

s  n 
2  § 
?  s 

rQ  ^ 
Vh  +-> 
CD  C/5 

> 


3 

*d 

CD 

u 

in 


8 

<D 

-e- 

rQ 

D 

8 

4J 

r< 

*3* 

C/5 

"8 

o 

X 

X 

CD 

•HO 

fetl> 

g 

3 

•s* 

•  rH 

-p 

CD 

6 

o 

CO 

o 

3 

r< 

-IV 

a 

8 

Ό 

X 

X 

X 

to 

v. 

P 

3 

» 

O 

3 

3 

X 

to 

as 

■M 

X 

T 

s 

3 

# 

cQ. 

D 

Q 

C/5 

8 

Τ' 

μ 

CD 

X 

rQ 

' — ·' 

ο 

-P 

3 

X 

rQ 

4-3 

o 

3 

t» 

Η 

•  rH 

is 

8 

X 

X 

Λ 

• 

c* 

CO 

u 

CD 

> 


CD 

*d 

dJ 

aJ 

C/5 

•  rH 

X 

t> 


<D 

£ 

O 

> 

ctJ 

a 

•  rH 

c/} 

d 

Q 

CD 


CD 

4J 

C/5 

i 

rQ 

CD 

> 


to 

to 

3 


.«o 

«ο 


3 


3 

3 


<o 

•r» 

3 

•V 


fen 


8 

40 

«Ο 

3 

V. 

a* 


> 

P 

p 

CD 

> 

<D 

<x 

P 

to 

'8 

CD 

'3 

CO 

MO 

> 

Q. 

CO 

O 

*HU 

•HU 

W 

8 

rL 

to 

3 

i- 

feW 

8 

X 

8 

8 

P 

X 

X 

<D 

3 

MO 

> 

Co 

b* 

>— 

JD 

' — ^ 

few 

W 

o 

> 

8 

CD 

MO 

N 


8 

ri 

o 

o 

> 

8 

CD 

O 

ti 

"8 


(xo 

8 

*r^ 

"3 

s 

3 

►ή 


8 

CD 

o 

"8 


8 

JJLP 


8 

> 

3 

<!0 

O 

8 

> 

Q. 

Q. 

>- 

iH3 

O 

»-D 

feW 

•HU 

w 

W 

8 

rL 

3 

3 

o 

JLU» 

to 

to 

'8 

'P 

■3 

<50 

o. 

> 

•r> 

i- 

40 

W 

3 

8 

rce 


o 

> 

}~ 


«8 

3 

3 

■w  c3 

^  *-H 

I 

X  ^ 

8  i 

40  Q- 

o 


3 

§  3 

-s=*  X 

>  to 

°  ^ 
H  - 
*8  J- 


40 


ω 


3  3 

*  * 
to  t> 
"8  — 
40  °- 

—  o 

40  U> 


Η  N  CO  Tt 


n  Cl 


e.  With  the  suffix  Θ.  Only  a  few  verbs  in  this  division. 

.  Ισθω  (εσ-),  I  am  eating 
.  νήθω  (να-),  I  spin 


CLASSES  OF  VERBS 


co  JX 

<L> 

m  & 

ΙΠ  ·  rH 

G  -m 
in 


O 

Ih 

CD 

X 


CD 
in 
in 
<D 

a 

s  $ 

Λ  in 


in 


I 

X 

δ 

to 
in 


«ο 

to 

<3 


«ο 

«ο 

Ο 


> 

ί=* 

<χ> 

θ- 

*3 


> 

ί=* 

α=> 

Η 

ΜΟ 

> 

·>*=* 


> 

If 2 

jti  d 


κ· 


ϋ  ιη 

«*  » 

^  § 

1-1  4-> 

CD 

Oh  0 

8  2 

α  g 


Ή 

<3 

Μ> 


*  » 

ν'  α. 

'3 

•vj  ~ω 


4J 

Ο 

G 

ιη 

•  r-l 

to 

X 

1η 

CD 

> 


Ο 

0 

α 

ο 


bJO 

α 


ο 

a  ·  rH 

α+  α 


0 

ιη 

G 

0 

4-> 

α 

0 

ιη 

0 

u 

Ρη 

0 


•5 

κ 

> 

ο 

X 

> 

Ο 

> 

ο 

dL 

8 

c> 

8 

ο> 

(V- 

> 

to 

ft<o 

ω 

ftW 

8 

* 

ο 

-ί=* 

ΜΟ 


> 

Ο 

I 


8 

X 


G 

Ο 

Ιη 

•  rH 

G 

-4H 

X 

4-5 

8 

rL 

8 

b£ 

to 

•  rH 

G 

O 

MH 

0 

0 

}^ 

r L 
0 

O 

rH 

"8 

X 

CO 

G 

ftO 

ιη 
ιη  μη 

<  ο 

η4 

Ο 


W 

Η 

W 

> 

« 

C/2 


■Η  +-> 
0  ? 
>  X 

Ιη 
0 
> 
ιη 

-+Η 

ιη 


ιη 

G 

Ο 

ο 

02 

ιη 

d 

r— I 

Ο 

in 


0 

Λ 

•ηπ 

ε 

ο 

«Η 

ΜΗ 

4Π 

α 

0 

U 

0 


■ν*  «Ο 

«  «ο 

* 

•ή 


<ο 

fti 


I 

fc> 

ΉΟ 


I 

8 

Q- 

♦Ό 


O  - 

w  Λ  itl 

H·  r-t 

r0 


3  3 

CD  '8 
b  Q. 

•HO  H? 

M  <SJ* 


3 

t> 

ft— 

o 


S 

£  * 

►"i  Ci 

>C 

•s. 

'T'  ^ 

X  _-T 

ω  •'Τ' 

?  ^ 

.  V,  ω 

€> 

3  W 
X  3 

Ηλ>  CL. 
Q*  MO 

t*  e>- 

C0  rf 


CO 

'ϋ 

CO 

•  rH 

Λ 

4Π 


*d 

0 

*d 

o 

G 

•  rH 

0 

XI 

ctf 

a 

to 

X 

1-1 

0 

ί> 

1h 

0 

X 

4Π 

o 

ix 

§ 

§ 


*d 

g 

cd 

-g 

0 

ti 

0 

Λ 

0 

X 


to 

0 

b/) 

G 

cj 

X 

o 


o 

X  CO 

a  bp 
O  G 
X  X 

ΛΊ2 
3  § 

’d 

G 

O 


0 

In 

0 

to 


i- 

CO 

0 


g  0  ε 

^  s  ε  8 

ϊ>  x  O  0 

rH  0  O 

N  X  O  H 

'  3X1 


239 


4·  A  lingual  mute  before  a  lingual  mute  becomes  σ. 

5·  A  mute  of  the  stem  before  a  mute  of  the  personal  ending  becomes  coordinate, 
as  βτ>χτ,  φτ  >  ιυτ,  γτ>κτ,  χτ>κτ,  πθ>φθ,  βΟ>φθ,  κθ>χθ,  γθ>χθ. 


6.  σ  coming  between  two  consonants  is  dropped. 

Perfect  indicative  middle  (and  passive)  of 

τάσσω  γράφω  χείθω 


240 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


ω 


rL 

rL 

83 

Q. 

ω 

ί- 

-to 


co 

a 


d  ^ 
co 

,rM  0 

a  ti 

δ  ω 

<υ  P 
3 


in 

0 


p 


·*» 

8 

w  · 

8 

8 

CD 

to 

ω 

o 

> 

^to 

4-3 

a 

0 

O 

rL 

8 

Ir* 

rL 

<D> 

Ξ1· 

K 

*44 

f  . 

• 

pw 

'oT 

CD 

·*» 

to 

to 

to 
— ■  . 

to 

to 

«-» 

u 

to 

0 

8 

> 

CO 

H 

ω 

to 

H 

*40 

to 

H 

-to 

to 

H 

-to 

to 

ω 

to 

N 

-to 

to 

P 

3 

to 

►54- 

•  rt 

C/5 

C/5 

& 

£ 

& 

N 

H 

*—H 

P 

«-J 

O 

> 

cd 

P 

t> 

ω 


0 

Λ 

4-> 


p 


-to 

rL 

rL 

8 

o. 

ω 

(O 


O  CD 


8 

m-» 

O 

O 

cr 

8 

J-4 

·.-» 

CD 

> 

o. 

• 

8 

*-> 

8 

to 

to 

-ω 

rH 

5— 

rL 

8 

tr> 

rL 

CD 

rL 

δ 

-to 

jrj 

«> 

rL 

-£> 

H 

rL 

rL 

0 

•  T-t 

8 

8 

8 

8 

k8 

8 

8 

4-3 

4-3 

o 

0 

*44 

Q. 

O. 

Q. 

Q. 

CL. 

Q. 

a. 

CO 

-to 

i— 

i— 

t“· 

>- 

>- 

0 

N — * 

to 

-to 

-to 

-to 

to 

-to 

to 

Ϊ— 

J— 

Λ 

8" 

l-l 

§  » 

S  1:5 

>*=· 

u 
O 


o 

0 


3 

*2 's 
δ  ~ 

a 

d 
0 
a, 

» rH 

o 

»  rH 
4-3 

Ih 
Gj 

Λ 


p  a 


o  o 


0 
It— t 

TO 


^to 

to 

8 

o 

*3 

*3 

CD 

> 

8 

^3 

a 

to 

o> 

-to 

rL 

8 

rL 

CD 

rL 

5- 

?— 

JJO* 

>: 

X 

>- 

8 

8 

8 

8 

"8 

8 

8 

f 

t* 

f 

l* 

b* 

»r* 

to 

-to 

-ω 

-to 

ω 

-to 

ti> 

tr* 

f 

f 

Ir* 

l·* 

f 

14 

4->  CD 

ω 

M-ι  rL 

ο  n  0  0 

^  Λ 

C/5  «-4-3  4-3 

0  ί~  ..  .  CL-, 

b/>  W 

a  ^ 

Clj  -to 

O  „ 
o 
t* 
t* 

8 
Q. 

-tO 


aj 

1-4 

3 


a 


0 

δ 

cd 

co 


0 

ft’s 


0  j— 

£ 


-tO 


£ 

o 

C/5 

u 

0 

P 


δ 

*4 


0 

4-» 

CO 


o 

-  u  · 'j* 

O  ·  r-t  4-3 

•ο-Λ  w 

8  4->  $d 

<x.  h 

MO  Λ  p 

_i  *a 

0 

a 


0 

C/5 

*  rH 

£ 

0 

£ 


^U) 


ENGLISH  INDEX 


■- 


V 


■ 


. 


. 


r 


\ 


- 


ENGLISH  INDEX1 


A 

Ablative  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 
Accent:  kinds,  22;  meaning,  22;  where  and  why  placed,  23  f.; 
recessive,  23;  in  declensions,  29;  oxytones,  50;  proclitics,  44, 
50;  enclitics,  63  f . ;  2d  Aorist  Inf.,  79;  participles,  98;  com¬ 
paratives  and  superlatives,  179;  contract  verbs,  i78f. 
Accusative  case:  meaning,  29;  general  reference,  132;  many 
examples 

Action:  expression  of,  24,  73;  kind  of,  25,  82,  158;  durative, 
25,  41,  78,  etc.;  linear,  25,  41,  etc.;  punctiliar,  78,  etc.;  Aorist, 
78;  participle,  99,  103,  104,  1 56 f . ;  imperfect,  41,  168;  perfec¬ 
tive,  152,  156;  constative,  ingressive,  effective,  124 
Active  voice:  meaning,  36;  examples,  24-27,  62  f.,  175,  73-5, 
96-8,  167,  176;  41-3,  68;  77-8i,  163,  81-3,  101-5;  86-93, 
162  f.;  120-5,  125-7,  128-30,  169;  149-S2,  154  f· ;  152  f.;  153; 
155 

Acute  accent,  22,  31,  32,  65;  many  examples 
Adjectives:  gender,  number,  case,  56;  agree  with  substantive, 
32,  57;  attributive  and  predicate  use,  57  f. ;  substituted  by 
phrase  and  adverb,  59;  1st  declension, —  endings,  56, 59;  ay  ados, 
56;  forms,  56;  accent,  57;  3d  declension, —  was,  130;  accent, 
13 1 ;  use,  13 1 ;  stems  in  -es,  133;  αληθής,  133;  forms,  134; 
irregulars, —  πολύς,  134  f . ;  μβγαϊ,  135  f . ;  comparison,  178-80, 
182 

Adverbs:  formation,  180;  comparison,  180 f.,  184 
Affirmation,  24,  74,  212 
Agent,  48 

Agreement:  adjectives,  32;  pronouns,  67 
Aktionsart:  123  f.,  125,  127,  130,  139  f.,  152,  156,  169 
Alphabet,  19  f. 

Antecedent,  67,  112 
Antepenult,  23 ;  many  examples 

1  All  references  are  made  to  pages. 

243 


244 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Aorist:  First  —  Ind.  Act.  and  Mid.,  120-5;  Subj.  Act.  and 
Mid.,  125-8;  Participle  Act.  and  Mid.,  128-30;  Ind.  and 
Subj.  Pass.,  138-43;  Pass.  Participle,  143 
Second — Ind.  Act.  and  Mid.,  77-81,  198  f.;  Subj.  Act.  and 
Mid.,  81-3;  Pass.,  141 

Apodosis  in  conditional  sentence:  First  Class,  68;  Second  Class, 
157  f . ;  Third  Class,  88;  Fourth  Class,  214 
Article,  30 f.,  32,  33,  34,  49,  50 
Aspiration,  217 

Attributive  use:  adjectives,  57,  58,  131;  participles,  100,  103 
Augment,  42,  47,  79,  121,  139,  153 

B 

Breathing,  21,  23;  many  examples 


C 

Cardinals,  172 

Cases:  names  and  meaning,  29;  endings,  30;  with  verbs,  76  f., 
51,  56;  of  infinitive,  148 
Case-endings,  30,  84 
Causal  use  of  infinitives,  148 

Circumflex  accent:  22,  32,  33,  35 f.,  50,  54,  74;  many  examples 
Circumstantial  participle,  105,  108 
Commands,  170 

Comparative  degree:  adjectives,  179  f.,  182-4;  adverbs,  180 f. 

Comparison  of  adjectives  and  adverbs,  178-84 

Comparison,  standard  of,  180 

Compensatory  vowel  lengthening,  26,  95 

Complement,  Infinitive  as,  60 

Compound  verbs,  44,  70 

Conditional  sentence:  First  Class,  68;  Second  Class,  157 
Third  Class,  88;  Fourth  Class,  214 
Conjugation:  meaning,  25;  see  examples  and  paradigms 
Connective,  63 
Consonant  declension,  84 
Constative  action,  124 

Contract  verbs,  90;  present  system  of  -άω,  185-9,  -όω,  192-4, 
-€ω,  174-8 


ENGLISH  INDEX 


245 


Contraction,  90  f.,  163,  175,  17S,  188,  194 
Copula,  63,  70 
Crasis,  .217 

D 

Dative  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 

Declension,  accent  in,  29 

Declensions: 

(a)  Substantives: 

First  (a-  stems),  49-55:  gender,  49,  51;  examples,  49, 
52,  53,  54,  55;  forms  explained,  49  f.,  52  f.;  accent,  50, 
54;  contracts,  54 

Second  (o-  stems),  27-36:  stems,  28;  accent,  28,  29, 
31  f.,  33;  examples,  28,  31,  33  f . ;  forms  explained,  28  f., 
31,  33,  34;  gender,  30 

Third  (consonant  stems) :  neuters  in  -ματ-,  83-6, — ·  name, 
84;  endings,  84;  forms  explained,  84  f . ;  gender,  85;  stem, 
85  f. ;  examples,  85;  Lingual  Mutes,  93-96, — ·  stem,  93; 
forms  explained,  94  f . ;  accent,  94  f . ;  examples,  94  f . ; 
Mutes  and  Liquids,  106-9, —  examples,  106  f.;  forms  ex¬ 
plained,  107  f.;  labial  mutes,  107;  Liquids  in  -ep  (synco¬ 
pated),  nof., — -examples,  no;  forms  explained,  no; 
Stems  in  1,  113  f., —  examples,  114;  forms  explained,  114; 
Stems  in  -ev  and  -es,  117-20, —  examples,  1 18  f . ;  forms  ex¬ 
plained,  118  f.;  gender,  118;  accent,  119;  neuters  in  -os, 
119;  Irregulars ,  146 

(b)  Adjectives: 

First  and  Second,  56-60 
Third ,  133  f. 

.  Irregular,  134-6 

Comparative  degree,  183 

(c)  Pronouns: 

Personal:  1st  person,  61;  2d  person,  61;  3d  person,  66 
Demonstrative,  71 

(d)  Participles,  97  f.,  102,  143,  154,  177,  187  f. 

(e)  Numerals,  17 1-3 
Defective  (deponent)  verbs,  69  f . 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  7 1  f 181 
Diaeresis,  217 

Digamma,  118,  footnote 
Diphthongs,  21 


246 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Discourse,  Indirect,  136  f. 

Dissyllabic  Enclitic,  64 

Durative  action,  25,  41,  75,  78,  80,  82,  87,  99,  103,  123,  168 

E 

Effective  action,  124 

Elative  sense  of  superlative,  180 

Elision,  217 

Emphasis,  62 

Enclitics,  62,  63,  64  f.,  116 

Endings;  verbs,  see  personal  endings;  cases,  see  case  endings 
Entreaties,  170 

Exercises,  English  and  Greek:  see  each  lesson 
Exhortations,  76,  170 

F 

Feminine  gender,  49,  51  f. ;  many  examples 
First  (a-  stems)  declension:  see  declensions 
Formative  vowel  lengthening,  95,  no 

Future  tense:  Ind.  Act.  and  Mid.,  83-93;  Pass.  Ind.,  140  f.; 
Ind.  Act.  and  Mid.  of  liquid  stems,  162  f.;  Sec.  Future  Pass., 
141 ;  see  paradigms 

G 

Gender,  49,  51,  52,  56,  86;  many  examples 
Genitive  absolute,  108  f. 

Genitive  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 

Gradation  of  vowels,  218 

Grave  accent,  22,  31;  many  examples 

H 

Hesitating  affirmation,  212 
Historical  tenses,  42;  see  paradigms 

I 

Identical  pronoun,  66 

Imperative  mode:  development,  166;  personal  endings,  166,  168; 
how  formed,  167;  Pres,  and  Aor.  compared,  168;  kind  of  ac¬ 
tion,  168  f.;  Aktionsart,  169  (see  Aktionsart);  significance, 
170;  negative,  170;  persons,  170;  personal  endings,  166;  ex¬ 
amples,  167-70;  see  paradigms 


ENGLISH  INDEX 


247 


Imperfect  tense:  stem,  41;  kind  of  action,  41;  personal  endings, 
41,  46,  see  personal  endings;  thematic  vowel,  42,  47,  see  the¬ 
matic  vowel;  augment,  42  f.,  47,  see  augment;  examples, 
41-43,  46  f.,  68,  176;  see  paradigms 
Impersonal  verbs,  189  f. 

Indefinite  pronoun,  1 1 5-7 
Indefinite  relative  pronoun,  16 1 

Indicative  mode:  Present ,  24-27,  36-40,  62  f.,  175;  Imperfect , 
41-3,  46  f.,  68,  176;  Future ,  86-93,  140-2,  145,  162  f.;  Second 
Future ,  141;  Aorist ,  120-5,  138  f.,  14 5,  163;  Second  Aorist, 
77-81,  141,  144,  163;  Perfect,  149-52,  i55  f·;  Pluperfect,  152  f., 
156;  Second  Pluperfect,  i52f.  See  paradigms 
Indirect  discourse:  assertions,  136  f . ;  questions,  136;  commands, 
Ϊ37 

Infinitive:  no  personal  endings,  27,  132,  149;  as  complement,  60; 
action  of,  79  f . ;  future,  87  footnote;  voice  and  tense  but  not 
mode,  146;  verbal  substantive,  146  f . ;  with  neuter  article, 
147;  purpose,  147  f . ;  in  substantive  constructions,  147  f.; 
temporal,  148  f . ;  causal,  148;  time,  149;  tense,  149;  no  aug¬ 
ment,  79;  no  subject,  132,  147;  case,  148  f.;  negative,  148; 
examples,  see  paradigms 
Ingressive  action,  124,  169 

Instrumental  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 

Intensive  pronoun,  66 

Interchange  of  vowels,  218 

Interrogative  pronoun,  1 1 5-7 

Iota-subscript,  21,  28,  49,  74,  76;  many  examples 


Κοίηέ,  i9 


K 


L 

Labial  mutes,  91,  107,  123,  142 

Linear  action,  25,  41,  75,  78,  82,  123 

Lingual  mutes,  91,  93-6,  123,  151,  156 

Lingual  mute  stems,  93-6 

Liquids,  106-8,  uof.,  142,  151,  156,  162-5 

Locative  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 


248 


BEGINNER  S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


M 

Masculine  gender,  30,  51  f.,  54;  many  examples 
μι-  verbs:  ω-  and  μι-  conjugations,  63,  195  f.;  examples,  196-9, 
199,  201-3,  2°3  205-8,  209  f.;  compounds,  196  footnote 

Middle  voice:  meaning,  36  f.;  primary  personal  endings,  37,  40; 
thematic  vowel  and  personal  endings,  38;  examples,  36-9, 
46  f.,  75-7,  77-81,  81-3,  86-93,  98  f.,  120-5,  125-30,  155  f·; 
167-9,  *75  f-5  see  paradigms 
Monosyllables,  94 
Monosyllabic  Enclitic,  64 

Mode,  24-73;  see  indicative,  subjunctive,  imperative,  optative; 

see  paradigms 
Movable  65  footnote 
Mutes,  91  f.,  93-6,  106-8,  123,  142,  151,  156 

N 

Nasal  stems,  107,  150 

Negatives:  in  conditional  sentence,  68,  158;  with  participle,  101; 
with  infinitive,  148;  with  imperative,  170;  in  ordinary  sen¬ 
tence,  173;  in  direct  questions,  173 
Neuter  gender,  51  f.,  119;  many  examples 
Nominative  case:  meaning,  29;  many  examples 
Number,  48,  51;  many  examples 
Numerals:  list,  17 1;  declension,  17 1-3 

O 

Old  forms  of  verbs,  210  f. 

Optative  mode:  meaning,  212;  N.  T.  use,  213;  examples,  213  f., 
see  paradigms;  wish  about  present,  past,  future,  214;  fourth 
class  condition,  214 
Oxytones,  50 

ω  conjugation,  63;  verbs,  195 


P 

Palatals,  91,  123,  142 
Paradigms: 

Nouns:  (a)  Adjectives.  —  a-  and  o-  declension,  221  f.;  3d  de¬ 
clension  stem  in  -u-,  223;  participles  in  -out-,  223 

(b)  Substantives  —  Masculines  in  -as  of  1st  decl.,  219; 


ENGLISH  INDEX 


249 


3d  declension  stems  in  -v-,  219  f.,  in  -ου-,  220;  some  peculiar 
forms,  2  20  f . 

Verbs:  λύω,  225-9;  κάθημαι,  230;  κβϊμαι,  230  f.;  βϊμι,  231 
Participles:  gender,  97;  accent,  98;  verbal  adj.,  99;  time,  99; 
tense,  99;  no  personal  endings  and  mode,  100;  attributive  use, 
100,  103;  negative,  101;  position,  104;  declension,  97  f.,  102, 
143,  154,  177,  187  f . ;  formation,  99;  endings,  101,  156;  predi¬ 
cate  use,  103;  action,  104,  156;  Aktionsart,  130,  156;  circum¬ 
stantial,  105;  examples,  98  f.,  96-101,  105-5,  128-30,  143  f., 
154*·,  156 

Passive  voice:  meaning,  36;  form,  39,  140;  examples,  39  f., 
46  f.,  75—7,  98  f·,  138  f·,  140  f·,  142-5,  155  *·,  167,  169  f.,  175  f.; 
see  paradigms 
Penult,  23;  many  examples 

Perfect  tense:  meaning,  152;  formation,  150  f.,  155  f. ;  Aktions¬ 
art,  152;  examples,  149-52,  154-6;  see  paradigms 
Perfective:  action,  152,  156;  force,  45 
Person,  48 

Personal  endings:  meaning,  24,  48 

(a)  Primary  —  26,  37,  38,  40,  74,  76,  82,  88,  120,  126,  139,  140, 

155 

(b)  Secondary  —  41,  46,  79,  120,  121,  139,  156 
Personal  endings  of  imperative,  166 

Personal  pronouns,  60-2;  65-7 

Pluperfect  tense:  formation,  153;  meaning,  153;  examples,  152  f., 
156;  second,  153;  see  paradigms 
Plural  subject  with  singular  verb,  86 

Positive  degree:  adjectives,  179;  adverbs,  179-80;  with  μάλλον, 
i8i 

Postpositives,  61 
Predicate  nominative,  63 

Predicate  position:  adjectives,  57  f.,  13 1;  participles,  103 
Prepositions:  meaning,  44;  proclitics,  44;  with  cases,  44  f . ;  in 
compound  verbs,  45;  final  vowel  dropped,  45 
Present  tense,  24-27,  62  f.,  73-5,  75-7,  167,  175  f . ;  see  paradigms 
Present  system  of  contract  verbs:  in  -βω,  174-8;  in  -άω,  185-9; 
in  -όω,  191-5 

Primary  personal  endings:  see  personal  endings] 

Primary  tenses,  26  footnote,  46  footnote 
Principal  parts  of  verb,  165;  see  paradigms 
Proclitics,  44,  50,  65 


250 


BEGINNER’S  GREEK  GRAMMAR 


Prohibitions,  127,  170 

Pronoun:  meaning,  61;  use,  61;  personal,  60-2;  65-7;  identical, 
66;  intensive,  66;  interrogative,  1 1 5  f. ;  indefinite,  1 1 5—7 ;  rela¬ 
tive,  hi  f.,  161;  reciprocal,  160;  reflexive,  158-60;  indefinite 
relative,  161;  demonstrative,  66,  71  f.,  224 

Protasis:  first  class  condition,  68;  second  class,  157  f.;  third 
class,  88;  fourth  class,  214 

Punctiliar  action,  78,  79,  82,  87,  99,  103,  123,  124,  127,  139  f., 
168 

Punctuation,  218 

Purpose:  clauses  of,  74;  with  infinitive,  147  f. 

Q 

Questions:  direct,  116;  negative,  173;  indirect,  116;  doubt,  83 

Question  mark,  75  footnote 


R 

Recessive  accent,  23,  i78f. 

Reciprocal  pronoun,  160 
Reduplication,  150  f.,  155 
Reflexive  pronoun,  158-60 

Relative  pronoun:  antecedent,  111  f.;  attraction,  112;  declen¬ 
sion,  III 

Result:  ώστ€  with  infinitive,  132 
Rough  breathing,  21,  33;  many  examples 

S 

Second  declension,  27-36;  see  declensions 
Secondary  personal  endings:  see  personal  endings 
Secondary  tenses,  26  footnote,  42,  46  footnote 
Sounds  and  writings,  2 1 7  f . 

Strong  perfects,  151 

Stem:  meaning;  (a)  Substantives  —  85,  93-6,  107;  (b)  Verbs  ^ 
25  f.,  41,  80,  87,  92,  93,  142,  150  f.,  155  f. 

Stem,  Thematic,  80,  101  f.;  see  thematic  vowel 
Stress  of  voice,  22 

Subjunctive  mode:  meaning,  74;  tense,  74;  clauses  of  purpose,  74; 
mode  sign,  74,  76;  personal  endings,  74,  76;  negative,  75;  ac¬ 
tion,  75;  time,  75;  examples,  73-5,  75-7,  81-3,  125-7,  139, 
175;  see  paradigms 


I 


ENGLISH  INDEX  251 

Suffix,  88,  90  \ 

Superlative  degree,  179!:. 

Supplement  to  Part  I,  217-39 
Syllables,  20 
Syllabic  augment,  42 
Syncope,  217 


T 

Temporal  use  of  infinitive,  148 
Temporal  augment,  42 

Tense:  meaning,  25,  73;  systems,  164 f . ;  see  paradigms 
Thematic  stem,  80,  101  f. 

Thematic  vowel,  25,  26,  38,  42,  47,  74,  76,  80,  82,  88,  96,  99, 
126,  139,  140,  153,  162,  168 
Third  declension:  see  declensions 
Time,  25,  82,  96;  see  various  tenses 
Tone  of  voice,  22 


U 

Ultima,  23,  33;  many  examples 

V 

Verbal  adjective,  99 

Verbs:  personal  endings,  24  (see  personal  endings);  tense,  mode, 
and  voice,  24;  primitive  form,  26;  classes  of,  232-9;  see  para¬ 
digms 

Vocative  case:  meaning,  29;  numerous  examples 
Vocabularies:  see  each  lesson 
Voice,  36 f.,  73,  48;  see  various  conjugations 
Vowels,  21;  lengthening,  26,  122,  140,  179;  contraction,  163, 
188,  194 

Vowel  stems,  140  f.,  142,  i5of. 


Writings  and  sounds,  217  f. 


W 


■ 


' 


>  ■ 


/ 


' 


■ 


. 


. 


. 


V 


VOCABULARIES 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


A 

αγαθός,  -ή,  -όν,  good 
άγαχάω,  I  love 
άγάχη,  -ης,  ή,  love 
άγαχητός,  -ή,  -όν,  beloved 
άγγελος,  -ου,  ό,  messenger , 
angel 

αγιάζω,  I  sanctify 

άγιος,  -α,  -ον,  holy 

αγοράζω,  I  buy 

άγω,  /  lead ,  bring ,  ga;  sec. 

aor.,  ήγαγον. 
άδελφός,  -οΰ,  δ,  brother 
άδικος,  -ον,  unrighteous 
αδύνατος,  -ον,  unable,  impos¬ 
sible 

αίμα,  -ατος,  τό,  blood 
αίρω,  I  take  up,  bear 
αισθάνομαι,  /  perceive 
αιτέω,  I  ask  for  (something) 
αιών,  -ώνος,  6,  age  (space  of 
time),  world 
αιώνιος,  -a,  -ov,  eternal 
άκάθαρτος,  -ov,  unclean 
άκολουθέω,  I  follow 
ακούω,  I  hear 
άκριβώς,  adv.,  accurately 
αλέκτωρ,  -ορος,  δ,  cock 
αλήθεια,  -ας,  ή,  truth 
αληθής,  -ές, 
αληθινός,  -ή,  -όν,  /rwe 
αληθώς,  adv.,  truly,  surely 
αλλά,  adversative  conj.,  buf 


άλλήλων,  (gen.  masc.  plu.),  of 
one  another 
άλλος,  -η,  -o,  other 
άλλότριος,  -α,  -ον,  belong¬ 
ing  to  another  (another’s), 
strange 

αμαρτάνω,  I  sin 

αμαρτία,  -ας,  ή,  mVi 

άμήν,  adv.,  truly,  verily 

άμχελών,  -ώνος,  δ,  vineyard 

άν,  see  page  157 

άνά,  prep.,  on,  upon,  along; 

only  used  with  acc.  in  N.  T. 
άναβαίνω,  I  go  up,  come  up, 
ascend 

άναβλέχω,  I  look  up,  recover 
sight 

άναγινώσκω,  I  read 
άνάστασις,  -εως,  ή,  resurrec¬ 
tion 

άνεμος,  -ου,  δ,  wind 
άνήρ,  άνδρός,  δ,  man 
άνθίστημι,  I  set  against,  with¬ 
stand 

άνθρωχος,  -ου,  δ,  man 
άνίστημι,  I  raise  up,  rise, 
arise 

άνοίγω,  I  open 

άντί,  prep.,  with  gen.,  opposite, 
against;  instead  of,  in  place 
'  of,  for 

άνω,  adv.,  up,  above 
άνωθεν,  adv.,  from  above,  again 
άξιος,  -a,  -ov,  fitting,  worthy 


255 


256 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


απαγγέλλω,  I  announce ,  de¬ 
clare 

άπαρνέομαι,  I  deny 
άπας,  άπασα,  άπαν,  all , 
gether 

απέρχομαι,  I  go  away 
απέχω,  I  keep  off,  have  in  full 
(of  receipts);  midd.,  I  keep 
myself  from,  abstain 
από,  prep .,from  off,  used  only 
with  the  abl.  in  the  N.  T. 
άποδίδωμι,  I  give  up,  give  back, 
restore;  pay;  midd.,  sell 
αποθνήσκω,  I  die 
αποκρίνομαι,  I  answer 
άποκτείνω,  I  kill,  slay 
απολύω,  I  release 
αποστέλλω,  I  send  forth 
απόστολος,  -ου,  δ,  apostle 
απτω,  I  fasten  to;  midd.,  άπτ- 
ομαι,  I  touch 
άρνέομαι,  I  deny 
άρτι,  adv.,  now,  just  now,  this 
moment 

άρτος,  -ου,  δ,  bread 
αρχή,  -ής,  ή,  beginning 
άρχιερευς,  -έως,  δ,  chief  priest 
άρχομαι,  I  begin 
αρχών,  -οντος,  δ,  ruler,  prince 
ασθένεια,  -ας,  ή,  weakness 
ασθενής,  -ές,  weak,  sick 
αυριον,  adv.,  tomorrow 
αυτός,  -ή,  -ό,  self,  very,  same; 
he,  she,  it 

άφεσις,  -εως,  ή,  remission,  for¬ 
giveness 

άφίημι,  I  send  away,  forgive , 
leave,  let 

άφίστημι,  I  put  away,  depart 
from 

άφρων,  -ον,  foolish 


B 

βαίνω,  I  go 
βάλλω,  I  throw,  cast 
βαπτίζω,  I  baptize 
βασιλεία,  -ας,  ή,  kingdom 
βασιλεύς,  -έως,  δ,  king 
βασιλεύω,  I  am  king,  I  reign 
βιβλίον,  -ου,τ:ό,  book ,  a  written 
document 

βίος,  -ου,  δ,  life,  manner  of  life 
βλέπω,  I  see,  look  at,  behold 
βούλομαι,  I  will,  wish 

Γ 

γάμος,  -ου,  δ,  marriage 
γάρ,  coordinating  conj.,  for. 
γέ,  enclitic,  postpositive  parti¬ 
cle  giving  especial  promi¬ 
nence  to  a  word,  indeed,  at 
last 

γεννάω,  I  beget 
γένος,  -ους,  τό,  race ,  kind 
γή,  ή,  earth 
γίνομαι,  I  become,  be 
γινώσκω,  I  know 
γλώσσα,  -ης,  ή,  tongue 
γνώσις,  -εως,  ή,  knowledge 
γόνυ,  -νατος,  τό,  knee 
γράμμα,  -ατος,  τό,  letter  (of 
alphabet),  writing 
γραμματευς,  -έως,  δ,  scribe, 
town-clerk 

γραφή,  -ής,  ή,  writing ,  scrip¬ 
ture 

γράφω,  I  write 

γυνή,  -ναικός,  ή,  woman,  wife 

Δ 

δαιμόνιον,  -ου,  τό,  demon,  evil- 
spirit 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


257 


δέ,  copulative  and  adversative 
(milder  than  αλλά)  conj., 
postpositive,  in  the  next 
place ,  and ;  hut,  on  the  other 
hand 

Bst,  it  is  necessary 
δεύτερος,  -a,  -ov,  second 
διά,  prep.,  with  gen.,  through, 
by;  with  acc.,  because  of,  on 
account  of,  for  the  sake  of 
διάβολος,  -ου,  o,  devil 
διαθήκη,  -ης,  ή,  covenant,  tes¬ 
tament 

διακονέω,  I  serve,  minister 
διακονία,  -ας,  ή,  service,  min¬ 
istry 

διάκονος,  -ου,  δ,  servant,  min¬ 
ister,  deacon 

διαλογίζομαι,  I  reason  with, 
discuss,  consider 
διάνοια,  -ας,  ή,  mind,  under¬ 
standing 

διδάσκαλος,  -ου,  6,  teacher 
διδάσκω,  I  teach 
δίδωμι,  I  give,  deliver 
διέρχομαι,  I  go  through 
δίκαιος,  -a,  -ov,  righteous 
δικαιοσύνη,  -ης,  ή,  righteous¬ 
ness 

δικαιόω,  I  declare  righteous , 
justify 

διψάω,  I  thirst 

διώκω,  I  follow  after,  pursue, 
persecute 

δοκέω,  I  think,  suppose;  δοκεΐ, 
it  seems  good 
δόξα,  -ης,  ή,  glory 
δοξάζω,  I  glorify 
δουλεύω,  I  am  a  servant,  I 
serve 

δούλος,  -ου,  δ,  servant 


δύναμαι,  I  am  able,  can 
δύναμις,  -εως,  ή,  power 
δυνατός,  -ή,  -όν,  able 
δύο,  two 
δώδεκα,  twelve 
δώρον,  -ου,  τό,  gift 

Ε 

έάν,  conditional  particle,  if 
έάν  μή,  with  a  substantive  = 
except,  unless 

εαυτού,  -ής,  -ού,  (rarely 
αυτού,  -ής,  -ού),  reflexive, 
himself,  herself,  itself 
εβαλον,  I  threw,  cast;  sec.  aor. 
of  βάλλω. 

εβην,  I  went;  μι-  aorist  of 
βαίνω. 

έγενόμην,  I  became;  sec.  aor. 
of  γίνομαι. 

εγνων,  I  knew;  μι-  aorist  of 
γινώσκω. 

έγράφην,  sec.  aor.  passive  of 
γράφω. 

έγγύς,  adv.,  near 
έγείρω,  I  raise  up 
έγώ,  I 

έθνος,  -ους,  τό,  race,  nation 
έθος,  -ους,  τό,  custom 
εί,  conditional  particle,  if 
εί  μή,  with  a  substantive  = 
except,  unless 

είδον,  I  saw;  sec.  aor.;  δράω 
used  in  present 
είμί,  I  am 

ειχον,  είχα,  I  said;  sec.  aor.; 

λέγω  used  in  present 
ειρήνη,  -ης,  ή,  peace 
εις,  prep.,  into,  used  only  with 
the  acc. 

είς,  μία,  εν,  one 


25  8 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


εισάγω,  I  bring  in 
εισέρχομαι  I  enter 
έκ  (έξ),  prep.,  out,  out  of ,  from 
within ,  used  only  with  the 
abl. 

εκβάλλω,  I  throw  out,  cast  out 
έκεΐ,  adv.,  there 
έκεΐνος,  -η,  -o,  demons,  pron., 
that  {one) 

έκκλησία,  -ας,  ή,  assembly, 
church 

έκχορευομαι,  I  go  out 
έκτείνω,  I  stretch  out 
έλαβον,  I  took;  sec.  aor.  of 
λαμβάνω. 

έλεος,  -ους,  τό,  pity,  mercy 
έλεόθερος,  -α,  -ον,  free 
έλχίζω,  I  hope 
έλχίς,  -ίδος,  ή,  hope 
έλιχον,  I  left;  sec.  aor.  of 
λείχω. 

έμαυτοϋ,  -ής,  reflexive  pron., 
myself 

έμ βαίνω,  I  go  into,  embark 
έμός,  -ή,  όν,  poss.  pron.,  my, 
mine 

έν,  prep.,  in;  used  only  with 
the  loc. 

έντολή,  -ής,  ή,  commandment 
ένώχιον,  prep,  with  gen.,  be¬ 
fore,  in  the  presence  of 
έξέρχομαι,  I  go  out;  sec.  aor. 
έξήλθον. 

£ξεστιν,  it  is  lawful,  is  possible 
έξίστημι,  I  am  amazed,  am  be¬ 
side  myself 

έξουσία,  -ας,  ή,  authority, 
power 

εξω,  adv.,  without,  outside; 
used  with  abl.,  without,  out¬ 
side 


έορτή,  -ής,  ή,  feast  .  , 

έχαγγελία,  -ας,  ή,  promise 
έχαόριον,  adv.,  on  the  morrow 
έχε  ρωτάω,  I  question,  ask  (a 
question) 

έχιγινώσκω,  I  recognize,  dis¬ 
cover 

έχιδίδωμι,  I  give  over 
έχιΟυμία,  -ας,  ή,  desire 
έχιθυμέω,  I  desire 
έχιμένω,  I  remain,  abide 
έχιτίθημ.ι,  I  lay  upon,  place 
upon 

έργασία,  -ας,  ή,  work,  busi¬ 
ness 

έργον,  -ου,  τό,  work 
έρημος,  -ου,  ή,  wilderness , 
desert 

έρχομαι,  I  go,  come 
έ  ρωτάω,  I  ask  (question) 
έσθίω,  I  eat;  έφαγον,  I  ate 
έσχατος,  -η,  -ον,  last 
έσχον,  I  got;  sec.  aor.  of 
έχω. 

έτερος,  -α,  -ον,  another 
έτος,  -ους,  τό,  year 
ευ,  adv.,  well 

ευαγγελίζομαι,  / proclaim  glad 
tidings  (preach  the  gospel) 
ευθέως,  adv.,  straightway ,  at 
once 

ευρίσκω,  I  find 

ευρον,  I  found;  sec.  aor.  of 
ευρίσκω. 

έφαγον,  I  ate;  sec.  aor.;  έσθίω 
used  in  present 

Έφέσιος,  -a,  -ov,  Ephesian  ; 
έφίστημι,  /  stand  upon  or  by, 
come  upon 

έφυγον,  sec.  aor.  of  φεύγω, 
έχω,  /  have,  hold,  get 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


259 


Z 

ζάω,  I  live 

ζηλόω,  I  am  jealous ,  desire 
eagerly 

ζητέω,  I  seek 
ζωή,  -ής,  ή,  life 

Η 

ή,  conj.,  or 

ήγεμών,  -όνος,  δ,  leader ,  gov¬ 
ernor 

ήΒειν,  old  pluperf.  (with  pres. 

meaning)  of  oIBa. 
ήλθον,  I  went ,  came;  sec.  aor.; 

έρχομαι  used  in  present 
ήλιος,  -ου,  6,  sun 
ήμερα,  -ας,  ή,  day 
ήμέτερος,  -α,  -ον,  poss.  pron., 
our 

Θ 

θάλασσα,  -ης,  ή,  sea 
θάνατος,  -ου,  δ,  death 
θανατόω,  I  put  to  death 
θαυμάζω,  I  wonder ,  marvel 
θεάομαι,  I  behold ,  see,  look  at 
θέλημα,  -ατος,  τό,  will 
θέλω,  I  wish,  will 
θεός,  -οϋ,  δ,  God 
θεραχεύω,  I  heal,  doctor 
θεωρέω,  I  look  at,  gaze,  see 
θλίψις,  -εως,  ή,  tribulation, 
distress 

θρίξ,  τριχός,  ή,  hair 
θρόνος,  -ου,  δ,  throne 
θυγάτηρ,  -τρός,  ή,  daughter 

I 

ίάομαι,  I  heal 

ϊΒιος,  -α,  -ον,  one’s  own 


ιερόν,  -οΰ,  τό,  temple 
ιερεύς,  -έως,  δ,  priest 
ιημι,  I  send 

ινα,  conj.  generally  with  sub¬ 
junctive,  in  order  that,  that 
ίμάτιον,  -ou,  τό,  garment 
ι στη  μι,  I  make  to  stand,  place , 
stand 

ισχυρός,  -ά,  -όν,  strong 

κ 

καθαρίζω,  I  purify 
καθίστημι,  I  set  down,  appoint 
καί,  conj.,  and;  also;  even; 

και  .  .  .  καί,  both  .  .  .  and 
κακός,  -ή,  -όν,  evil,  bad 
καλέω,  I  call 

καλός,  -ή,  -όν,  good,  beautiful 
καλώς,  adv.,  well,  finely 
καρδία,  -ας,  ή,  heart 
καρχός,  -οϋ,  δ,  fruit 
κατά,  prep.,  with  gen.,  down 
{upon),  against;  with  abl., 
down  {from) ;  with  acc.,  down 
{along),  through,  according  to 
κατα βαίνω,  I  am  going  down 
καταλύω,  I  destroy 
κατεσθίω,  I  cat  up 
κείμαι,  I  lie  {am  laid) 
κεφαλή,  -ής,  ή,  head 
κηρύσσω,  I  announce,  proclaim 
κοινός,  -ή,  -όν,  common,  un¬ 
clean 

κοινόω,  /  make  common,  un¬ 
clean 

κόχτω,  I  beat,  strike 
κόσμος,  -ου,  δ,  world 
κράβαττος,  -ου,  δ,  pallet,  bed 
κράζω,  /  cry  0^/ 
κρίμα,  -ατος,  τό,  judgment 


260 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


κρίνω,  I  judge 
κρίσις,  -εως,  ή,  judgment 
κρύχτω,  I  hide 
κτίσις,  -εως,  ή,  creation 
κυριεύω,  I  am  lord  of,  rule 
{over)  with  gen. 
κύριος,  -ου,  δ,  Lord 
κύων,  κυνός,  δ,  dog 
κωλύω,  I  hinder 
κώμη,  -ης,  ή,  village 

Λ 

λαλέω,  I  speak 

λαμβάνω,  I  take ,  receive;  sec. 

aor.,  έλαβον. 
λαός,  -ού,  δ,  people 
λέγω,  I  say ,  speak 
λείχω,  I  leave ,  abandon;  sec. 

aor.,  έλιχον. 
ληστής,  -οΰ,  δ,  robber 
λίθος,  -ου,  δ,  stone 
λίψ,  λιβός,  δ,  the  S.  W.  wind 
λόγος,  -ου,  δ,  word 
λούω,  I  wash 
λυχέω,  I  grieve 
λύω,  1  loose 

Μ 

μαθητής,  -ου,  δ,  disciple 
μακάριος,  -α,  -ον,  happy , 
blessed 

μάλλον,  adv.,  more,  rather 
μανθάνω,  I  learn;  sec.  aor., 
εμαθον. 

μαρτυρέω,  I  bear  witness ,  tes¬ 
tify 

μάστιξ,  -ιγος,  ή,  whip,  scourge, 
plague 

μάχαιρα,  -ας,  ή,  szwri 
μέγας,  μεγάλη,  μέγα,  great 


μέλει,  it  concerns,  is  a  care, 
with  dat. 

μέλλω,  I  am  about  (or  going) 
to  do  something 
μέλος,  -ους,  τό,  member 
μένω,  I  remain 
μέρος,  -ους,  τό,  part 
μετά,  prep.,  with  gen.,  with; 
with  acc.,  after;  μετά  ταΰτα, 
after  these  things,  after  this 
μεταβαίνω,  I  pass  over ,  de¬ 
part 

μετανοέω,  I  repent 
μή,  not 

μηδείς,  μηδεμία,  μηδέν,  no 
one,  nothing 

μήτε  .  .  .  μήτε,  neither  .  .  . 
nor 

μήτηρ,  -τρός,  ή,  mother 
μικρός,  -ά,  -όν,  small,  little 
μισέω,  I  hate 

μισθός,  -οΰ,  δ,  pay,  wages, 
reward 

μνά,  μνας,  ή,  mina  (a  weight 
and  a  sum  of  money) 
μνημεΐον,  -ou,  τό,  sepulchre, 
tomb 

μνημονεύω,  I  remember,  with 
gen. 

μονογενής,  -ές,  only  begotten 
μόνον,  adv.,  only 
μόνος,  -η,  -ον,  only,  alone 
μυστήριον,  -ou,  τό,  mystery 

N 

ναός,  -ou,  δ,  temple 
νεανίας,  -ou,  δ,  youth 
νεκρός,  -ά,  -όν,  dead 
νέος,  -α,  -ον,  young,  new 
νεφέλη,  -ης,  ή,  cloud 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


261 


νεωκόρος,  -ου,  6  or  ή,  temple- 
keeper 

νηστεύω,  I  fast 
νικάω,  I  conquer 
νίπτω,  /  wash 
νομίζω,  I  think ,  suppose 
νόμος,  -ου,  o,  law 
νΰν,  adv.,  now 
νυξ,  νυκτός,  ή,  night 

Ο 

δ,  ή,  τό,  the  definite  article  the 
δδός,  -οΰ,  ή,  way,  road 
οίδα,  I  know 
οικία,  -ας,  ή,  house 
οίκοδομέω,  I  build 
οίκος,  -ου,  δ,  house 
οίνος,  -ου,  δ,  wine 
όλίγος,  -η,  -ον,  few,  little,  small 
δλος,  -η,  -ον,  whole 
δμοιόω,  I  make  like 
δμολογέω,  I  agree  with,  confess 
δνομα,  -ατος,  τό,  name 
δπου,  rel.  adv.,  where 
δχτομαι,  I  see 

δράω,  I  see;  fut.,  οψομαι;  sec. 
aor.,  είδον 

8ς,  η,  δ,  rel.  pron.,  who,  which, 
that,  what 

δστις,  ήτις,  ότι,  indef.  rel. 

pron.,  who,  which,  that,  what 
δταν,  rel.  temporal  adv.  used 
with  the  subj.  and  ind., 
whenever,  when 

δτε,  rel.  temporal  adv.  used 
t  with  the  ind.,  when 
δτι,  conj.,  because,  that 
ο  ύ,  not;  ο  ύκ  before  vowels;  ο  υχ 
before  rough  breathing 
ού  μή,  see  page  173 


ου  δεις,  ούδεμία,  ούδέν,  no  one 
{nobody),  nothing 
ούκέτι,  no  longer,  no  more 
ουρανός,  -οΰ,  δ,  heaven 
ους,  ώτός,  τό,  ear 
οΰτε  .  .  .  ούτε,  neither  .  .  ,  nor 
ουτος,  αυτή,  τοΰτο,  demons. 

pron.,  this  {one) 
όφείλω,  I  owe,  ought;  sec.  aor. 

without  augment,  οφελον 
όφθαλμός,  -οΰ,  δ,  eye 
δχλος,  -ου,  δ,  crowd 
οψομαι,  fut.  midd.,  I  shall  see; 
δράω  used  in  present 

Π 

παιδίον,  -ου,  τό,  little  child 
παλαιός,  -ά,  -όν,  old,  ancient 
πάλιν,  adv.,  again 
παρά,  prep.,  with  the  loc.,  by 
or  at  (the  side  of);  with  the 
abl.,  from  (the  side  of);  with 
the  acc.,  along  (side  of) 
παραβολή,  -ής,  ή,  parable 
παραδίδωμι,  I  give  over  (to 
another),  deliver  up,  betray 
παρακαλέω,  I  beseech,  exhort, 
encourage 

παράκλησις,  -εως,  ή,  exhorta¬ 
tion 

παραλαμβάνο),  I  take,  receive; 

sec.  aor.,  παρέλαβον 
παρατίθημι,  I  set  before,  com¬ 
mit 

παρέχω,  I  provide,  supply 
παρίστημι,  I  place  beside,  stand 
by 

παρουσία,  -ας,  ή,  coming,  pres¬ 
ence 

πάς,  πάσα,  πάν,  all,  every 


262 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


πάσχα,  (indeclinable),  τό,  the 
Passover 

πάσχω,  I  suffer;  sec.  aor., 
επαθον 

πατήρ,  -τρός,  δ,  father 
παύω,  I  stop;  midd.,  παύομαι, 
I  cease 

•πείθω,  I  persuade 
πεινάω,  I  hunger,  am  hungry 
πειράζω,  I  test ,  tempt 
χέμχω,  I  send 

περί,  prep.,  with  gen.,  about, 
concerning;  with  abl.,  from 
around;  with  acc.,  round 
about ,  about ,  concerning 
χερ ιάγω,/  go  about,  carry  about 
περιπατέω,  I  walk,  live 
περισσός,  -ή,  -όν,  abundant 
πιστεύω,  I  believe 
χίστις,  -εως,  ή,  faith 
πιστός,  -ή,  -όν,  faithful 
πλανάω,  I  cause  to  wander  (to 
err),  lead  astray 
πλήθος,  -ους,  τό,  crowd,  multi¬ 
tude 

χληρόω,  I  make  full,  fill 
πλησίον,  adv.,  near;  b  πλησίον, 
neighbor 

πλοϊον,  -o  i) ,  τό,  boat 
πλούσιος, -a,  -o v,  rich 
πνεύμα,  -ατος,  τό,  spirit 
πόθεν,  interrog.  adv.,  whence 
ποιέω,  I  do,  make 
ποιμήν,  -ένος,  6,  shepherd 
πόλις,  -εως,  ή,  city 
πολύ,  adv.,  much 
πολύς,  πολλή,  πολύ,  much, 
many 

πονηρός,  -ά,  -όν,  evil 
πορεύομαι,  I  go,  proceed 
ποτήριον*  -ου,  τό,  cup 


πού,  interrog.  adv.,  where 
πούς,  ποδός,  δ,  foot 
πρεσβύτερος,  -ου,  δ,  elder 
πρίν  (ή),  before;  see  page  190 
πρό,  prep,  with  abl.,  before 
προάγω,  I  lead  forth,  go  before 
πρόβατον,  -ου,  τό,  sheep 
πρός,  prep.,  with  loc.,  near,  by; 
with  acc.,  towards,  to;  with 
abl.  (once),  “from  the  point 
of  view  ofu 

προσέρχομαι,  1  go  to,  come  to 
προσευχή,  -ής,  ή,  prayer 
προστίθημι,  I  add,  give  in  addi¬ 
tion 

πρόσωπον,  -ου,  τό,  face 
προφητεύω,  I  prophesy 
προφήτης,  -ου,  δ,  prophet 
πρώτος,  -η,  -ον,  first 
πώποτε,  adv.,  ever  yet 
πώς,  adv.,  how 

P 

ρήμα,  -ατος,  τό,  word 

Σ 

σάββατον,  -ου,  τό,  Sabbath 
σαλεύω,  I  shake 
σάλπιγξ,  -ιγγος,  ή,  trumpet 
σάρξ,  σαρκός,  -η,  flesh 
σεαυτού,  -ής,  reflexive,  thyself 
σημεϊον,  -ου,  τό,  sign 
σήμερον,  adv.,  to-day,  this  day 
σιγάω,  I  am  silent ,  keep  silence 
σιωπάω,  I  am  silent,  keep  si¬ 
lence 

σκανδαλίζω,  I  cause  to  stumble, 
offend 

σκηνόω,  I  dwell  (as  in  a  tent) 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


263 


σκόλοψ,  -oxo ς,  o  stake ,  thorn 
σκοτία,  -ας,  ή,  darkness 
σκότος,  -ους,  τό,  darkness 
σός,  σή,  σόν,  poss.  pron.,  thy , 
thine 

σοφία,  -ας,  ή,  wisdom 
σοφός,  -ή,  -όν,  wise 
σχείρω,  I  sow 
σχέρμα,  -ατος,  τό,  seed 
σταυρός,  -οΰ,  ό,  cress 
σταυρόω,  I  crucify 
στέλλω,  /  send 
στενάζω,  /  gmm 
στόμα,  -ατος,  τό,  mouth 
στρέφω,  /  turn,  change 
συ,  thou  {you) 

σύν,  prep.,  wi/Λ,  used  only 
with  the  instrumental 
συνάγω,  I  gather  together 
συναγωγή,  -ής,  ή,  synagogue 
συνεσΟίω,  I  eat  with  (someone) 
συνίημι,  I  perceive 
συνίστημι,  I  commend,  establish 
σύρω,  I  drag,  draw 
σώζω,  I  save 
σώμα,  -ατος,  τό,  body 
σωτήρ,  -ήρος,  ό,  Saviour 
σωτηρία,  -ας,  ή,  salvation 
σώφρων,  -ον,  of  sound  mind, 
sober-minded 

T 

ταχεινόω,  I  make  low,  humble 
ταχέως,  adv.,  quickly 
ταχύ,  adv.,  quickly 
τέ  .  .  .  καί,  both  .  .  .  and 
τέκνον,  -ου,  τό,  child 
τέλειος,  -α,  -ον,  finished,  com¬ 
plete 

τελειόω,  1  end,  complete,  fulfill 


τελευτάω,  (/  finish),  I  die 
τελέω,  I  finish,  end,  com¬ 
plete 

τέλος,  -ους,  τό,  end 
τέσσαρες,  τέσσαρα,  four 
τέταρτος,  -η,  -ον,  fourth 
τη  ρέω,  I  keep 

τίθημι,  I  place,  lay,  put  down 
τιμάω,  I  honor 

τίς,  τί,  interrog.  pron.,  who, 
which,  what 

τις,  τι,  indef.  pron.,  one,  a  cer¬ 
tain  one,  a  certain  thing; 
some  one,  something 
τολμάω,  I  dare 
τόχος,  -ou,  6,  place 
τότε,  adv.,  then 
τούτο,  see  ουτος 
τρεις,  τρία,  three 
τρίτος,  -η,  -ον,  third 
τυφλός,  -ή,  -όν,  blind 
τυφλόω,  I  make  blind,  blind 

Υ 

υγιής,  -ές,  whole,  healthy 
ύδωρ,  υδατος,  τό,  water 
υιός,  -οΰ,  ό,  son 
υμέτερος,  -α,  -ον,  poss.  pron., 
your 

υχάγω,  I  go  away,  depart 
ύχέρ,  prep.,  with  abl.,  in  be¬ 
half  of,  in  the  interest  of; 
instead  of;  in  place  of;  for 
the  sake  of;  about,  concerning; 
with  acc.,  over,  above,  be¬ 
yond 

6χό,  prep.,  with  abl.,  by;  with 
acc.,  under 

υχοκριτής,  -οΰ,  ό,  pretender , 
hypocrite 


264 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Φ 

φαίνω,  I  shine ,  appear 
φανερός,  -ά,  -όν,  manifest 
φανερόω,  I  make  manifest 
φέρω,  I  bear,  carry 
φεύγω,  I  flee,  lake  flight;  sec. 

aor.,  εφυγον 
φιλέω,  I  love 
φίλος,  -ου,  δ,  friend 
φοβέομαι,  I  am  afraid,  I  fear 
φόβος,  -ου,  δ,  fear 
φυλάσσω,  I  guard,  keep 
φωνέω,  I  call,  speak  aloud 
φωνή,  -ής,  ή,  voice 
φώς,  φωτός,  τό,  light 

X 

* 

χαίρω,  I  rejoice 
χαρά,  -άς,  ή,  joy 
χάρις,  -ιτος,  ή,  grace 


χάρισμα,  -ατος,  τό,  gift,  free 

gift 

χείρ,  χειρός,  ή,  hand 
χρεία,  -ας,  ή,  need 
χρονίζω,  I  spend  time,  tarry 
χρόνος,  -ου,  δ,  time 

Ψ 

ψεύστης,  -ου,  δ,  liar 
ψυχή,  -ής,  ή,  soul 

Ω 

ώδε,  adv.,  here,  hither 
ώρα,  -ας,  ή,  hour 
ως,  rel.,  comp.,  and  temporal 
adv.,  as,  when 

ώστε,  consecutive  particle,  so 
that 

ώστε,  inferential  conj.,  and  so, 
therefore 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY 


A 

Abide,  μένω,  έχιμένω 
After  these  things,  μετά  ταΰτα 
Am,  είμΐ 

Am  able,  δύναμαι 
Am  about  (to  do  something). 

μέλλω 
And,  καί 
Angel,  άγγελος 
All,  χάς,  δλος 
Announce,  κηρύσσω 
Answer,  άχοκρίνομαι 
Apostle,  άχόστολος 
Appoint,  καθίστημι 
Ask  (a  question),  έ ρωτάω 

B 

Bad,  κακός 
Baptize,  βαχτίζω 
Bear  witness,  μαρτυρέω 
Because  ( conj .),  ότι 
Become,  γίνομαι 
Before,  χρό  with  abl . 

Beget,  γεννάω 
Beginning,  αρχή 
Behold,  βλέχω 
Believe,  χιστεύω 
Blind  ( adj .),  τυφλός 
Blind  (verb),  τυφλόω 
Boat,  χλοϊον 
Bread,  άρτος 
Brother,  αδελφός 


But,  αλλά 
Buy,  άγοράζω 

By  (denoting  agent),  ύχό  with 
abl. 

*  C 

Call,  καλέω 
Came  to  pass,  έγένετο 
Care,  it  is  a,  μέλει 
Cast  out,  έκ βάλλω 
Cease,  χαύομαι 
Certain  (indef.),  τις,  τι 
Child,  τέκνον;  little  child, 
χαιδίον 

Christ,  Χριστός 
Church,  έκκλησία 
Come,  έρχομαι 
Commandment,  έντολή 
Commend,  συνίστημι 
Concerning,  χερί  with  gen* 
Covenant,  διαθήκη 
Crowd,  όχλος 
Crucify,  σταυρόω 

D 

Darkness,  σκοτία,  σκότος 
Daughter,  θυγάτηρ 
Day,  ημέρα 
Dead,  νεκρός 
Defile,  κοινόω 
Demon,  δαιμόνιον 
Depart,  άχέρχομαι 
Destroy,  καταλύω 


266 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY 


Devil,  διάβολος 
Die,  αποθνήσκω 
Disciple,  μαθητής 
Do,  χοιέω 

E 

Eat,  έσθίω 
Eat  up,  κατεσθίω 
Enter,  εισέρχομαι 
Eternal,  αιώνιος 
Every,  χάς 
Evil,  κακός 
Eye,  όφθαλμός 

F 

Face,  χρόσωχον 
Faith,  π ί στις 
Faithful,  πιστός 
Father,  πατήρ 
Fear,  φοβέομαι 
Find,  ευρίσκω 
First,  πρώτος 
Follow,  άκολουθέω 
Foot,  πούς 
For  ( conj .),  γάρ 
Forever,  είς  τον  αίώνα,  είς 
τους  αίώνας 
Forgive,  άφίημι 
Friend,  φίλος 

From,  αχό  with  abl.,  χαρά  with 
abl. 

Fulfill,  πληρόω 

G 

Garment,  ίμάτιον 
Give,  δίδωμι 
Glorify,  δοξάζω 
Glory,  δόξα 


Go,  βαίνω,  έρχομαι 
Go  away,  άπέρχομαι 
Go  to,  προσέρχομαι 
God,  Θεός 

Good,  άγαΟός,  καλός 
Gospel,  ευαγγέλιον 
Grace,  χάρις 
Great,  μέγας 
Guard,  φυλάσσω 

Η 

Hand,  χείρ 
Hate,  μισέω 
Have,  έχω 

He  {in  the  oblique  cases),  αυτός 
He  himself  {intensive),  αυτός 
Heal,  θεραπεύω 
Hear,  άκούω 
Heart,  καρό  ία 
Heaven,  ουρανός 
Himself,  herself  {reflexive), 
έαυτοΰ,  έαυτής 
Holy,  άγιος 
Hope,  έλπίς 
Hope  {verb),  έλπίζω 
Hour,  ώρα 
House,  οίκος,  οικία 
How,  πώς 

I 

I,  έγώ 

If,  εί  with  the  ind.,  έάν  with  the 
subj. 

In,  εν  with  loc. 

In  order  that,  ϊνα  with  subj. 
Into,  είς  with  acc. 

It  {in  oblique  cases),  αυτό 
It  itself  {intensive),  αυτό 
Itself  {reflexive),  έαυτου 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY  267 


J 

Joy,  χαρά 

Judge,  κρίνω 

Judgment,  κρίσις 

Justify,  δικαιόω 

Mother,  μήτηρ 

Multitude,  χλήθος 

Myself  ( reflexive ,  in  oblique 
.  cases),  έμαυτοΰ,  -ής. 
Mystery,  μυστήριον 

K 

N 

Keep,  τη  ρέω 

Kill,  άχοκτείνω 

King,  βασιλεύς 

Kingdom,  βασιλεία 

Know,  γινώσκω,  οίδα 

Name,  ονομα 

Nation,  έθνος 

Necessary,  is,  δει 

New,  καινός,  νέος 

Night,  νύξ 

No  one,  ούδείς 

• 

L 

Not,  ού,  ούκ,  ούχ;  μή  with 
subj.,  inf.,  and  partic. 

Last,  έσχατος 

Law,  νόμος 

Lawful,  is,  έξεστι 

Lay,  τίθημι 

Lay  down,  τίθημι 

Lead,  άγω 

Life,  ζωή 

Light,  φως 

Look,  βλέχω 

Look  up,  άναβλέχω 

Lord,  κύριος 

Love,  άγάχη 

Love  (verb),  άγαχάω 

Nothing,  ούδέν 

Now,  νΰν 

0 

Obtain,  έχω 

On,  έν  with  loc.,  έχί  with  loc. 
One  another,  άλλήλων 

Only  begotten,  μονογενής 
Other,  άλλος 

Out  of,  εκ  with  abl. 

P 

M 

Parable,  χαραβολή 

Part,  μέρος 

Paul,  Παύλος 

Make,  χοιέω 

Man,  άνθρωχος 

Manifest,  make,  φανερόω 

Many,  χολύς 

Marvel,  θαυμάζω 

Master,  κύριος 

Mercy,  έλεος 

Month,  στόμα 

Peace,  ειρήνη 

People,  λαός 

Persuade,  χείθω 

Place,  τόχος 

Place  upon,  έχιτίθημι 

Power  ( authority ),  έξουσία 
Power,  δύναμις 

Preach,  κηρύσσω,  εύαγγελίζω 

268 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY 


Priest,  ίερεύς 
Proclaim,  κηρύσσω 
Promise,  έχαγγελία 
Prophet,  χροφήτης 
Pursue,  διώκω 

Q 

Quickly,  ταχέως,  τάχα 

R 

Raise,  έγείρω 
Rather,  μάλλον 
Receive,  λαμβάνω 
Remain,  μένω 
Righteous,  δίκαιος 
Righteousness,  δικαιοσύνη 
Ruler,  αρχών 

S 

Sabbath,  σάββατον 

Salute,  άσχάζομαι 

Same,  αύτός  with  the  article 

Sanctify,  αγιάζω 

Save,  σώζω 

Saviour,  σωτήρ 

Scribe,  γραμματεύς 

Scripture,  γραφή 

Sea,  θάλασσα 

See,  βλέχω 

Seed,  σχέρμα 

Seek,  ζητέω 

Send,  χέμχω,  στέλλω 

Send  forth,  άχοστέλλω 

Servant,  δούλος 

Serve,  διακονέω,  δουλεύω 

Shake,  σαλεύω 

She  {in  the  oblique  cases),  αύτός 


She  herself  ( intensive ),  αύτός 
Sheep,  χρό βατόν 
Shepherd,  χοιμήν 
Sin,  αμαρτία 
So  that,  ώστε 
Son,  υιός  · 

Soul,  ψυχή 
Sow,  σχείρω 
Speak,  λέγω,  λαλέω 
Spirit,  χνεΰμα 
Stand,  ϊ στη  μι 
Stone,  λίθος 
Strong,  ισχυρός 
Sword,  μάχαιρα 
Synagogue,  συναγωγή 

T 

Take,  λαμβάνω 

Take  away,  αίρω,  άχαίρω 

Take  up,  αϊρω 

Teach,  διδάσκω 

Teacher,  διδάσκαλος 

Temple,  ιερόν 

Testament,  διαθήκη 

Than,  ή 

That,  έκεινος 

The,  b,  ή,  τό 

Thief,  ληστής 

Third,  τρίτος 

This,  ουτος,  αυτή,  τούτο 

Thou,  σύ 

Throne,  θρόνος 

Through,  διά  with  genitive 

Throw,  βάλλω 

Thyself  {reflexive),  σεαυτοϋ 

-ης 

Touch,  άχτομαι 
Tribulation,  θλιψις 
Truth,  άλήθεια 
Two,  δύο 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY 


269 


U 

Under,  υχό  with  acc. 

V 

Village,  κώμη 
Voice,  φωνή 

W 

Walk,  χεριχατέω 
Wash,  λούω,  νίχτω 
Way,  οδός 
We,  ήμείς 
Well,  καλώς,  εδ 
What,  see  Who 
When,  όταν,  δτε 
Where,  χοΰ 


Who,  which,  that,  what  (rela- 
tive),  ος,  η,  ο 

Who,  which,  what?  ( interrog .), 
τίς,  τί 
Whole,  όλος 
Why,  τί 
Will,  θέλημα 
Wisdom,  σοφία 
Wish,  θέλω 
Word,  λόγος,  ρήμα 
Work,  έργον 
World,  κόσμος 
Worthy,  άξιος 
Write,  γράφω 


Y 

You  (sing.),  συ 
You  (plu.),  υμείς 


/  ■  ·.·  ( 

'  ...  -  ··  ■  ^'Λ ν' 


- 

' 


ιϊ 


* -  .  ■· 


. 


•· 


•  . 


